Diagrams of Acupuncture Manipulations

++
tffi*
fr, 7\,h,
Compiler I-iu Yan
ffit+ +jlRlEl T.nt$
Translator Li Zhaoguo Wang Jing
T -1
--.b
\.L
-..L,,
/a
B
fr+ Diagrams of Acupuncture
.t,? Manipu lations

7P
:12 (2nd Edition)
t-
ha
ffiFT+tr*Hffi&
N#Efinffi H (CIP}Hffi
&.-z -tW't'Ef*+&^fr
ffn. ffi+t,2008. 4
ISBN 97 8-7 6- I -5323-917
r. fr. . . [. o*J. ..@+.. . @.. . . [1. f|J*-
wffi Iv. R245.3-64
F Efin+KflH ctP Wwffi,+(\oaDffi vatza E
t&frfl frffiW{rlHRAEl * * 4>4-

-L w pl + & f s i[ +itrJwx' Etr
(*L.Eg(tt{Hffi 7i € HF4Sg 2oa235>
ffi+#rE-LWF.ftrns.ffi
fit}lEH,4ffi{Atra\A EpE{
ft;fz 787X10e2 7/76 frlK U.zs l6F +
+w., n6 ++
zoogSsEffilffi.
zoosF 4 Effi lffi.
zoos4 +EH:tr4tFtj
Ed|' +s. oo N
*fi lEfi ft a,#*4fi ffi +rEE€t hl m'
Hf"rIf ffi6il4&
frl6lEls
FJ
c)
o
o
f
+E
Ti€, a
E
* 3
3
(I)
a
+ fr Fffi -4 ffi A 4xf Ffi fi 5 H'u ft fitI *lt &.*W ffi , fr E * rl
x F " H - F +t frlJ Er$, il % +t. {SFi. F|J H fl H'l Hi.A, H =F H
^t+
*ffi 1i +t ffi EJr +'tX, HH 8 tr ?l' i5 * tn n ffi H-fr ft *{ + E h, *ffi H -

l&,+t*+ " H = H( fr 4>> iA filj E, E F,il % T " ;it'frl/-", " * filJ ".. -r
' T NJ" . " -=*ll " fi +€+ 20 *ffifr l* ffi WFWiiCt *, /i nT LL

"
HffiZfi+t*44 ffi" €AFffiff 6tfiU* ,itnT n ffiWffifi:*ffi+t
^"
Diagrams of Acupuncture Manipulations, a first Chinese-English
book on the manipulations of needles, is divided into six chapters. Chap-
ter 1, Essentials of Acupuncfure, introduces the general knowledge of
holding the needle, obtaining acuesthesia and withdrawing the needle.
Chapter 2, Needling Techniques of the Filiform Needle, the core of this
book, introduces over 10 kinds of supplementary techniques used before

and after needling, over 20 kinds of supplementary needling techniques,
8 kinds of general strengthening and reducing techniques, about 23 kinds
of complex needling techniques and other needling techniques. Chapter
3, Needling Techniques in Neijing, mainly introduces Nine Needling
Techniques, Twelve Needling Techniques, Five Needling Techniques,
Three Needling techniques, Qi Directing, etc. Chapter 4, Penetrated

:
a
+
Content Summary
:1
i*
:;
:s
Needling, introcluces about 53 kinds of special penetrated needling tech-
niques. chapter 5, Artistic Needling, introduces 44 kinds of artistic ne
edling techniques effective in clinical use. chapter 6, Special Needling
Techniques, introduces I I kinds of special needling techniques.
This book is rich in content, demonstrating the importance and ne-
cessity of the needling techniques.
rE_
.<
i
,:,
i
,{rl*ltlls r-..r':l:=.11:; jliil-g*€ffi
tE#6
E3co
hq
283
o
XiJft. ,'WflUn , + 6 fr ,!Xf&., *Li@fla\il,,t, t+Af+
fr++ 1e4t
( 6 +fril ) + iL, t i€ + Er6 f+#.w., +t +FF,E 4+wK, + #
A EI H+ + W.W&-fi ^wg
6fr n*Hfr {f *K, ri6 fi + W.W + + +
w& # t? wffi x+ + K, ^ffiH

+ @ +f *friJ *ErJ IEs K "
^+ E ^h
lgK+ E+l^&N" 1e65 ++!t Wft W.+rlF, +
-Hr,\s
4 &Ehnt*ffi , )E + NJBy. h + # frn iL fi ,H. 4 r (F, A E + H H! rtft ft
ffi4*.+ %W, Htr.ff tF FUIE yF, tt * ffi Hl, T S in n, iEf6 fi X- %,
WE h " X+t" t X,WE. ffi#xL8. B ?tiYX-Li& tr E+ H Jl+W
wtdtTtF# ,tee3 +x.rtJ<<ffint H ffi),(r/\ E ffi) u&-Kifi#ffi)
+ffi-W *V,
f!fr X ft F\T " ff- *lJ +rXnU E,fI " . * 6 f,l FA tuI + IFJ
rEffirsif D " +t+ffiixffi 4 rfr , *ffi.4+T z tqx" #+4& ^,&+

E,
1 e83 + B ** EI fu tl'l ifr + FEtl *)i *t xRiW ffi 1L')fi t ffi,* fr + ffr t
v,, w.+ *&KH+t fttr EA tr + E tr +WeE F t*
NJj* ) . ( 4}* >> W
WJ1* R+ ffi4+ 2 rn 4h* #.tt X, U B-it * h X -#+ *+. ( fi 4- fi
tr tt#-+ X ,M&iJ+tr tr EH& Effiffibv,#+FfiW1+ffr&H€,

FfiJT EF,l. tr Fr lE 8 tu?-a,f-t+l* , fttr k*T ( i4He ilrSlh&,
+ ) . ( tfr +t ffi tr +t*lj + rx rttt fr ) . ( ffi i€ ffi til> + Etr w.+ HryI x.F 4a
ffi'. H ftn+*H K++E2ttrr*) .( ++++f+tt f E).( tr#ffif t

FI) . ( +4Ffr +Atr*#>.( tr4Ffi +4ffi*#) . ( + +6^X tFI) .
K ++ !tr6^ + FI ) - fi'ffi lF 4
<( E f$ i tffi m) .( ffir x fi [ 4 rE ) + t6 20
+-" rfrtf ,trPJErJ+ffi ,ffi*HllISJnf K*fiffi+f^ fr+A)+ l0 A

Resume of Author
ffi Wt ?f,r-tF-, &+W,f W* n Xt ufq *fr {* . fulLffic, Aft +X ('J' tr *

ft*ltrt), ('l El F,wftl+€^ ' X'f t#) . ( '{' El *t\'#.H & LX.fr+
*) .( f, E#H'€ xA N>>,((+#*ttR),( f +x E rt4) ( u .
n-&Le>> .Kfr'tr/#ift l t4) .( +IF,,\F* *4ttr.)uVtt6+4) + 80

*ffiefr+"
i:
Liu Yan, male, born in June af 194I, Han nationality and a native
of Songjiang County, Shanghai, and graduated from the undergraduate
program (6-year program) in 1965, and now is a p-rofessor and the first
director of Acumox and Tuina College of Shanghai University of Tradi-
tional Chinese Medicine, a former director of Acupuncture Education

Society of All-China Higher TCM Institutions, a director of TCM Com-
prehensive Therapy Association of Shanghai Society of Chinese Medicine
and Pharmacy and a deputy board chairman of Needling and Moxihustion
Technique Association of China Acupuncture Society.
Professor Liu is a professional specialist in various aspects in acu-
puncture therapy of Chinese medicine. After he graduated in 1965, he

has been engaged in the medical service and educational work and in the
scientific research after his middle age. In the recent years, he has been
contributing his efforts in book complication of his previous professional
expertise. By his rich experience in clinical treatment and education, his
ethical style in medical service and proficient needling techniques, he is
honored as a specialist of "Flying Needling Technique" and has been

deeply appreciated by the patients. He used to be awarded model medical
worker of Shanghai College of Traditional Chinese Medicine and Long
Hua Hospital. He was awarded by "Liberation Daily", "Workers Daily"
and "Metallurgical Newspaper "in 1993. He organized and completed 4
research projects of "Determination Apparatus of Needling Techniques"

and "Physiopathological Efficacy of Different Needling Techniques"and
f,)
was awarded 3 prizes. In 1983 he was invited by us as a visiting scholar
to give lectures in Califomia, US and was highly appreciated by US
partner and Acupuncture Licensing committee of the state. His educa-
tional videotapes on " Needling Techniques of Filiform Needles " and
"Moxibustion Methods" were honored two prizes of outstanding Teach-
ing Materials Award and Excellent Tape Award and Education Award in
audio-video publicarion exhibition of national medical institutions of

, western and chinese medicine. His book on "classic Needling Tech-
niques", compiled with a unique style and in combination of science and

art, was awarded a first prize in competition in the eastern region of chi-
na and whole china, also a highest prize in the successive competitions
of the national institutions of chinese medicine, and was highly evalua-
ted and appreciated by international and domestic coileagues. He has
published over 40 pieces of theses on his achievements in medical service
and education, such as "on Acupuncture Education in universities',,

"Determination of Needling Techniques before and after practice,' and
"Exploration of Naval rherapy", and has also published over 20 books,
such as "Natural rherapies in china", " special Needle Therapies in chi-

fl?"," Compendium of Chinese Naval Therapies", ,.Collection of Chi_
nese Ancient and current Dietetics", "collection of chinese Ancient and
current Medicated Meals", " Compendium of chinese Extraordinary

Points", " collection of chinese combined points", " secret Formulas
selected from Famous Doctors in Jiangsu and Zhejiang province and
shanghai" and "Needling and Moxibustion Methods of Acupoints". In
addition, he also participated the compilation and edition of over ten
books, such as "New Edition of Acupuncture and Moxibustion Dictiona-
ry", &s a deputy editor-in-chief and editing member. Recently, he also
takes part in seven research projects of state and bureau level, such as
"clinical and Mechanism study on Drug Abuse Treated by Acupuncture
and Herbal Preparation" and "Experimental study on Methodology of
fr, '7- -;* E k4

Resume of Autlwr
Transdermal Absorption of 'Salvia and Astragalus Heart-Benefiting Plas-
ter"'. He is impressive in the circle of TCM acupuncture in the whole
country and his achievements have been recorded in over 80 books of
"Chinese Famous Professionals of Contemporary Times", "Volume of
Contemporary Times-Biographies of Chinese Famous Doctors", "Dic-

tionary of Chinese Famous Professionals of Contemporary Education",
"Dictionary of Chinese Educational Specialists", "Dictionary of Chinese
Talents", "Dictionary of Chinese Flourish", "Biography of World Fa-
mous Persons", "Dictionary of World Outstanding Talents" and "Per-

sonage Dictionary of P. R. Clinu".
t+ fr, 'r- -:+- RI

HU --
o
*rl)
FO
o
+f ft + B tt W +F- ffirEW #r EA v*, E h,+'' + R' W *+J 9* 4,fr

^ ^,
Affit?frTtfr.Xtrrfr^'ffi" ffiB+ w.+ffits-ffi,+f 'Zfr-ffiT
E fr, tE,f€E T B. n- .* ffij# * h +t t, IXNM *^Z""|Xf
+f frl,A ffi &
ffJ
68, trx'x'j Ti# &W.h WWil\ #.* ffifr it *p 6 H iE H " t* ^

m E Wft *
ffi+., +lfriliz&tFmtfrE6 ,WF:+*X7'4tJfti9.tu14)t +, tr trr ir'fqE
ffi ,x t#.t&+ E tt fi & lJ
* ffi fr t*, ffi FrtT + *T +t ffi wH Ft Frl ft X\ ffi
xffi" ^
lE& + w4\fr&.6r,^FT T D * &E Ht g +&,H+ %,
H tr n
*.* W.E*+ 4 +t A gI HE- = ItR*-&., -EJiFh T {F E e Ft
^tu\,
x& DJ +_n,F, Wffii H.VJ tu# 4tr - + + tr t+ €, F'l, i4 /* fr Ht ft xlj + rE
**T k,+t + rtF # w ffi ry, ++ trl E {q B * +t tF F tr !u }e, fi

^w. Ê
u*tffi ,4#W40 *+*^#Elftlffitr Ef .#.+ffit+ffii-HFt*
H ffiEffi l++, r^ &.xt @ffi +t Nlrt N* grwffi E r v.r& R r t E f . ,
&+ -Nffi L fr 24WW46S t lil u#w, *ff 5 FI fl , + t {ft E Fr tl'

RfrH t)L++ 51J fl *|J F! &frAffifr tX, 4 fl X4rlr4xt H( S 5 "
+g5 t$E + lna, 9<* ZFI, W+tJWgE lE iE{ll rn D)ffi tr.
rilft
2oo7 +12 E 12 B
Prefaee
Acumox ( acupuncture and moxibustion) is an indispensable part of
traditional Chinese medicine and has made great contribution to the de-
velopment and prosperity of the Chinese nation. With the development
of TCM, acumox not only has spread all over China, but also becomes
internationally popular. However many international acupuncturists only
know some primary knowledge about acumox, but are unfamiliar with
the excellent skills and effective needling techniques at the higher level'
In medical practice, proficiency in needling decides the curative effect'
Therefore how to correctly and efficiently study the needling skills and
techniques is key to the mastery of acumox and the improvement of the
curative effect of acumox.
In TCM university there are many international sfudents, most of

whom specialize in acumox. Some of them even have studied in our uni-
versity for several times, just for the improvement of their needling
skills. They have read many books but still cannot grasp the gist of the
manipulative techniques because there are no books devoted to simple
and systematic explanation of the manipulative techniques. To meet this
need, I have compiled this book based on my personal experience in the
past 40 plus years and the practice of other teachers, doctors and re-
searchers. This Chinese-English book is mainly devoted to the tech-
niques and methods of acupuncture for readers inside and outside China'
There may be some errors in this compilation. The counterparts

both inside and outside China are welcome to point them out so that they
can be corrected.
Liu Yan
December l2,200l
++ a, + -'4- ts
Elg:f
xg
-
a
ffi-*+ f+*tj#6#
CHAPTER 1 BASIC NEEDLING TECHNIQUES
a*#Jr"HfE*4ffi 1
SECTION 1
STRUCTURE AND SIZE OF 1
THE FILIFORM NEEDLE

1.4,++tr'J#*! 1
1. Structure of the filiform needle 2

2. E++#rf.,ffi 2
2. Size of the filiform needle 2
&- -{+
fr -
-TJ
Fft)r* 3
SECTION 2 HOLDING TECHNIQUES 3
1" m#*+lt;* 3
1. Holding with double fingers 3
2. =ffi#ft;* 4
2. Holding with three fingers 4
3. Et##tfr* 4
3. Holding with four fingers 4
4. FffiEE)* 5
4. Holding the handle and pressing the tail 5
5. ffitt9;* 5
5. Holding the body 5
6. ffi+#ff;* 5
6. Holding with double hands 5
dE6. _ #-
fr =TJ #,++i* 6
SECTION 3 PRACTICE OF NEEDLING SKILLS 6
1. 4g&.ffiEStf;* 7
1. The paper-cushion and cotton-pack practice of needling 7
2.HH6+l]* I
Cantents
2. Pradice on oneself 9
3. ffiE#ft;t 9
3. Practice on each other I
ffEi5 ff{n I
SECTION 4 POSTURES 9
1. fiJFh{n 10
1. Supination 10
2.tfr${n 10
2. Pronation 10
3. @J${n 10
3. Side steeping t0
4. {fl#g{n 10
4. Supine sitting 10
5.fiT{*g{r 10
5, Prone sitting t0
6. &'J{*g{n 10
6. Side pronation t0
ffinfr it+t+;* 11
SECTION 5 TECHNIQUES OF INSERTION 11
1. FJ+5*F+
11
1. The needling hand and pressing hand
11
2. trftr* 11
2. lnserting techniques 11
ffî5 ++fr{#Jfrtr,f rAfEmE 16

SECTION 6 THE NEEDLING ANGLE, DIREC- 16
TION AND DEPTH
1. f+*dfrE 16
1. Needling angle 16
2. ++frtfr(aJ 1B
2. Needling direction 't8
3. tf*daE 1B
3. Needling depth 18
ffi+fi /t?f,+E.t+4" 19
SECTION 7 MANIPUI-ATIONS AND ACU. 19
ESTHESIA
1.ti{l+jE 19
1. Manipulations of the needle 19
6 taE
.'ft1 19
2. Acu-esthesia
Hl\ff iEt;* n
SECTION B ACUPOINT PENETRATION n
1. ffifiiJFl-&flftt{t n
1. Acupoint penetration on the same meridian n
2.fr+$E&eitrfi|J n
2. Penetrated needling on the meridians nmrby n
3. H*g,pEpF4e}ffiEtrfirj n
3. Penetration of the meridians intercorly-exteriorly related n
as well as yin and yang relation
ffiLfr gtfit 21
SECTION 9 RETENTION OF THE NEEDLE 21

1. Htgt+ 21
1. Static retention of the needle 21
2.dtBt+ 2.
2. Active retention ol the needle 2.
tr+t Hr+rr
SECTION 10 WITHDRAWAL OF THE NEEDLE za
ffi_-# €+t *lli*

CHAPTER 2
NEEDLING TECHNIQUES FOR
THE FILIFORM NEEDLES
#-ff fittE*+r* 27
SECTION 1 BASIC TECHNIQUES FOR 27
MANIPULATION
1. +Effi;* 27
1. Lifting and thrusting techniques 28
2. t*+ilt 29
2. Rotating techniques 29
#:ff +t*llHfrtrffitr+r* 30
SECTION 2 SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNIQUES 30
USED BEFORE AND AFTER NEEDLING
/
t. aUr!
lfriit 30
1. Measuring 30
Cantents
2. m)* 3J
2. Nail scratching 31
3. tnit 32
3. Nailing 32
4.ffi#;* 32
4. Holding by lingers 33
5'ffi;* 33
5. Fingering 33
6. #tr* u
6. Holding u
7.8.8 35
7. Pinching 35
L tfifir* 35
8. Knocking 35
9. EEr* 36
9. Pressing 36
10. rtJi* 36
10. Tapping 36
11. *t* 37
1'l . Kneading 37
12. Ei* 37
12. Digging 38
3B
SECTION 3
SUPPLEMENTARY TECH, 38
NIQUES FOR MANIPULATION
1. ff;E 3B
1. lnsertion 38
2. fa* 39
2. Rotation 39
3. E;* 39
3. Twisting 39
4. 3S* 40
4. Flicking 40
5' f;il;E 41
5. Scraping 41
6.+H#it 42
6. Finger moving 42
7. frtjt^ 42
7. Stirring 42
8' #;* 42
8. Swinging 42
9' t*;t 43
frt + rf
9. Swaying 43
10" Hffii* 44
10. Swaying for dissipation 44
11. fi;t 44
11 . Swirling M
12.*m;* 45
12. Tremoring 45
13. tS* 45
13. Thrusting 45
14. 1*t&t* 47
14. Pushing by rotation 47
15'*;* 47
15. Pushing 47
16. Ei* 48
16. Suppressing 48
17' lffi;* 48
17. Knocking 48
18. n* 49
18. Flying 49
1e" BJ)* 50
19. Bending 50
20. aht. 50
20. Picking 50
2't-** 51
21. Protruding 51
22. ffi&iE^ 52
22. Bending and cushioning 52
23'H'* 52
23. Seeking 52
24. iE;* 53
24. Withdrawing 53
25'g;E 53
25. Retaining 53
26' Fits 53
26. Lifting 54
27. ffi.* 54
27. Pulling 54
28. fili* 55
28. Pressing the acupoint 55
#roff HH;i].i5+tt 55
SECTION 4
GENERAL STRENGTHEN- 55
ING AND REDUCING TECHNIQUES

Contents
1. tEffi+l't5tt 55
1. Strengthening and reducing techniques by 55
lifting and thrusting
2.ts*+l.E;* 56
rotation
3. ffi&i.l';gt* 57
speed
4. iryffi+h;g)* 57
confrontation and following
5. ry&i,l'tEt* 5B
5. Strengthening and reducing techniques 5B
according to respiration
6. tL^?l';E;E 5B
6. Nine-Six strengthening and reducing tech- 58
niques
7. tfffitr?.l';5t* 59
7. Strengthening and reducing techniques 59
by opening and closing the needled acu-
point
B. +?l.+iEt* 59
B. Normal strengthening and reducing tech- 59
niques
HEfr €rttt*tl+t* 60
SECTION 5
COMPLICATED NEEDL- 60
ING TECHNIQUES
1. Hrlrt;t 60
1. Heat-inducing method 60
2. iEX,H;* 61
2. Cool-inducing method 61
3. pH+HFfr;* 62
3. Yin-hiding-in-yang method 62
4. FE+FAFH)* 63
4. Yang-hiding-in-yin method 63
5. +++'sHi* 64
5. Left-right rotating, up-down thrusting-lifting 64
method
6. zHt&;t 64
6. Dragon-tiger-struggle method u
7. fr,R +W.F^ 65
7. Dragon-tiger-ascending-descending method 65
8. fiR +ffi 66
B. Dragon{iger rising method 66
s. fr.ffi.#.ffi 67
9. Dragon-tiger crossing-rising method 67
10. ifi€t* 6B
10. Qi-pushing method 6B
11. g5it 68
11 . Retention of qi method 6B
12.tfitr;f 69
12. Repeated lifting and pressing method 69
13. trftt* 69
13. Qitlansporting method 69
14. fE€,* 7A
14. Qi-lifting method 70
15. +5t* 71
15. Qi-mediating method -
71
16. l*?l't* 72
16. Pyretic strengthening method 72
17.,HiEit 73
17. Cold reducing method 73
18. ifi^+l';* 73
18. Strengthening method by inducing heat 73
19. ffirFtEt* 75
19. Reducing method by inducing cool sensation 75
20'Ht'*E;* 76
20. Blue-dragon-waggingtail method 76
21. HHffitk)* 77
21 . White-tiger-shaking:head method 77
22.EtuF'î* 77
22. Black-tortoise-exploring-hole method 77
23. #RiBilH* 7B
23. Red-phoenix-meeting-its-source method 7B
tFt't 1l*i5ta 79
I Appendix 1 JJoint-crossing-meridian method 79
t n* 21 58fit6 79
I Appendix 2 JFive-zang-crossing-meridian method 79
tPtt sli6rette BO
I Appendix 3 J Passing-joint crossing-meridian method 80
&J--{+
fr,/\TJ H{Uftr* 81
SECTION 6 OTHER NEEDLING TECHNIQUES 81

1. *{Hrtx 81
1. Needling ying and wei method 81
frt +
Contents
2. +*'J^ 82
2. Single needling method 82
3. t€t*^ 83
3. Rotatory needling method 83
4.#W* 83
4. Sparrow-pecking method 83
5. Effii^ 83
5. Leakage-needling method 83
6. nm^ 84
6. Tremoring-needling method 84
7. f;Ltf^ u
7. lrregular-needling method u
B. lalEft^ 85
8. lntermittent-needling method 85
e. #ttgft;* 85
9. Retaining-needling method 85
10. *m#!t"ft{l* 86
10. Close-open supplementary technique for promoting 86*
qiflow
ffi=# (Fr#)iAftli*
CHAPTER 3 DESCRIPTION OF NEEDLING
TECHNIGUES IN NEIJING
ffi-fr n*il)*
SECTION 1 NINE NEEDLING TECHNIQUES 88
1. ffifi'J 88
1. Shu needling BB-

2. iEiEfi{ 89
2. Distal needling 90_

3. &fr| 90
3. Meridian needling 90
4. *fril 91
4. Collateral needling 91
5. 92
5. ')*d
Muscular needling 92-
6. *E*'J 92
6. Major reducing needling 92
7. +#l 92
7. Cutaneous needling 92
8. EFJ 93
8. Opposite-side needling 93
e.**il 94
9. Cauterized needling 94
( Fffl nt+ 94
I Appendix]Nine needles 94
H=fr +=*il;t 96
SECT]ON 2 T\AELVE NEEDUNG TECIiNIQI.JES 96
1. {Bfi'J 96
'1. Symmetrical needling 96
2.ffifr| 97
2. Trigger needling 97
3'fr*tj 97
3. RehabilitHting needling 97
4.*frl _
9B
4. Ranked needling 9B
5. ffifr\ 99
5. Surrounded needling 99
6. Htffi'J 99
6. Perpendicular needling 99
7. ffifr| 100
7. Shu needling 100
B. S*,J 100
B. Short needling 100
e" F*'J 101
9. Superficial needling 101
10. FEfiI 101
10. Yin needling 101
11. Fftfid 102
1 1. Accompanied needling 142
12.WfrJ 102
12. Repeated and sparse needling 102
H=fr E*tJ)* 103
SECTION 3 FIVE NEEDLING TECHNIQUES 103

1' +*'J 103
1. Semi-needling 103
2.#rry.fr| 104
2. Leopard-spot needling 104
3. *fiJ 105
3. Joint needling 105
4"46fiil 105
4. Hegu needling 105
t
E
Contents €
-'
E
*
5.ffi#J 't06
5. Shu needling 106 '{

e
*
ffiEii =firl;*fn+5t*
107
€-
SECTION 4 TRIPLE NEEDLING AND 107
E
g
OI-DI RECTING TECHNIQUES

1' =iF'J)* 107 a
c
1. Triple needling techniques 107
2. 85t* 107
*g
2. Qi-directing technique 107 s
a
g
ffiv\F tr^fl €
CHAPTER ^4 PENETRATED NEEDUNG .*
f. iEmfi 109 -v'
1. Vertex needling 109

i
2. iEiSff 110
2. lmpulsive needling 110
3. iHxft 110
3. Tongtian needling 110
4. iExftS**'J 111
4. Tongtianzhen Duifengci needling 111
5. iEXrbJ**'l
5. Tongtian-pointing-to-Hui needling
111
111
t
6. iErf,*tt 112
t:
6. Tongdingpang needling 112 i
7.'FFfrA 112
7. Brain-clearing needling 112 J
8. #6x'**il 113
8. Shuaigu duifeng needting 113
e. #tff*gHH*{ 113
9. Zanzhu taiyang opposite needling 113
10. H4rr 114
10. Ear-clearing needling 114
11. -fr,++ 114
11 . Erlong needling 114
12. fi#sHfiU 115
12. Quchai opposite needling 115
13. iEEtr Er.t*{ 115
13. Yingxiang sibai opposite needling 115
14. Uts+4!l 116
.ffim
14, Double he-to-zhong needling 116
15. i&€*n*E*IJ 116
15. lnter-needling between Dicang and Jiache 117
T6" *}UHMFJ 117
16. Da di to jia needling 117
17. )\++l 118
17 " Bazi needling 't18
18. 4itT*T+fiil 118
18. T-shaped needling of Ermen and Xiaguan 118
1e. tr+++FJ 119
19. Crossed needling of Baihui 119
20.;EFf;^ 119
20. Technique for improving eyesight 119
21. WftEHfrl 120
21. Sihua zhiyang needling 120
22. f"tBt+ pa
22. Xiangwei needling 12A
23. Estft^ 121
23. Needling technique on the four points of the back 121
24.ffiFr.'#*'J 122
24. Opposite sword-blade needling on the chest 122
25. H=**|J 123
25. Three-barrier needling for the stomach. 123
26. _Lffi.+&HflE^ 123
26. Weight control technique by the midline of the 123
upper abdomen
27. Ttr+*H[Et 124
27. Weight control technique by the midline of the 124
lower abdomen
28" -bFTTfEfiFfi'J 124
28" Five-row needling with elongated needle on 124
the upper abdomen
2e. TEEf+=fiF*|J 125
29. Triple-row needling with elongated needle on 126
the lower abdomen
30. Tffi#TtEfiFfiJ 126
30. Five-row needling with elongated needle on 126
the lower abdomen
31. fin,HttstfsHfi{ 127
31. Opposite needling on the spleen meridian for 127
weight control
32. ffi*[triH[E^ 128
32" Weight control technique by intersected needling 128
on the abdomen
fr, +
Contents
33.#ffiEHtE^ 129
33. Weight controltechnique by dai qi shu 129
34. Hg*#ilUrt**lj 129
34. Opposite sword-blade needling between Jianyu and 129
Quchi
35. *ryff 130
35. Needling of hardness 130
36. fittbT+*'J 131
36. T-shaped needling of Quchi 131
37. #Zfr.Er.'*fiil 131
37. Opposite sword-blade needling between Yanglao '131
and Zhizheng
38. EEHfl*d 132
38. Ling Ze pointing to xi needling 132
3e. EltfrFJ*'J 132
39. Lingmeng opposite needling 133
40. !F,L'* 133
40. Heart-strengthening technique 133
41. {EFE* 1U
41. Hypnosis needling 1U
42. ffrfi7lt 134
42. Lung-clearing technique 1U
43. rLF*iHr.f#fi'J 135
43. Opposite sword-blade needling between Kongzui 135
and Taiyuan
aa. FtEfrs*'J 135
44. Jian Xi to Gu needling 135
45. 4pHf,f 136
45. Yang-thrusting needling 136
46. Elefi 137
46. Spleen-invigorating needling 137
47. W=i+ 137
47. Triple needling of the knee 137
48. *+T+*d 138
48. Crossed T-shaped needling of Weizhong 138
4e. JilFE 1 ft 138
49. First Yang-penetrating needling 138
50. JllpH2 t+ 139
50. Second Yang-penetrating needling 139
51. JtlpB3 t+ 139
51. Third Yang-penetrating needling 139
52. ;TEff 140
52. Hidrosis-stopping needling 140
53. tli++ 140
4ffi
Wffi
53. Leg-strengthening needling
ffifr# zfr++tt
CHAPTER 5 ARTISTIC NEEDLING
1. H-*git*l| 143
1. Needling four sides of Baihui 143
'143
2. W&.Ftg.fr\
2. Four-flowered needling toward Baihui 144
3. iE*g4trE*il 144
3. Tongtian Luoque tail-chasing needling 1M
4. g=ftf'J 145
4. Three needles for intelligence 145
5. E#=fr*'J 146
5. Xing Chaitriangular needling '146
6. Hfaffitrfir)*{ 146
6. Five fen posterior to the anterior hairline needling 146
7.ffifi=Ftfrl 147
7. Zanzhu three-direction needling 147
B. =fr,ffi* 148
L Triple needling of nose 148
e. IT*fiil 14e
9. Shangxiaguan needling 149
10. FEfi{ 14e
needling
10. Xiangxing 149
11 . i4F:tX/\+*lJ 150
X 1 . Two Yingxiang point double-splay needling 150
12. Effi/\+-,H*lJ 151
'12. Character eight-one point needling for nasal problems 151
13. trfr=fff'J 151
13. Triple needling of Nao 15'l

14. ffi&friJ 152
14. Needling of neck sinus 152
15. rFAFI 152
15. Group needling ol the neck 152
16. g=^*il^ 1s3
16. Needling technique on the three points of the back 153
17. Wftfrl 154
17. Four-flowered needling 154
18. E&fi'J 154
18. Five{lowered needling 154
19. t#fi'J 155
-ffi -+
*,
ffi
Contents
19. Jiaotai needling 155

20. /\;E*'I 155
20. Needling of Baliao 155
21. flfi,Ffr| 156
21. Sacral needling 156
22. ftffi+-a.* 156
22. Seven-needling techniques for asthma 156
23. E=++ 157
23. Needling on the three points of the sacral region 157
24. ffi=ltfrlf,- 157
24. Needling technique on the three points of the hip 157
25. &Rfr.&.frt 158
25. Five-flowered needling of Jiquan 158
26. ff,L.* 159
26. Heart-soothing needling 159
27. fr,ffiW<* 159
27. Needling for soothing the chest and regulating qi 159
28. iE+Lf 160
28. Needling for the promotion of lactation 160
2e.l€g.fr 160
29. Needling for inducing lactation 160
30. =ffi*{ 160
30. Needling of triple Wan 161
31. +Hffi?E*'J 161
31. Plum-needling of Zhongwan, 161
32. F5ftf'J^ 161
32. Five{lower needling technique for the stomach 161
33. TE=H*'J 162
33. Needling of the upper abdominal triangle 162
34. +tr=fr*'J 162
34. Needling of the middle abdominal triangle 163
35. TF=fr*rJ 163
35. Needling of the lower abdominal triangle 163
36. ffiElit*'J 1ffi
36. Square needling of the navel 163
37. ffiE=tfiil 1g
37. Triple-acupoint needling around the umbilicus 1M
38. ??zlcdt 165
38. Water-moving technique 165
39. nfr=+lfriJ 165
39. lntestinal triple needling 165
40. lFjit'+t^ 166
40. lnverted eight needling 166
41. 1Fi&* 166
ruffi
41 . Menstruation regulating technique 166
42.+&.=frfrt 167
42" Needling of Zhongji triangle 167
43. *lsl*{ 168
43. Pubic needling 168
44.*fr|tr- 168
44. Perineal needling 168
45. ffrf'fi 168
45. Heart opening technique 168
46. fiE=A*{ 169
46. Triple He needling in the poplitealfossa 169
47 . E= efrl 170
47. Triple He needling on the foot 170
48. =VEHHigE*'J 170
48. Sanyin to Quan tail-chasing n9-edling 170
4e. st=ff^ 171
49. Triple needling on the ankle 171
t I
Fff :tf+fiil j 172
I Appendix JScalp Acupuncture 172
1. rnffiHfr#+&HFt+fr\ 172
1. Queued needling on the anterior oblique line of 172
vertex-temple
2. Ifimtrfl*fiFfl*rj 173
2. Queued needling on the posterior oblique line ol 173
vertex-temple
s. lFBTffifi*il 174
3. Arrow-shaped needling below the parietal bone 174
4.ffi* I &+:t7fr| 175
4. Parallel needling of the lateral line I of forehead 175
5. ffi# il&+'Gfrl 176
5. Parallel needling of the lateral tine ll of forehead 176
6. ffi# ilt*+tifri| 177
6. Parallel needling of the lateral line lll of forehead 177
7. #.L*&,+'ftfr| 178
7. Parallel needling of the superolateral line of occiput 178
8. ttT#&+'r1fr| 178
8. Parallel needling of the inferoJateral line of occiput 178
ffiAH ffiilFfI fiJT*

CHAPTER 6 SPECIAL NEEDLING TECH.
NIGUES
1. =&+f*'liE
u#ffi
,$ 'sqtu
M ,wiw
Cantents t
J
a
1. Needling with triple-edged needle 181

2. &ffit+f;'J)* 183
2. Cutaneous needling 184
3. &FJtt*'J;* 185
3. lntradermal meedling 185
4. Efffi'ht 187
4. Needling with awn needle 187
5. rEft)* 188
5. Warmed needling 1BB
6. 189
6. ^ftfi'Jt*
Heated needling 189
7. t{t**f}* 191
7. Acupoint injection 191
B. 192
8. ^.&B'Jtg;*
lncision of acupoint 192
e. 193
^{nrE&r*
9. Acupoint catgut embedment 193
10. 196
^{tfr*1,*
10. Acupoint ligation 196
11. t{nffift)X 198
11 , Acupoint fingbr-pressure therapy 198
'.ffi
qgE
-B
fr, -')-F. tt*rj .Ef;t
(jFiAPT[ift, i L]At;tc t{EaDL lt'ic TF:cl-il-i lQuF:t;
H-fr1
SECTION
E*ftfritfrf8il*Effi
STRUCTURE AND SIZE OF
THE FILIFORM NEEDLE
e++ft+tfrtJi6ffiB!*ryfi F, 116frtffHel" . t.FLFE
ffitr#l, * Ffr HT ffi ffi u *r +., lE &.H,ffi #, #6 ffi +Rh

ftljfrtr#iffi.
Filiform needle, the most commonly used needle in clinical
practice, can be used to needle any puncturable acupoints. The fili-
form needle used now, though based on the ancient design, is quite
different from those used in the ancient times in terms of the materi-
als, size and techniques. The needles currently used are mainly
made of stainless steel wires. Silver and gold are sometimes used to
make needles.
1. EftHirFtA 4+t*lHt6trltllrn+SA( Kl 1 - 1)
"
1) ft ffi
(
'+t+.9lf,T\r+tffi,ftUffiLL&,ffi,L{4ft
ffi-ffie
WffiM'XM &ffiffi Fn,,r t+ +t E h Ft # {i "
(2) +t 8,, El tF H'l ffitrl +t E, Fffi fl # Ey ry" frt
*F{i. ^ E1-1 €fttr!6t6
(3) +14 ,+tF0',+ffiWfn*Ftltrr{;l+,7Jffls+r f " stt{Elfla. Fia. 1 - 1 Structure of the filif orm
+t, E+*fi4fift tfilj DrL{+ HtEfr B. needle
( 4) +t H, * ffi q * +2t\4 fttilt il. g " +1' g'*.)b lr+ #I fr, E
Ht+fh"
(s ) ff +R ,* q E*ffi./it*Ftffi)t+14r-,'
1. Structure of the filiform needle 'fhe filiform needle is com-
posed of five parts ( FiS. 1 * I ).
{ 1 ) Handle: The handle, the part for hand to hold and exert
forces on is often wined with copper or aluminunt wires.
( 2) Tail: The tail refers to the end of the handle to which moxa
for warmed needling is often attached.

(3) Point: The point refers to the sharp part appearing like
the pine needle; it is the front of the part inserted into the acu-
points.
(4) Body: The body is the part between the handle andthe
point which should be smooth, straight and elastic.
(5) Root: The rooi is the part connecting the hanille and
body.
tlfi fi .E, Et+EIr)} +fnftfE Hl6tt.

Elffi tf , ft tnt+, t
frwfrfJ+M+ t E r - 2), +ffift& HfmttEgEifi ft;Esifi tt
HfiTffiEf T{EH "
Clinically, the filiform needles are divided into four kinds:
round-handled needle; flower-handled needle, plain-handled
needle and tube-handled needle ( Fig. I -2) . The latter two are
usually used with the aid of the inserting instrument or inserting
tube.
2. A,+*#rflffi 4,+l*l9/-ta., *48 ffi+t I B!tH.4 ffiK

ffi" EBf ,rH€+t H!Kffi.tH4ffl,te1AfriJtfl#.. 1- I ftl
#t -2"
2. Size of the filiform needle According to the thickness and
ll
lengh of the body, the filiform needles are divided into the following
types of size. See Table 1 - 1 and Table I -2.
t 1-1 €ttfErEgftFt
abcd
Table 1 - 1 Size of thickness of the filiform needle
a. Elfrfl' Round-handled needle
b. iLtfr+l Flower-handled needle +*' 26 27 3l 32 33
c. +ffif,i Plain-handled needle number
d. €ifrfl- Tube-handled needle
*A++w,w. 6l{(
B1 -2 diameter( mm)
mm)
0.45 0.42 0. 38 0.34 0.32 0. 30 0.28 0.26
Fis. 1-2 Shape of the iitifott needle
t 1 -2 Eft+(ffiflfi&t
Table 1 -2 Size of length of the filiform needle
*n"& |
2"2"2
, tl
" "l 3456
size
* q {.8- 15 25 40 50 65 75 I00 125 150

Lengh of body
KFt 2s 35 40 40 40 40 55 55 55
6 long handle
L' !
+f 'J
EP" f+6 30 35 35
,.F medium handle
EE g
o +E-16l
20 25 25 30 30 30 40 40 40
short handle
ii ?$n&$1 +1i h mm( E ni* h jti- inch) .

Note: The unit for the new size is mm ( for the oid size is inch)
H=fr nt+E
SECTION 2 HOLDING TECHNIQUES
a E H . Rf+fl F ilI fr tx, -r- f,3 * ++ fi rx . E fl- 4 € fi * " ts

^T*-AIH tlITILffi,
Holding techniques refer to the methods to hold the needles.
Holding means to hold the needle between the fingers and holding
methods refers to the techniques for the acupuncturists to hold and
manipulate the needles. The techniques for holding needles are de-
scribed in the following.
1. 6+E++t+;*
1. Holding with double fingers
Iffi.{f f,;t)
Hru,zs*+F+EffiE€+ltfr ,flrtr'tg+++ti* ( K 1 - 3 ) .
Method
The needle is held between the thumb and index finger B1 -3 mF$flx
(Fig. 1-3). Fig. 1 -3 Holding with double fingers
tflfiillxlfi
I MFEE I
fiffiTffif+ffi.t1,il't$f&"
Clinical Application
Applicable to the use of small needles.
2.=+Atri*;t
2. Holding with three fingers
tffi{f f,r*l
Hru+F#6,z\ ,**tE&91',ffiHflffi ,fF=ffit+ft *( K
| -4) "
Method
The needle is held by the thumb on the side close to the acupunc-
B 1 -4 =ESfiX turist,and index and middle fingers on the other side (Fig.1-a).
Fie. 1 - 4 Holding with three finsers
I ilfiFEH I
i6HT#fF&KB!fIR"
Applicable to the use of longer needles.
3. E+F#ttrt
3. Holding with four fingers
tffi.ff f,r*l !
Hfrl.zi. +*F = ffi Hf++t ffi , u)6ffi t*,48ft H, frfi ro # f+
fl-E( El I -s) "
Method
The thumb, index and middle fingers hold the handle of the
needle, the fourth finger leans on the body of the needles
B1 -5 ruEffiftx
(Fig. I -5).
Fig. 1-5 Holding with four finsers
IMFEHI
i6H TKfl B! ffi ++, friJ Hfr#W,t&+t H, n! U)Ffr rL{"t H g1
€ffi"
Applicable to the use of the long needles in order to prevent the
body of the needle from twisting by leaning the fourth finger against
the body of the needle.
ftlfril#lFt
4. #ffiEE;t
4. Holding the handle and pressing the tail
t*{f f,r*}
ffits .f :+F*f+fttru,7']i+F+6Em R*8,
(K1-6)" =#BdA*|J
Method
B 1 _6 SfiiEEE
The thumb and middle finger hold the handle and the Fig. 1 -6 Holding the handla and pre-
index finger presses the tail of the needle. The needle is inserted ssine the tail
into the acupoint by means of the cooperation of the three fingers
(Fig. 1*6).
I MFEEI
i6ffiTfaftfffi|J"
Applicable to the use of short needle for quick puncturing.
5. #t+git
5. Holding the body
tffi'lff ;*l
Hfrl.m:+EH-ffi r*,F+t H )E +t+*FtI, xf /Efifu t,'&+t
9iffi.nruBfi|J^Fffi( Kl 1 -7) "
Method
Acotton pinched between the thumb and index finger is
fixed on the body near the point of the needle. The needle is
pointed to the acupoint, and the thumb and index finger hold the
cotton ball and insert the needle into the skin forcibly and quickly
(Fig. 1-7).
( ilfiFFeE I E1 -7 trffBE
Fic. 1-7 Holding the bodY
i6HT'RBi'[9]',
Applicable to quick insertion.
6. ffi+#ff;*
6. Holding with double hands
tffi.fttrrx)
H6+frl.ai, F=+F++ +tm,E+fil.zi - ffiffiElflA' tft
m+ffi+t**(Kl I -8)"
Method
'Ihe thumb, index and middle fingers of the right hand hold the
handle while the thumb and index finger of the left hand fixate the
sharp part of the needle ( Fig. I- 8) .
I MFEHI
i6ffi Tffi++ Kfl . t+t,ffit$U+EdA, trJ W rLK4;l€ ffi ,
+fr?}fr/},Wlffi "
Applicable to the use of long needles and awn needles for the
purpose of preventing bending and reducing pain.
B] -8 m+ffiftx te)EI
Fig. 1 -B Holding with double hands
nft *. ffiW[ * ffi ++ ft'l*, ++ +l E &I,y,' tn {+. ffi, E ffi W Jr, :W
++tfr+vffia4+Y,'fE Hffi E m A ffi ,

Note
No matter what method is used, the important point is to hold
the needle tightly and flexibly with the finger strength and proper
holding of the handles.
SECTION 3
H=H
PRACTICE OF NEEDLING SKILLS
rftf*
H.*T tu\ffi )rE+ffi+J fitj+E Ht#6S, *{ t4 ffi +}*EiaH fi *lJ i6
ffi * l+ " ffi )J ffi +'tX'/' tfr H tfr , )tfll?* tF,ffi F tr, [U A ffi
g1
H{i:[fr,R.tr F-6ffi,4f flg{?l'i5+r*6H H in. FZ,ffiJJ 5 ^

+tx6F' rfr., fl a ffi Ht' xE DJ +a ff{ fl {4 . i,E fi 6 xE . m B EE _,a,
!'l
'f i +t nt -o') tF 4 frJ' iHfri^W qA f i fi i6 f il + . E [1, trx + E,I,

t.l n*
h tfr*T+E rt ffi +i* F!# &th " H,+t tfr+fw, *wl it?l "
The needling with filiform needle requires power{ul finger
=*
strength and excellent techniques. The former is the base for maste-
ring the basic techniques of needling, and the latter is the prerequi-
site for curing diseases by needling. Only continuous practice can
enable one to strengthen the power of fingers and to grasp the tech-
niques of manipulation, which, in turn, will enable one to insert the
needle into the skin swiftly without pain and to perform the manipu-
lation of strengthening and reducing techniques freely. On the con-
trary, poor strength of the fingers and manipulation of the needles
may make it difficult and painful to insert the needle into the skin,
to perform harmonious rnanipulative techniques and to obtain satis-
factory needling effect.
The practice of manipulating the filiform needles can be done
with three steps.
1. fr&.mwffifit*
K 1 -e ffigr-*++fr-
0) #'wtfr+f ,ffit/tffi.fu1ffiHffi,*,+fuw,,+fr&.F\ 30 - 50
Fie. 1-9 Paper-cushion practice
fr-Zcm trtr
fr?f+E , K. ffi tlfriJh 8cm f,{l Scm, 9F Hffiry,tr
" * " + W +L'E lE rftff 4 -L Fl t*, 4 )fr.+| ffi h ffi
" ffi* 7)r tF " tfr
u E{, -++t+.#,4, fr-*!n&+€fr++ Et ,{ifr.+t 9*HT
frg& l! , lElB{++E rtu T}ffin -re.trh, i+frll ft#,4H F,E,
FfAAtrfi ,n&*ft iHEtFfi|J " tnrWF-F-t*,4 E+l HtrI u)
* H filJ fr 4, + frV,|FF++ +t H T E, ;F +* E, it iB W i* H in n{,
ihwffi h e4 B trI " lfi.tatr" tfru B{, q wfifr\ xry,wF,ftfF
NZnl+tu *tr ifi ru+F 5 z\ . + :ffi H! EtF t 6 WW +t ffi W dr
El iA* tso Wftr " mwtfrfiryJF{trJffi r - 1. 5 tK F,lN+.

+f,t+d T *fr.tulffi rt ffi+#E+rh E,HH 2 _ 3 t Kkt€
K 1 *10 fiB*t*ttx
+l r-fr 4
" sf I D w4i xx+'4- +t tur tfr, 4, r\i6 D il6 ft t+ * E
IEJ
Fig. 1-10 Cotton-pack practice
fr*lffiry(K1-e)"
(2)
ffiWt-fr+t ,WffiA*W ,ffiffi4t,MH,rf'RAfla\
"ffi,FIH
-EtEfriJEFE t^+t. El&H Wttt9.,
'44 6 - 7cm kl EII* ,rf€,?fr
trI u4 triffi . lS++ . jiE fl, fr +t + & ffi H+l & tF + W ffJ &+A A
tE
tF " l&wtfr tfr,+t Hi, u+rt,+ %,fr++ fi, {4 ft *rl ffi f&, & IR N.(F
iET+ffi H! tltF,,W&Wi* i€ H, $HE fr A, +t H frH. " & tn#
att , El l4Etffi5 W*dJtFWtA^4,4>RFtfrfrFHtT-*sI,
+#* h H.*tr - 4, & lF )jfr 4'R E * ry, )*,flJ Ar lFtil' 18, {S, L' D
+.Effi E in.Si**{2fr91ffiF-( K 1 - 10.K1 1 - 11 ) "
1. The paper-cushion and cotton-pack practice of needling
(1) Paper-cushion practice: The procedure of making the pa- B r 11 Xl+x+Affi4fflE
per-cushion is that the soft rough straw paper or the like is folded up Fie. 1-11 Practice on a big cotton
to 30-50 layers and made into a cuboid 2cmin thickness, 8cm in ball with double hands
lengh and 5cm in width. 'lhe folded paper is fastened by cotton
thread in the form of double cross.
The paper-cushion is used to practise the strength of the fingers
and rotation of the needles.
in the practice of finger strength, one hand holds the paper-cush-
ion, the other hand holds the needle in the style of holding a writing
brush to keep the body of neerlles straight; when the point of the needle
is placed on the paper-cushion, the thumb, index and middle fingers
rotate the needle alternatively backward and forwar'd into the cushion,
and at the sarne time, the fingers gradualiy press the needle into the pa-
per-cushion. Rotate the needle to withdraw when the paper-cushion is

punctured through. Then the procedure is performed on another place.
The practice in such a way is continued till the needle can be inserted
into the cushion perpendicularly without bending and swirling, and the
insertion and withdrawal can be controlled freely. This is the basic
strength of the fingers. In the practice of mtation, the needle is inserted
into the cushion and the handle of the needle is rotated altematively
forward and backward by the thumb, the index and middle fingers. The
rotating angle should be even, the manipulation should be {lexible and
the speed should be free. Usually the needle can be rotated 150 times a
minute. In the practice of needling on paper-cushion, the filiform nee-
dle of 1-1.5 cun is used at first. With enough strength of fingers and
practice, the needle of 2 - 3 cun is used. At the same time manipula-
tion with both hands should be practised to meet clinic need of continu-
ous manipulation of needle (Fig. 1-9).
(2) Cotton-pack practice: The procedure of making the cotton
pack is that a roll of cotton is fastened by thread into a ball with 6 -
7cm in' diameter. The pack, soft inside and tight outside, IS
wrapped by a piece of white cloth and is sutured or fastened by
threads.
Since the cotton pack is soft, it can be used to practise various
techniques of lifting, thrusting, rotating, inserting and withdrawing of
filiform needles. In practice, one may hold the needle in the style of
holding a writing brush and insert it into the cotton ball to practise the
iifting and inserting techniques so as to enable one to needle straight-
ly with proper depth and even range. Based on the previous proce-
dure, the manipulation of lifting and insening is combined with the
manipulation of rotating. The aim is to enable one to lift and insert
the needle with the same range, to rotate with the same force back-
ward and forward, to manipulate the needle with the same speed and
4+
,t fr, t
rI
K
filNl&lw
to perform the procedure of needling with a harmonious, skillful and

free style (Fig. I - 10,Fig I - ll ).
2. eg#++'E iEjifrg&.4F El frrt*tl||t*Et ,HffiT *ft.Vtffi

)J trfl +t* tr, HI D)&. H B g i
iiE :,fi ffi,+f t*,4, U *. H l+* ffi )t {t
t&q$ .ff frlJ ffJffifr,,'fi+ftrtF6*#. F* H Ht&+lli ,frvw,ffiiffi.

fiht+tfirfrfrMffi ,+l HWH_T€, fril ]|mfiJ , Em ,l&*414;l H
An,ffi Jt fr€, +ixF{ % " r1w, 4+ml++ffi )r 5 )t+t.+* 5 {+
tr"Vt *A, U &++ +t ++F Et ffi fr fi E frrJ g{.& ffi /*tr ( Kl 1 - I 2 ) .
2. Practice on oneself After the pracrice of needling on paper-cush-
ion and cotton pack with enough strength of fingers and manipulation,
one nuy practise needling on oneseH to experience the strength of fin-
Elr *rz aa6.'+-++*,
gers, acu-esthesia and manipulation of needle. In the practice on one-
*Fie. 1 - 12 Practice on oneself
seH, it is required to insert the needle without pain or with slight pain.
The body of the needle should be straight and the insertion should be
smooth. Ufting, thrusting, and rotating technigues should be used free-
ly. The strength of the fingers should be even and the manipulation
should be sophisticated. At the same time, one should carefully sense
the relation between the strength of fingers and the insertion of needles,
the techniques of manipulation and acu-esthesia as well as the feeling of
the fingers holding the needle and the feeling of the regions needled
(Fis. 1-12).
B 1 -13 tgEf$+l.,*
3. fHE#ftrt EH*tfrE tt&fi*BtErSi,&fi) rffift*
Fig. 1 -13 Practice on each other
ffi, ffi,,\tXit? rifrfJ- 44 (El I - i3 ) "
3. Practice on each other After practice on oneself, needling can
be done on each other to simulate clinic practice (Fig. 1-13).
K 1 -14 {msfi
Fie. 1-14 Supination
HEfr
4
SFCTION
{T{T
POSTURES
ffiE E+t Nli6;F Bt' H! {4{ntr6 416, x{ TrE ffi Eti( . f,|fiil #
tF ,t+^w+|ffiFfi ]trfi*ri Hfl.+#FaE4Hr " x{ T*{ hE.fr B1-15 ffiHl.fi
ffi Wffi ffi99, EIffi i+ K tK, €'tr ft *rj B!,R # Jt t tr 4, ft *tJ nf ,H, Fie. 1-15 Pronation
filfrillelM
#W4n#gtfti+ ,,fr.u)W.AfrA6?tr ffil\vi\ ,ffi,+ffr (F , ffi# ffitUffi

ifr 11 f ,)f'frzt+
^w+rhtFrul
Proper pnsture is very important for the location of acupoints,
the performance of needling, the retention of needles and the pre-
vention of accidents, especially for some patients with serious disea-
El1-16 fltlHl.fi ses and weak constitution, or nervousness and fear of needling. The
Fie. 'l -16 Side sleeping
selection of posture should be made with the consideration of correct
location of acupoints and convenience of needling by the acupunctu-
rist and comfort of patients.
fifiljn{H
ffituli61d;v6 ,
Commonly selected postures for needling:
1. {tFEF{n iEffi+Bfr9*FB'f fif{it" ,ffi,#

-&'HnT,ffiftB-'lxf
itry,ftlrFF&E4$( Kl 1 - 14) ,
1. Supination To needle acupoints on the front of the body.
Generally it is desirable for the patient to take supination in receiv-
B 1 -17 {mgEsfi ing acupuncture treatment ( Fig. | - 14) .

Fie. 1 - 17 Supine sitting
2. {frHh{n )affiTtrH*FB!XffX( Kl I - ls).
2. Pronatiofl To needle acupoints on the back ( Fig. I - 15 ).
4B / -l--\
X J
3. frll${n iEffiTfi{9#H!fifrx(K 1-16),
3. Side sleeping To needle acupoints on the side (Fig" I -16).
4. {m#s{t i6HTBfr*.mH.4nBfrfBff8*[B![ff^( Kl I - 17).

4. Supine sitting To needle acupoints on the head, faceo anterior
neck and chest ( Fig. 1 -17).
81-18 ffitt$fi
Fig. 1-18 Prone sittine
5. {fr.fts{n i6ffiT*m.E*.IFH*{F!ffiX( K 1 - 18) "
5. Prone sitting To needle acupoints on the vertex, occiput, nape
and back (Fig. 1 -18).
6. fltj.ftS{n iEHTfrtJ*.Hff,fifitl.4*Fffiffirx( Kl I - le),

6. Side pronation To needle acupoints on the side of the head,
neck, cheeks and ears (Fig. 1-19).
B1-1s {rufiSfi
Fig. 1-19 Side pronation
wffi
tttNuEtFt
Hlr,fr utt+E
SECTION 5 TECHNIQUES OF INSERTION
+" ,lXIEi<{nE#F VtE-+fBh" W+" (xffr" E+" )( Kt-

20) , ifrwfriJ+tu1tFffit4E++tr H+l ,jtf{-B{'l4H ,ffi'ffiz
Jr RT fr\+,'fFft i|.'R it ft 8 ffi., f* E |-t +t " ffi + Wi tF ffi , +'
^
4 € E fr zt{nF ffi , lF?,El frVWttrffi tufrdtr ffi{x, * tfr.K*+l +f
HH ffrW#,44f+& f,ffi€ ffi " itft H{, fi!J+5 # +wa'f+*,
dltl:iltiEt , FI uffi?lffiffi ,TstfltEfriJ ,+frAffiMffiiLgeffH , EH
].Efft*.x"
1 . The needling hand and pressing hand The right hand of the
acupuncturist that holds the needle is called needling hand while the FJ+
left hand that presses on the acupoint is called pressing hand +ry+
(Fig. 1 -20) . This shows that the needling hand is mainly for hold-
ing the filiform needle. In the insertion of needle the strengh of the
arm, wrist and finger is concentrated on the needling hand so as to
enable the point of the needle to swiftly puncture through the skin
and to ensure proper manipulation of the needle' The pressing hand
mainly fixates the skin over the acupoint to ensure accurate insertion
of the needle and to prevent the swaying and bending of the body of fri+
the needle. In the insertion of the needle, proper cooperation of the
neediing hand and pressing hand can reduce pain and ensure smooth B -20 n|J+5ffi+
1
insertion as well as regulate and reinforce the acu-esthesia and im- Fre. 1-n The needling hand and press-
prove the curative effect. ine hand
ffi &ffi +*,t4ft filJ lft X E T F! tr rA, E €ff *!J rA glE E&tF
fi EEft B{Fi}H+F, E ffifi B\frj1fl-af.-' 4>F i&4t]fi ,ffi
^.
isfr.
H+l )t +l fr
.t*4p*, a u !E fr B E'R'F r| . PJ *!j + *|J tt
/i,UW +W* tl ffi tl lFffi tttf#S F r)+ . 4,'ft H ffi H! ^fi }*
jS
+fdfiT.
2. lnSerting teChniqUeS The inserting techniques, the techniques
used by the needling hand and the pressing hand in harmonious co-
operation to insert the needle into the skin, are the basic techniques
for the practice of the filiform needle. In the insertion of needles,
mre
T
I
fttfin&tw I
r
l
t
the strength of wrist and fingers must be cooperative to ensure pain- t

I
Iess insertion. i
The inserting techniques for the filiform needle are various ac-
cording to the needling speed and techniques used by the needling
I
hand, posture of the pressing hand, and the inserting instruments
used. Commonly-used modern techniques are described in the fol-
lowing. .
(t) Wt+fftE4}.'t|
1) iEfirj*
l&tFTtxl
il
g
Epl4ft^ffi Tfif{t E ffi B{, rE ffi +g h'WfrfriJft t E, +t

ETH!+E( El 1 -21) " ^ I
I rtfiftfiHI E
ffFj*i6ffiTrofiififti(filqi("
( 1 ) Division according to the speed of insertion T
1) Quick insertion
Method
I
The point of the needle is put against the skin over the acupoint
and inserted into the skin quickly with the strength of the fingers
( Fis. I -21) . :
Applicable to the needling of the acupoints on the limbs and E
ears.
2) aFfriJ]tr. T
--1_-- l&tFn*l
i
B 1 -21 EnIJX Fp{+fJ-Affi + fif{t E ffi s{, E ffi # h rEtENJ W# fr., +t L a

Fie. 1-21 Ouick insertion trTffi+* (W | -22) "
tffiftDffiI
A*U rEfi H T* *$frtuir fil9[ T *Fnft X.
2) Slow insertion
Method
The point of the needle is put against the skin and slowly in-
serted into the skin ( Fig.l -22) . - t:
Clinical Application f
Applicable to the needling of the acupoints on the head and

body.
(2) Ufrlffi+**t*
1) ++#fi rx I
81-22 frfi|J* letFn*l

I
Fie. 1*22 Slow insertion

BpffifrIj+Btfil.m *F{+ft, +fF+FffiF+itfn, +ffiWW.
ffi'ffi
+w,&+r 9T Prt , gffii.tJi:'.?F FJ Ttr], &/sHf ,'f #w*E ffi 1+
+tfriJ^,HfrlF'FfiW>JiFt#E( Kl I -23 )"
I rlfifffrfH )
FW
/(
rlt**i6ffi Tfn*.+t)t+t "
t ee)
rlft^t &,ETffi++++f t 9leHfriJxli,sxs** {* +t Nt
ftHfr|Ji({n (w t -24) "
( 2 ) Division according to the posture of the needling and
pressing hands
I ) Insertion with single hand
\T
Method Et1-23 ++*fi,*
The thumb and index finger of the needling hand hold the ne Fie. 1-23 lnsertion with single hand
edle, the middle finger touchm the acupoint and the belly of the
middle finger leans against -the lower part of body of the needle,
when the thumb and index finger press the needle, the middle finger
bends to insert the needle perpendicularly into the skin, till the
depth required ( Fig. | -23).
Applicable to the insertion of short filiform needles.
Nole
Clinically the needle also can be inserted by one hand holding
the needle body or one hand gnpping the needle tip to puncture the
(Fig. I -24).
acupoint perpendicularly K 1 -24 *Sfl+*#x
2) Iftu)t+l t*, Xf,,r#+A*, rffi ff ft N Hffi , Fie. 1-24 lnsertion by gripping the
sharp part of the needle
t Fewn'*l
Fli DJE+rufF4zi+F H!+5 ry +&iliUnt ,tr++++tK+t'E
#E+ffiry%friJÊTB!+E( Wr -2s) "
IrififrDffil
J}Llti6HTN.H+t)t+t "
2 ) Nailing insertion: also known as finger nailing insertion,
most commonly used in clinic practice.
Method
The thumb or index finger of the left hand nails on the
point, the right hand holds the needle and insert it into the
closely near the margin of the nail (Fig. 1 *25).
Applicable to the insertion of short filiform needles.
3) *f+ffffrx
letFntrl B1-25 rnas#E
Hp tr+ru .4i :+F ffi ii5 € + fH }*+tr 4++l H T W., ffi fr +f'+, Fie. 1-25 Nailing insertion
fr +W. zi +F fr, ++ ft tfr ,,W +l '*xf I& x 'fn , E ,lfi i6 tr ffi B-'f , xI +
wt 6 dr tF, J+l lffi A rx *. ffi L t* w +f friJ E T, H.T. Ffi 4 >F kt lfr
H(Kr-26)" ^
trl'fiftfiffi1
)H't**ffiTKt"f)t+t "
3 ) Gripping insertion
Method
The thumb and index finger of the left hand grip the sharp
ts -26 *trtfix
1 part of the needle with a sterilized cotton ball and the point of the
Fie. 1-26 Grippine insertion needle is exposed. The thumb and index finger of the right hand
hold the handle of the needle. The point of the needle points to
the acupoint. When the point of the needle gets close to the
skin, both hands manipulate in cooperation and insert the needle
into the skin by thrusting or swirling to the depth required (Fig.
| -26).
This method is used to insert long needles.
4) ffilfit{'t*
lRffn*l
Bptr+]fffi *{+, zi, + EIS},7f /tlIl ET XIn }:, E
* -ffi
+ffi ft-, +t +rl'zr, + +H 4 ru. fr - ffi lgl fi|J E T
(wr-27)"
trlfitfrDH )
4) Stretching insertion
@1-27 ttSKtrfirE Method
Fie. 1-27 Stretching insertion
The fingers of the left hand stretch out flatly with the index and
middle fingers or the thumb and index finger forked over the acu-
points. The right hand holds the needle and insert it into the skin
through the space between the index and middle fingers or the thumtr
and index finger ( Fig. 1 - 27 ) .
This method is used to needle the acupoints located on the ab-
domen.
s) EEnrfirf
\ fl lFptFfrtX)
)r i\ FpHtr+ru. zi : +Hl4 fif{R *{.in
EE*FFrrt ffifril A( Kl l - 28 ) "
H! E ffi HE, tr +++ +l }^
s.-28 EEXfbE I IIfiFEH)

= g 1 - 8 Ljf ting and pinching insertion rlL*+4H TE FJ 7t ffi fi! X.fn, HEIJ E ffi g{nff i( F!# fJ'
"
-ffi ,ffi
t
ffi
WW
ffi"fu-
tflfr{l8lrt
5 ) l,ifting and pinching insertion

Method
The thumb and index finger of the left hand pinch the skin over
the acupoint, the right hand holds the needle and inserts from the
upper part of the skin pinched ( Fig. 1 28 ) '
This method is used to needle the acupoints with thin muscles,
especially the acupoints located on the face.
(3) U1fr+t{*F'r}r8 E 1 -2s €ffH+iE
1) gftitft* Fie. 1-29 lnsertion with the tube
lFetFE.rX)
+ ft{ rn K ffi .6 * W mtr,'ft #
ffi A tr . H#l,H +L&ffi
ffi'f ; &ffiKffi Ai66!YiF +lal"Fffi{'l ET+lE Ft ,Etff't
trffiffi T€kl t tr, +ltrT E ETi('fn.L, H + ffi+fr+r friJ
/.&t$E +tRw+t')ifr{^fif{i(ET, f*E,WtrEffiS ( K
ffhfi
1 -29.81 1 -30),
t16fttrffi)
t
6*F{nr!El )t +1, * FI'tfi't6m .
(3) Division according to the inserting device used
1) Insertion with the tube
Method
The tube made of metal, plastics or polymethyl methacrylate is
used as the pressing hand. The plain-handled or tube-handled need-
les of proper length are selected: The tail of the needle is exposed to
the upper opening of the tube and the lower opening of the tube is
put on the acupoint. The tail of the needle is patted or pressed to
punctlrre the point of the needle into the skin over the acupoint.
Then the tube is removed (Fig. 1 -29,Fig. 1*30).
u.#El
It can be used to needle various parts of the body and reduce a. Fixation of the needle
pain. b. fJ f.!**
b. The method of fixating the needle
2) isft?$itft* ". SFi(ii
c- Selection o{ point
WptffrWl d. #fJ lE6
fi tr + ffi rt iS ft #, tW K +i6 Ht +
ffi t+tr{ H! tr *€tt EI d. hepamtion for imrtion of the needle
+FEx€ffiefi # itft ** , T H ETflff xEffii ,,ffif #&*r

e. Hz:rlEfTff
e, Pressing the needle with index finger
^
tF€,{qfiAEiSdF ET,f*,6{+itfJ +$ffi s ( K 1 - 31 ) . f. *n{*H
f. Taking ofl the glass tube
t rlfiffiDffi)
E 1 *30 €ftltftx3iliE
&*F{n}!pJ #+t ,*FItffi'}-Wm "
Fig. 1 -30 The whole procedure of inser-
2 ) Insertion with inserting device
tion with the tube
Method
ffiW
ffiffi
The proper plain-handled or tube-hanclled filiform needle is put
into a ball-pen-shaped or a pistol-shaped device, the lower opening
of which is put on the skin over the acupoint. When the spring is
pulled back, the needle is shot into the skin and then the inserting
device is taken out (Fig. I -31 ).
It can be used to needle any part of the bocly and can reduce pain.
Et1 -31 t+l.8s*flE

Fie. 1-31 lnsertion with inserting device
HAH #
f+fill frtJft lLr firfifi#E
SECTION 6 THE NEEDLIN GAN GLE, DIRECTION
AND DEPTH
tl+f *tJF*tFiJE +, +ffirtnft g, +t frl ffi H.. f E fi i^8, E

tg tE flB . WH ft -,)h.. ffi' rh H tl. 4 frt E +.Ht E F 16 i5' fifi x E
"
4n w EEh, &,fr FR T I4 # *' In E, .6lX, tn 5 E 4h W )t +l R E,
} r"t .lfrE +H
^ $t i&,#aEx, t frvit h b-ws'w.d wif'fr.
"
rlfift-LE-fiftt, fi TfIFtj ffJffip..f Fl.{f;EZl FJ,tfi++.+l
B H!9&tg . f+B Flt E ffi]#r? -^\xHH W fr.frt E X .
In the procedure of needling, correct angle, direction and
depth are key to the reinforcement of the acuesthesia and efficacy
as well as the prevention of accident. The correct location of acu-
points is not simply decided by the location on the surface of the
body. It must be done in coordination with the correct angle, direc-
tion and depth of the insertion of the needle. Only in this way can
the efficacy of needling be fully exerted. Clinically, one single acu-
point may demonstrate different acu-esthesia, transmitting direction
f+*|J and efficacy due to different angle, direction and depth of needling.
frtJ*ffi( K t - 32),*W^Tt\-ffiffiq "

1. Needling angle Needling angle refers to the angle formed be-
tween the needle and the skin during the insertion of the needle
B 1 -32 ft-Fljffitr
(Fig. 1 -32) , The needling angle is divided into three types.
Fie. 1 32 Needling angle
( 1) HfilJ
,rw
,il1 w1efr+.rrfi
letF-fr'txl
E+r H 4 N.ffi *mE e0' ffiEE&HfrU "
tilfift&H)
f t
rlbEiE ffi ,,\'f+ *IJ+,lJfi X
"
( I ) Perpendicular needling
Method
The needle is inse*ed perpendicularly into the skin with an an-
gle of 90" formed between the skin and the body of the needle.
it can be used to needle rnost of the acupoints located on the body.
(2) f'+frlj
le#fr*l
F+l H 5 E ffi * Ee 4s" ffiEE'frF*+*tJ .
trlfitrDffil
J}Li*i6 ffi Tffi FJ fi ii ffi 4[ EI A A tr F NE*$ EI A H T H fitJ .
wFtJH,tfiffX.
(2) Oblique needling
Method
The needle is inserted obliquely into the skin with an angle of
45" formed between the needle and the skin.
It can be used to needle the acupoints with thin muscles or with
important organs beneath or the acupoints forbidden to use perpen-
dicular and deep needling.
(3) +fril
Wefffr'w)
Bpff;*il. }AE*|J, E * H q EffitmE ls" ffiEtrt* p.
FIJ "
trlfiftDH)
rlL*i6H +E ffi t4 rt'#,fn B! fifr X, in **[ B'1,[ft X+ "
(3) Horizontal needling
Method
Also called flat needling, needling beneath the skin, the ne-
edle is inserted horizontally with an angle of 15o formed between the
skin and the body of the needle.
This method is used to needle the acupoints located on the re-
gions with very thin muscles or skin such as the acupoints located on
the head.
r
f
t
I
E
.x
2. ++ frtfi lE *
fri|rt ft1, ftffi )fr.* Ht trljt+t ffi t* )iFfr ffi #tfr
fr ,ffi#r+I' rir " ftfr|Jf rt: E E +t NJffi E ffi *,Mg4€&ffi
ziH ffi itL th tr #t ffi w ifir it, -
& tr i^ ft +f').# Ft ffi wr
(Kl I -33).
2. Needling direction The needling direction refers to the direc-
tion to which the point of the needle points. The needling direction,
though associating with the needling angles, is mainly related to re-
quirement for the treatment of different diseases. Normally the point
%
ffrlF Focus %
EFF Focus
of the needle should point to the focus of the disease ( Fig. 1 -33 ).
3. f+fitjinH ftfrl ffi lfr tr € tE +t HfiU ,,\ Wtl ffrWt*,EW

B 1 _33 ffAJEH ( Kl 1 - 34)
" 'E+fiffXHltt*llifrH ,lrffi,ti(trEAi+i6 ,&rfr|y
Fig. 1 -33 Needling direction tRffiTril{Fn,lFffi+wh%.
Q) Wffi.,Hl*NBfi, Hi*X{ ;HIF.WfrEE, HlFfitJ '
( 2 ) +ff+,42,W88 &.A, )LffiWZ{+, Hii *lJ | + E + Hl&
t+tL#,Hiftxlj.
) ffi'tH ' FHitr.#iffiHi**l; llBifi.A)FHifrfilj,
(3
( 4 ) *F'fn' *ffi ,WH &EWn']- NH'!fif{it, Hiifrlj ; El{.
T w -w_'-fltLh +ffi eb ffi fift i(, Hi^fi|J "

N
3. Needling depth The needling depth refers to the degree of the

:l:
$
body of the needle inserted into the human body
depth for each acupoint is already mentioned
(Fig.
in the
1 -34). The
subject of Acu-
--f- points. A brief introduction is made here according to the following

conditions.
( 1) Constitution: Shallow needling for weak and thin body;
Elr -94 finljaE deep needling for strong and obese people.
Fie. 1 -34 Needline depth (2) Age: Shallow neediing for children, old and weak people; T
deep needling for strcng and young people.
(3 ) Pathologic conditions: Shallow needling for yang syn- E
dromes and new problems; deep needling for yin syndromes and pro-
longed diseases.
T
(4)
Region: Shallow needling for acupoints on the head,
chest, back and places with thin muscles; deep needling for acu-
points on four limbs, thigh, abdomen and places where the muscle T
are thick and rich.
I
f
f
t
.ffiffi
W r9F*iie,
ffi Wwtr I
HT 'l*rr fr++5€f;,
SECTION 7 MANIPULATIONS AND
ACU-ESTHESIA
1 . frtt)t11+1,)Ff,r6+t ,ftt3K4;lfrilxffif(ffi ,hT {ifr.7_1+

€ . rE i5 fi B tltjt't- 4l {4 ffii frfift ilt & ffi +t fril+.t| ( K 1 - 3 5 ) .
1. Manipulations of the needle Manipulation of the needle, also
named per{ormance of the needle, refers to the use of various need-
ling techniques to promote acu-esthesia, regulate acu'esthesia and
perform reinforcing and reducing manipulations ( Fig' 1 - 35 ) .
2. 1+<, 4+<15#r+r ffi , tr,ffiwti fr|J fif{x tr Ffi F *,w14<ffi

ff " gi3ff %.F.ffiMP& F{, tr t * ffi4]tJ+tT H'&ffi&n',Rtutr
tsffi ; E Bt'H#& +E+tT S I4'fBD H! m.ffi .BK'8. F. i# ( K El1-35 {rfiX
Fig. 1 -35 Manipulation of the needle
1 -36. W r -31 ) +, EqiAE-E*[{n. E*€tf"] +1ffi'f€+4
€'fi4€EI4I ft+ tuI ffifr'( K t - 38) " #fit4<ffiMffiZn4F.<"

F{, EAXutslUfi Te ffi fi+rJ, R#{[fiw..m.EK.E+/*ffi "
2. Acu-esthesia Acu-esthesia, also known as arrival of qi, re-
fers to the reaction of meridian qi after the insertion of the needle
into the acupoint. When acu-esthesia is obtained, the acupunc-
ffi
turist will feel moderate, sunken or tense beneath the needle. Pain
And the patient will experience numbness, distension, heaviness

and pain, tense and astringent sensation (Fig. I -36, Fig. 1 -
37 which may transmit to a certain direction and region or elec-
)
trical sensation or sensation of ant creeping. If there is no acu-es-
thesia because of the non-existence of meridian qi, the acupunc-
turist will feel empty beneath the needle and the patient does not
have the sensation of pain, numbness, heaviness and disten-
tion (Fig. 1-38).
1+<5 6 u&e E B! xsit, 6'{XH &XK+tfrl.l m/r if R, ffi
tr El DJ,fH }tbfr t[|I tr fr F! If, E, 5' e fr E *t RFLE, E 6 4+ <
B-'J
Hf #iEl6Eft l#'ff/r\,R "

Acu-esthesia and its speed not only influence the effect of
needling, but also h elp making prognosis of a disease. Clinically
slow acu-esthesia produces poor effect. If there is no acu-esthesia, iii
c
there will be no curative effect.
E 1 -36 -ffp{==
Fig" 1 -36 General acu-esthesia
"$ ffi%
Hffi
filfiil8lFt
SECTION
H/\t
B
ffit;t
ACUPOINT PENETRATION
a.K
a. Ten* snMtion
ft /*, eH tr W.ffi filJ fX . Hfr tt E+l fi|J + i( tr-, tW +l').fri] +K
fB€t5 j6 H! X li, IH6* fr.n INI R.W
-"
Penetration of acupoints, also known as penetration of the
needle and penetrated needling, means to use one needle to punc-
ture several acupoints for the purpose of reinforcing the acu-esthesia
and increasing the curative effect. The performance is like this:
when the needle is inserted into one acupoint, the tip of the needle
reachs to the acupoint nearby without puncturing through the skin on
b.w the other side.
b. Astringent snstion
F 1 *37 DnR=, 1 . EfU IEI-4H(^{n iIffi EXUE F+INJItFJ-4.R S:kli<

fie. 1-37 Scarce acu-esthesia ,fi , nt lg9Effi)e+4.w4<#JtFffi, rr.ffiEH xt14.bkF..ffiffift
-if(K I -39).
1. Acupoint penetration on the same meridian This penetrated
needling is used to needle the acupoints located on the same meridi-
an and can reinforce the function of dredging meridian qi so as to in-
crease the efficacy for the treatment of the meridian diseases
(Fig. 1-39).
2. fdJqliL6.FlEfiil dLE trJAlHt&BhiEE*FQ<gItF,ffi , tsxf

Tet#E#ft*tifRryH@( K 1 -40) "
2. Penetrated needling on the meridians nearby This method
is used to reinforce the function of dredging local meridional qi. It is
significantly effective for the improvement of local symptoms
(Fig. 1-40).
fiA€B
".
a. Electrical *nstion 3. HtE..FE pEgEHcffi E tr*il tfr,l**nHfilJ,l^xlj, *ljffiE
b.4TfrB
b. Sensation of ant creeping
7t,€iB9EZ,]{, EI jE fE ffi FH , r6'F*E , xf Te[#+g#fi friE
ffiffiiEi{*fifr( Kl 1 _41) .
B 1 _38 trffi€- 3. Penetration of the meridians intercorly-exteriorly related as
Fic. 1-38 Special acu-esthesia
well as yin and yang relation This method means perpendicular
ffiffi#
tflNl&lrd
and deep needling characterized by strong stimulation and acu-esthe-

sia. It is effective in regulating yin and yang, the internal and exter-
nal as well as improving general symptoms and treating distal disea-
ses (Fig. I -41).
4|J Xinren
.lianshi
fi{ Neiguan
tE Daling
H,Lfr EITTE
SECTION 9 RETENTION OF THE NEEDLE K 1 *3s tr€En[
Fig. 1 - 39 Penetrated needling on the
XH+t frt i(,:41 +l 4+<+ffiu4 ? I' EX € + * E, W +l W same meridian
^ffi
HTIX n#mnw+t " w+tftH+r*ljrtB!-+8Fr615, xf T
EHfl fi|Jit*atrFHx. iEi$ w+t ,BiIEI DJfidEftfrilHtrfir
ffi+tffidJffi+tFffi(Wt -42). Efl Ermen

ffifr tinggong
When the filiform needle is inserted into the acupoint and
the acu-esthesia is obtained after the needle is manipulated with ffi* Tinghui
certain reducing or strengthening techniques, it is retained in the T* xiaguan
acupoint for a certain period of time. Retention is a very impor-

tant part in the performance of needling, helpful for reinforcing
acu-esthesia and prolonging stimulationo as well as effective for B 1 -40 €BEEfi|J
inducing acu-esthesia and regulating qi. Clinically it is divided Fie. 1- 40 Penetrated needling on the
into two types: static retention of the needle and active retention meridians nearby
of the needle ( Fig. 1 - 42) .
1. tfigft
1. Static retention of the needle
(ffi'ff t-;*)
BpEft'T-i. EE ,if H H A !!, g Ei( Fi , 6FiA ff, grj B{
sf,l"
Method
When the acu-esthesia is obtained, the needle is re-
tained naturally in the acupoint without further manipula-
B 1 -41 *EpEpB4trfi|J
tion. The needle is withdrawn after a proper period of reten- Fie. 1 - 41 Penetration of the meridi-
tion. ans in internal and external as wdl as yin
and yang relation
ffi%
il"1fi{lel6t
Irtf,ffiEE I
* ffi + x$ +f B ffi't P,l!t # * ffr,lg1* . ffi $g,l-t H, #, v\ffi 4-r +l
'El*#, sX"Stltj WZ #
"
it is used [o treat patients with poor tolerance, weak physique
and chronic diseases, or to perform reducing or strengthening need-
ling techniqlres, or patients with diseases of cold pattern for which
ab retention is necessary.
u. ffiw+l
&. Static retention of the needle
b. dJfi+r 2. Algt;+
b, Active retention of the needle
2. Active retention of the needle
g1 - 42 il#g++
Fie. 1-42 Static and active retention
of the needle
tf*{€f,rxl -
ffiitfr4-r4'lt+<4r", g E-E B+ t4 , 4m +f
Bp{€ftx|lA
frE+ F,FE* ,ffrlrdr?+f* , yffillJKttft-E ( Kl I - 43 ) ,
Method
The needle is inserted into the acupoint and manipulated till
the acu-esthesia is obtained, then retain the needle for a certain pe-
riod. During the retention, the needle is frequently manipulated. It
is known as the method for the active retention of the needle, also
called intermittent retention of the needle ( Fig. 1 - 43) .
Irhf eE I
}gtefrB, ?l'ffi i5 g B,l E H!, &EIffi T ++ E
i^Fr.l 4<64
#, BI * )b.+tNJU+tr<, N *ib? +f UiR<, H?+fr, E "
It is used to reinforce acu-esthesia for the purpose of
B 1 -43 lBlgxgfix strengthening asthenia and reducing sthenia. It is also used for
Fie. 1 - 43 lntermittent retention of non-arrival of acu-esthesia after needling. Needling may be ma- I
the needle I
nipulated to induce acu-esthesia and retention of the needle may
be resorted to wait for the acu-esthesia till the acu-esthesia ar- c
B
t
rives.
IEEI
Q) +tfri.I+<EW fJ 56uN-WfJ Hf r{
{4F . ffi 'F. fift X {i E S m€, in - fftfr itr,R F^8,&,iI,,ffi#
fi T'4+ <+fr$
tli6 g+l'i5+ittr, Fp trI fi fi, EI g g r0 - 20 /tl# ;{E xf-E
++rfrffilL, iH,E'llt . m El'H . E +'l+ W.ffi , tr i6 i6 K g ft F{
g
lpl
" #$3-€. W.ff. -Mffi Ix"ffi 1 n WE, rZ'ryEt' 4 g ft & zJ. F{ ;
mxfZl.zJrJL,H#fil F W,l*fr.ffiflX,H # ,6H.hffi+l ,D)
ffiW
*{hi#'ffi'W "
(z) w#xt w +t,!'tn$&,8 frw#F lh ;lli6 f w +l ffr ffi
# ,tn^frE#tF{t )LH,'Rfl# .tr)JiD#.,f+E jiffi # " H1RW
w +t ffit61, fi Et ril.&H,H # tul ffi &"fi *,|H, u) Frt & * + ffi. tl

E+."
(3 ) W +f ffirgl, * Tl*WArc,fllt nqFffi*,f1 9 1nff tr n{ mr
tr WEA Ffi P 4,#t f* WW-s) ( &ffiEE) ftH A ffrS, iI E iE H W^
( K r -44.KI 1-45.K1 I -46) "
Notes B 1 -44 ryeffArtr
( 1) Whether to retain the needle or not and the time of reten- Fie. 1 - 44 Mobile sensation of the
tion after the arrival of the acu-esthesia are decided by the constitu- needle due to respiration
tion and pathologic conditions of the patient as well as the location of

the acupoint. For general cases, when the acu-esthesia is obtained
and proper strengthening and reducing techniques are performed,
the needle may be withdrawn, or retained for l0 - 20 minutes. But
for special diseases, such as chronic, stubborn and convulsive di-
seases, the needle shall be retained for a longer period of time.
Sometimes the needle may be retained for hours in the cases of emer-
gent abdominal syndromes and opisthotonos in tetanus. The need-
le should not be retained for a long time in the treatment of old peo-
ple, children and patients with coma, shock and prostration lest
therapeutic errors be made.
( 2) Acupuncturists must be very careful in deciding whether K 1 -45 El,AWqBflrrffi
the needle should be retained or not. Firstly, retention of the need- Fie. 1 - 45 Mobile sensation of the
needle due to muscular contraction
le is forbidden in the treatment of certain kinds of patients, such as
,&
children unable to cooperate with the acupuncturist, patients
afraid of needling, patients receiving acupuncture treatment for the D
;
u
first time and patients with too weak constitution. Secondly, regions s
unfit for retention of the needle should be excluded, for example,
orbital regions, throat, chest and back, etc. Once the needle is re-
tained, cares must be taken to observe the complexion and facial
expressions of the patient to prevent accidents such as acupuncture
syncope.
(3 )
During the retention of the needle, the needle may be
tremored or vibrated due to respiration or muscular contraction or the
beatingof the vessels nearby. This is a normal phenomenon
(Fig. 1-44, Fig. l-45, Fig. 1-46). B 1 -46 mg$Errfi4rffi
Fie. 1 - 46 Mobile sensation of the
needle due to throbbing of vessels
4t +
ffiffi
r
I
filFtJ l8l{t F
F
i
b-
E
g
H+fr Httn
SECTION 1O WITHDRAWAL OF THE NEEDLE
*i fi, xt/r&+l,iEft. lflffi41 +lNJ+rxEI w +t, *atJffifr,

fifil F *lffiFt?ry*E , HP trI,{ ft "
The withdrawal of the needle is also known as lifting needle or
removal of the needle. After the needling aims and therapeutic re-
quirements are realized by manipulations and retention of needle,
the needle is withdrawn.
g1-47 uffE l&rFfri*l

Fie. 1 - 47 Withdrawal of the needle fr +t ffJit*, * flt E Utr +W. /ri : +F ++ iH 6 T ffi t* E +4
ryWAET,WW tl^tl,*EH€t( W | - 47 ) "

Method
The thumb and index finger of the left hand press by the need-
led acupoint with a sterilized dry cotton ball, and the right hand
rotates the needle slightly within small rarge and lifts it up slowly to
beneath the skin, then the needle is retained for a short period and
then withdrawn ( Fig. I - 47 ).
I UfiFEE I
&F€+l'i5h!6lEl4* ,tlfriJX.W" R.fi" &"'(*fr" Dlk" R.
&+t+L" &' wx+t+L wx'&s fr "
The needle is withdrawn swiftly or slowly combined with the
methods of "quick pressing of the acupoint needled" or "swirling
B 1 -48 6*Sflx
b
F
the needle to enlarge the needled hole" according to different re-

E
Fie. 1- 48 Slow and swift withdrawal

of needle quirements of strenghening or reducing techniques .
E
IFEI
6 trI +fr f$t:fr , E Zl ET S + \fr.W., u)
fr +f st ?11ffif4 *,'f E T
I
B'HmElff TLtrffi" il6Ft hT-fft$ +tl*tf,fryE'#.tr.fr+t

E.fA*HflE.&E$ifl*+( Kl I -48.Kl | -4e).
Note l
When the needle is being withdrawn, the needle may be slight- .i
i
:
ffiM-% f
1
L*
ly rotatecl but should not be rotated to one direction and withdrawn

violently with one hand lest bleeding or pain be caused. Clinically
apart from tlre general withdrawal methods, slow-swift withdrawl, ro-
tating withdrawal and pressing withdrawal of needles are also used
(Fig. 1-48, Fig" 1-49).
'.a. t**fifi*
Rotating withdrawal of needle
b. &trsfl*
b. Presing withdrawal of needle
E -4e ffiESttE
1
Fic. 1-49 Rotatine and pressing_
withdrawal of needle
-+
frt + EEI
ft+
ffiffi
:-:
f,? ---= €+tfiIjr*
(iFiAPTEfi 2 litii-.Dl- il'ic TEOI-if{ ISUF:$ i'-OR
T l-'ii: f: I L I f--O ntvl t iF:EDl- [-:S
H E,fr /l ry'ft +t tnil'i5+t F B! \flixffi#.ffi .

4
This Chapter focuses on the introduction of manipulation of the
needle as well as strengthening and reducing techniques.
ff-fr1
SECTION
?T#86+E
BASIC TECHNIQUES FOR
MANIPULATION
H++)t+I E ,hT Ifr.ffiEFefiX{BD,4iS- *lffiWftffi

HldE 9E,Uh,lf-flr ffirto +- f H ilffi .,f++ ffi *Fx frtr&tFfr *,
f3 h T: tl, t tr$E+t "'41 # +W Affi #4+E fr ffi En +E W + "
+trftftt\ffi€ "
'fi +I g1 e++E A F+r* ru ffi **mff "
After the insertion of the filiform needles, in order to promote
acu-esthesia or further regulate the stimulating intensity of needling
sensation, and direct the sensation to spread and transmit to certain
directions, certain manipulating techniques are used. These tech-
niques are called manipulation of the needle or performing of the
needle which includes the basic manipulating techniques and sup-
plementary techniques.
The basic manipulating techniques include lifting-thrusting
techniques and rotating techniques.
1 . f€ffi tt Bp l4ftFj fifrX -E lfr E E,l6DJ I ET fffi dJ tF fr+r
ffiW
&tF+t*,"
1. Lifting and thrusting techniques When inserled into the acu-
point to a certain depth, the needle is lifted upwarrJs and thrusted
downwards.
l&48fii*l
ftfit]Afif{it tr ,|fr.+l fi itE Ft T*tJ WI?ffi&lFiYLtfr,
i
l^'w tr r"t 5 I iB E l*, tr #t t* tF iH z +ft , tn w F- F- r&, l:T E^ fr1
ra"htrl11#t+fE, BP tEtffii* ( Kl 2 - I).
Method
The needle pushed from the shallow region to the deep region is
called thrusting and withdrawn from the deep region to the shallow
region is called lifting. Such a repeated longitudinal manipulation of
the needle is known as lifting-thrusting techniques ( Fig.2 - I ).
trfiReH )
iEHi,^\r4-ft Bf E+ffi B'.1fEE ft,)ffi4-'W, fr!.lH€di t\; E
Z, &!fr fu|fiEffzj.,,ffi{+F., *U H€drz]' "
It is generally believed that lifting and thrusting with large
range and quick frequency produce greater stimulation, while lifting
and thrusting with small range and slow frequency produce smaller
Bz-r El6X stimulation.

Fie.2-1 Liftinc and thrusting tech-
niques IelEl
(1)xilTElffi fFE Ht Jtzj..EKB! Nk,frfrsF!'R'tr filRfF
B{tnl BtKffi, fi&ffiB#Ht{+F.ffi'H.nftit*F &fi\+tfrI E kl+
m4.ffi+8,
(2) {qffi€ffi* ntw#)r4fr8-r9., {EE6Hlst ,
-fft
t\0.3 -0.s tNH,)ffi4.ZKH.jd,R,€r|ffi 0a 6pfr,IX+++t
H frH",T rtrM.+f friJffi tr, F f"r ffi nH "
Notes
(1) The range, variation of layers, frequency and period of
time of lifting and thrusting should be decided according to the con-
stitution and pathologic condition of the patient as well as the loca-
tion of the acupoints and needling aim.
(2)
Usually lifting and thrusting techniques are performed
with even strength of the fingers, the range should not be too large
and it's advisable to be 0.3 -0.5 cun usually. The frequency
should not be too rapid, 60 times or so per minute is proper. In
wffi
lifting and thrusting the needle, the body of the needle should be
kept straight, the needling angle, direction and depth should not be
changed.
2. W,W;* Hlr,KrftfitjAfif{l\*Eifr E ffi ,frbil/-ft€t. tit Etfu++

th(EVlt*48+*X.
2. Rotating techniques When inserted into a certain depth, the
needle is rotated forward and backward.
B2-2 fiiEX
Fie. 2-2 Fotating techniques
lt*,{€f r* I
ff fr lj ffir ;t tr", (fr El lEfr fr X
. Fr n- F.ffi 8 * w tuI fift +t 11 +l +
rE,Hpxfa+€rx( wl2-2) "
Method
When inserted into the acupoint, the needle is rotated repeat-
edly forward and backward in the acupoint. This technique is called
rotation (Fig.2 - 2) .
I rttFEH )
- fft j.,t } fA +t R E *,, fifr s'lt', { *U # Et di * ; thts= ffi E rl',

)jfraltlF,HF|J#€XrJzJ.,
l:tl
| -r-l
It is generally believed that rotation with large angle and high
frequency produces greater stimulation and vice versa.
B 2 -3 ffiftEtffiE
Fle. 2- 3 Fbtating-lifting-thrusting teclr
teEl nicue
0) t$#ffiE Httuj., fi + B!'F'E. B{ l{ B! Kff +, ffi &ffi
ffiE ffJ Wffi.. X#{i . flfitJ H H'f +tr {+'Fn mfr .
fr 'H, nff
(2) {FHfAf+**B{,ffi )rryfrA,hEqi6 g, -&&€ffi
a r 80" - 360" ,668+ E , 6\\+i H n+fr_fllt 4#+ffiffi ,41
ft E*FR,F fr +4IW fi-R[{F '&fl* fl ffi x&.

jd6'F ,rrfift i" H wiffiffiffifi?ffi#a 6t ffi+€F{ffi}x ( K z -
3 ), E+ffi Af +ffi41?1F-"7ft+frlx'+ (W 2 - 4)
"
Notes
(1) The angle, frequency and period of time of rotation should
be decided according to the constitution and pathologic condition of
the patient as well as the location of the acupoints and the
needling aim.
(2) In the rotation of the needle, the strength of the fingers g2- 4 FarElffix
should be even and the angle should be proper. Usually, the needle Frc. 2- 4 Shaking-lifting-tl-nusting tecl"r
180'- 360" and single directional nique

should be rotated steadily within
ffiffi
rotation should lre avoided lest the muscular fibers be twined and re-
gional pain and difficult withdrawal of the needle be caused.
Clinically there are some combined techniques such as rotating-
lifting-thrusting technique ( Fig. 2 *3) and shaking-lifting-thrusting
technique in which shaking and lifting-thrusting methods are com-
bined (Fis. 2-4).
H=fr ++fi[ HfrEffir,J +f;E

SECTION2 SUPPLEMENTARYTECHNIQUES
USED BEFORE AND AFTER NEED.
E
E
LING E
r
I
h T tfr.+f NJ+ rX rE ffi f+ H- trr t+ Y,{F fl fiU H{ + * n ffi eW-

I
4F, ly\ Rf E F\t+W+l frJ *1 h tr *\ R, it H f,l- *|J Efr E H! ffi Bf + * r

l
€fp.M'gfutr " l
F
5
The supplementary techniques used before and after needling E
E
are for the purpose of better performance of the needling methods

and better therapeutical efficacy of needling.
f*Effit* 1ffi;E i*€flfiljZ'Bfid'1iH'1ffi Et+lX,q h]r+#ffixfA.

.
".
a. Measuring with fingen &Effi i(E .r|&ffi ffi *ffi tEfi ht*ffi XE "
1. Measuring This ^8. supplenlentary manipulating technique is pre-
requisite to needling. It can be further divided into nailing, press- E
ing, forking, rotating, shaking and rolling methods.

E
E
tH,f€f,rt) E
( 1) +#1ffiXi* Bi€H #ry+xffiILXZFfrE,*frJ'Ehit

' E
F
EllYfrffi&}sH'tt( K 2 -5a). E
(2 ) &Effii(i*, f;ntrH#ffi&trffi x,
-ffiffi Tm*F, ff
ffi+ffi.xffi.€,E+( KI2 -sb).
E
b. &Effit* (3 ) h&-ffiXlt' B{iE Etffi tiE FUEILffi .m&}'m€ Ff H+

'
b. Memuring lhrough pressing ffiffi tr,Erffiw, {ifrHhfrm.nffi i({n" in fl*rj 6 J€, til ft ,
I
E 2 -5 ffiX(1) E=E+( W2 -6a) " F
Fie. 2-5 Measuring ( 4 ) iE**ffi i(i*, BiEIE*H{+, {Fx.fi flffiwfr l*. in }ffi
I
I
I
ffiffi E
F
E
gtnt*il/*
# Z, fi, W iL H # IfrF'i, H, L. +X ffi , zJ' fu" {fl ti f,l 6J ift++ . t('H' rlr 6? {n{
n*iv.Jlth#&L,Epft.xzFn#-( Kl 2 - 6b) .
( s ) # +8 +ffi X i*' Fk ft # +tr- +X z)r X1t,'f{ E flA }U, S{11 ffi X
#tfr*( ff|2 *6c) "

Methods
(1) is used to search for the
Measuring with fingers: The nail
acupoints and help insert the needle. This method is used frequently
(Fis.2 -5u).
( 2) Measuring through pressing; The tip of the finger is used to
press on the acupoints. Generally this method is used to deal with
the acupoints on the abdomen like Zhongwan, Tianshu and Qihai,
etc. (Fis.2 -5b).
(3) Measuring through detaching and moving: When tendons
and vessels are confronted and when acupoint is pressed, the fingers
.. it&ffitFt( h*)
a. Merouring thrcugh detaching and moving(Neiguan)
push and move the tendons and vessels forwrd and backward or to
the left or right on measuring an acupoint in order to detach them
apart and exposethe acupoint such as needling Neiguan, Lieque and
Zusanli, etc. ( Fig. 2 - 6") .
( 4) Measuring through rotating: The limbs are rotated to expose

acupoints. On pressing Yanglao, for example, the patient is asked to
bend the elbow, to turn up the palm and tum the small finger inward.
Then the depression appearing on the radial side of the ulnar head is
the location of Yanglao ( Fig. 2 b. tE+€ffit*(#z)
- 6b) .
b. Memuring through rctating( Yanglao)
(5) Measuring through shaking: The joints are pulled for relax-
ation and then the acupoints are pressed (F|g. 2 -6") .
trtfiFtrH I
B i EA frJ T WffiEvX, *A f\ T 4+< "
These methods are used for accurate location of acupoints and
benefit of obtaining acu-esthesia. c. ftl#ffii(*( H&)

c. Measuring thmugh shaking( Yangchi)
2. rlt;t A:ffiHfr.XE, D)lttFTX-L+6-+F ilEffi€{nfffl K2-6 ffix(2)

H!ffiFi+rN. Fie. 2-6 Measuring
2. Nail scratching When the acupoint is located by pressing and

feeling, the acupoint is nailed to make a mark for the insertion of the
needle.
tffi,lf f ,*l
D)# ryEffi i& H,lx li _LI& FR" + " +'F,ffii E &++tX 4[
ffiru
&1tilfi{ltx
)t+t(w2 -7) "

Method
A cross mark is made on the acupoint by nail and the needle is
inserted on the crossing point of the mark (Fig.Z -7).
[ilfiftfiH )
H #r&T ffiH EI E E t {t, {F;# ft st TWT tt & "
To seek or fixate the acupoint and make sure that the needle is
being inserted in the right location.
te;*l
/l\rtg{Hffi )r*ffi, &,E XHe#A ry r)J&€Wffl7t-1,
4i+F. trffi5effi *ilffift&nnfi*, PJ]Bllnffi+E'lri ry UJ&ffJIEh ,
{fr;tT€ffLnTBffi."
Note
g2-7 mx Nailing should be done tenderly. It may also be done in such a
Fie. 2 *7 Nail scratching way by which the nail of the thumb presses the slin to reinforce the
pressure of nailing and to disperse qi and blood beneath the acu-
point.
3. in)E E.Hffi ry E
{UJA ffi+X+&ffi)tflffiBi+*
"
3. Nailing Nail is used to pinch the acupoint to aid insertion.
tl*{f f,r* I
*&^'&'ffi 1- w *, L ffi t)J, l& vl Hf H H7: fr a, tn " n tn EtJ z

)t "(El 2-8)o
Method
The nails of the thumb or index and middle fingers are used to
pinch the area around the acupoint to be inserted along the route of
B 2 -e VJfr,
fie. 2 -8 Nailing
meridian. The strengh for nailing should be even, just like "cutting
byaknife" (Fig.2-8).
t rlfiFtr,ffi I
HTHffiF..m..trfri4Fffi"
To disperse qi and blood and wei and to reduce pain.
4. *F*+;E trr4ft4.xf tF&+t trr Xin}&&fr+tB!f, rX.
@.% ffi%
dffiM
&tfilfiitt*
4. Holding by fingers 'fhe needle is held by fingers to aim at the

acupoint to prepare for the insertinn of the needle.
tffi,f€f rf I
tr++++t,)W+1']p-xtttr'&.$l#ttfirE.ffit+l ( Kl 2 -e) '
Method
The right hand holds the needle and the tip of which
aims at the acupoint to prepare for the insertion of the needle
(Fie. 2 -e).
trlf,fitrH I
/fi FTflfi|JX.
Clinical Application B2-9 ESE
Preparation for needle insertion. fig. 2*9 Holding by fingers
5. {E;* ftffi+ffithN4nw4ta*,w _LT ffiw,'ft.tfr.%.€*€

+1ffi41€+ , FI{i&'t8ffiffi:t6wffi "
5. Fingering Fingers are used to feel along the route of meridian
to promote the circulation of qi. It can be divided into pressed fin-
gering and finger fingering.
tf*,f€f,;*) B2-10 ffiffifi,

0) &'46l*,ffi*ffi'tffi%Wtr.ffi&'1ffi( - 10) " El2
Fie. 2-10 Pressed fingering
(2) ffi'affi't*, ffi ++F ffiW.lEXtiLW4t&*'W l:T ffiW
(Kl2-11)"
Methods
1) Pressed fingering: Fingers are used to press and feel along
(
the meridian route in the manner of drawing continuous small circles
(Fig.2 - 10).
(2 ) Finger fingering: To feel around along the route of the me-
ridian with finger pulps( Fig. 2 * 11 ) .
Irtf,FEH I
*+t ffi I*_n 4+<, e +f tr q lre)&4.<x€_ j+ 4ffi %4+ +,
fri 4PrT #fU'iE -.. ffi + < tF H, &4 ffi h lffi ft fi rfi ia,H #'R lK ^
,L'IE.
This method is used to promote acu-esthesia before needling
and after needling it can promote the circulation of meridian qi and K 2 -11 E:ffifr,
the transmission along the meridians. It can also relieve the detai- Fie. 2-11 Finger fineering
%ffi
-fu,i#sfi,,#
ning of the needle and ease the fear of the patient.
6. ffi rE ffi.&trUffi ry ft*friltlnFfi # #,tA ::T ifil W&., m

u11<,.j8ft.
6. Holding Use fingers to press and knead the meridian on which
the selected acupoints are located for the purpose of promoting the
circulation of qi and dredging meridians.
ti*'fff,)EI
UW#.frtF. F+F+H ry#,+lfriJfi'&FfirL%r,&tT , &4!.&
1ffi1-tfi&*,tlft.flf-kFlrlj" & trItr H-%.tA 6!4t5 j6i({n t:U#
4\fietxiun(K2-12)"
Method
To knead the upper and lower part of the meridian with the
nails of the thumb, index and middle fingers in sections according to
the circulatory route of the meridians. Fingers may be used to sub-
stitute for the needles to press and to nail nearby acupoints along the
same meridian ( Fig. 2 - 12) .
g2- 12 Hx
[ilfifEEI
Fie. 2-12 Holdine 4fr,tfr-%<jtr?1,ftgtJ;t-t-1t8ffi o
To enable the meridian qi to circulate and to promote the flow
of meridian qi.
tEIEI
fiT tn YX, 4W H )1 X)K., uj httJ ffiE ffi .

(2) +XffiI##FE.ffiffiry +A&8 ffi.,+tJBt]/#ry At{nJE ffi
DJ I&, ffiiAtJ FU ffi ry #. X In ffi E % t& LT )t;fI & &, VJ U ffi'I i(
ir lE, tF u 4t&, h E& " W # E- friJF- FtX ffi X, * Et)J 4t-& "
Notes
(1) Kneading should be done tenderly with even strength and
along the direction of meridian circulation. The acupoints are either
kneaded upward or downward. The strength used for kneading
should not be too strong lest the skin be injured.
(2) Both kneading and nailing are done with nal presslng on
the skin. But in nailing, the nail is put around the
the acupoint; in
kneading,. the nail is put on the meridian where the acupoints are Io-
cated. Nailing focuses on the acupoint, rvhile kneading on the meri-
ffiffi
gttilfrilt*
dians. 'Ihe difference between the two is that nailing is to nail the
acupoint, while kneading is to nail the meridians.
7 . {gi*, +'l* ft hX ttYn' t;.t& .lffil1 tit ffi Afr f4 T W nfie+

ffiltrz"
7. Finching This method means to pinch and grasp repeated-
ly along the meridian from the acupoint to the focus of the
disease.
tf*.{f f,;*)
tr + ++ +1, r+ Ih tata tffi 'ft re* 6 w t&, Ft Rffi Ffi
lEfr FSE+, UEE:ffiWh îui]9L
E,q n-F.*tX" 4lf & trIAff *ljBfr
fiffi(K2-13)"
Method
- The right hand holds the needle and the left hand pinches con-
tinuously from the acupoint to the location of the disease along the
circulatory route of the meridian tiil slight pain is felt. This method
can be used before needling (Fig.Z - 13 ).
B2-13
llfiREHI Fie.2-13'EE
Pinchine
[
x+|ffi lfr.n 1+<, E +f EH wT+tE B! tr +.ffii+ + "
To promote acu-esthesia before needling and to direct the flow
of qi after needling.
8. Hfit;* Ai*Elrli( Filh4.t&'4ffi'fififfiA)i I,IZ".Wn -affi

#tfrEZ.
8. Knocking This method means to knock repeatedly along the
meridian from the acupoint to the focus of the disease.
lH,{ffr' ,x)
tr++++t,E+^Xln,lL'#4.%'tffi '4-)$&ZKW!&,fr iRffi Ffi
ffiDffi (W2 -14) .

Method
The right hand holds the needle and left hand repeatedly
knocks along the meridian from the acupoint to the direction of the
82-14 Htfix
focus of the disease till slight pain is felt. The method can be used Fie.2-14 Knocking
before needling is done ( Fig. 2 - 14) .
-';ffiffi#
v*,+ryrur#
etfflfiitE
[ilfiR&H I
IEJ"+gFX'o
It is the same as that for pinching.
F&Emi&2.
9. Pressing This method means to press along the meridian from
the acupoint to the direction of the location of the disease.
l&tFfiitl
fr +t+ +1, E + v!ffi In rLw % ra re&T w tu& rk, D)
,R#flJrtA Wre.hq. ,&&EBt ^x IAH{trIFd A?Xl'htX , nT E-Hit41"
Arê,El &flF|JBfififfi ( K 2 - ls ) "
K2-15 frEE Method
Fie.2-15 Pressins The right hand holds the needle and the four fingers of the left
hand press continuously along the meridian from the acupoint till
slight pain is felt. At the same time, kneading technique can be
used in coordination. The method can be used before needling ( Fig.
2-ts).
[ llfiFeE)
lEl"H.i*" o
It is the same as that for the pinching.
tEE) F
5ArXfH+ &tJ tX, Bp 6 +++ +t, E + V!ffi
ID)7-'{* fr A
i(nFL'tE % !& IE 11 i$& 6 W WlE tX, D{,H, A H $l'tVt ffi h E, ^BI I
F
F-F-;t41 , ArteEl Efl fil.lBffiH ( Kl 2 - 16 ) .
Note
This method is similar to the method of pressed-nailing which is
performed in the way that the right hand holds the needle, the four
82-16 ffitthE,
fingers of the left hand nail continuously along the meridian from the
Fie. 2-16 Pressed-nailine
acupoint till slight pain is felt. This method can be applied repeatedly
and used before needling ( Fig. 2 - i6).
+TfittrZ"
10. Tapping This method means to tap along the meridian to
ffiffi
slfilfrillx
which the selected acupoint belong with fingers before and after in-
serting the needle.
ll*,{f f r* )
ffff Bfrtlit +t ffi ,w.#+ffiY*M{Xtfrffi%t&We##Pp ff ,
*Fi : -sw(w2-17)"
Method
Before or after the insertion of needle, the acupuncturist taps
along the meridian on which the acupoint is located for 3 - 5 times
(Fis.2-t7).
g2-17 0llx
[ilfifiruH I
Fse.2-17 Tapping
is ft Efr El iE 1- tar,& i1nt fr ., +t E trr IF4e iE E, U #rU 4E
<rcH"
This method can activate meridion qi and blood before the in-
sertion of needle and quicken acu-esthesia to promote the circulation
of qi after the insertion of the needle.
11 . *;*
ATEBPH+tg44rffi ffiW*F*&+lX.
11 . Kneading This method is performed by kneading the acupoint
with the belly of the middle or index finger.
(t*,{Ff r* I
A**H +#plZ\ffi #WW1#P ?*+frtfi Fl X{n ( K 2 - 18 )"
Method
To knead the acupoint with the belly of the middle or index fin-
ger (Fig.2 18).
tilfiFEH )
A*X#H +ftfiilBfr , EI{Fflr[ h fla\ 9&. L,mH ffi . # H T H
+tzffi , trJ ffi F.. rb,m. " tn+f fr\FF ry s * n fr-m., El ffii E * ffi
JftIT" tr2-18 RX
Clinical Application Fie.2-18 kneadins
To relax muscles and to disperse qi and blood before needling
aswell as to promote qi flow and to stop bleeding after needling. For
example, the needling of Jingming is easy to cause bleeding, so this
method is frequently used.
12. ffiit AEEH++FiF+EfftX*S'li, t\H$rT4+<"
fi{*M**ffi
4%, d"
w,# f&
4lftlfirllt
12. Digging lhis method is used to dig the acupoint to promote

acu-esthesia.
tffi,ff f,r*l
ffiE+ffi+frffi h fqf1n+E/_ , aI ft.FE.+ffrrlZ# (W 2 -
19).
Method
To dig the acupoint with the fingers of the left hand to avoid re-
peated needling (Fig.2 - 19).
I mfieHI
Eh4+< ,*1+<2ffi ,4.<{RtrZr'11 ,*PEW , nl4ffi%.ffiitE ,
u{ifr.a41.
To promote acu-esthesia or to promote the flow of qi after
E2-1s acu-esthesia by digging along the meridian, if the
is obtained .1
t-
Fic,. 2-19'8X
Diegine meridian qi remains deep inside and reluctant to flow the stag-
I
nant. i
il
g
*
i
H=fr fr++ff,Etr+E E
SECTIONS SUPPLEMENTARYTECHNIQUES E
FOR MANIPULATION !
I
ffi W+fX, ft41 * e++f* H'l +l' fi , Eh A lLlfi,+f
',tt +t ffi
tr 4+<ffiJrr t& fl *tJ H M. W &tF +]i " il6 ft H ffi *r'41 +f ffi En + E
*HTFil]Lffi " E
Supplementary techniques are complements for the basic ma-

E
nipuiating techniques and are used to promote and reinforce acu-es- E
I*
thesia. The following are the commonly used supplementary manipu-

lative techniques in clinic practice.
1 . itt* W+t fri* #, iffIifif ff , tf4rBff , {tfi.+tfrV*4ljtrilE

ffinE,
1. lnsertion The needle is gradually inserted from the shallow re-
'rurffi
'&d'eb#
slfilfr{ltt
gion to the deep region to obtain acu-esthesia and to reach the desir-
able depth.
lt*tFfrt*l
)t+l ffi ,w+t H i*EfrlJ wE,ffiffi nri4, H€* r|J -ft i
E}]]b(w2*20).
Method
After insertion, the needle is gradually pushed from the shallow
region to the deep region till the required depth (Fig.2 -20).
I MFEEI
)fr+tEtfr.+t fi*ErAtrE. * I*.VfiWE|1)t ,HFat+<*,
Ifr<TffiFfr"
After insertion, the needle is thrusted from the exterior region B2-20 HX
to the interior region and from the shallow region to the deep region
Fie.2-20 lnsertion
for the purpose of obtaining acu-esthesia or directing qi to the loca-
tion of the disease.
2. lAiE,W+l *g n-F-fh*, Xn t*Iffi €1, lLl*.'e-a, ig d&

HE.
2. Rotation The needle is rotated repeatedly to reinforce stimula-
tion, promote and strengthen acu-esthesia.
lt*,{f f,r* I
W+tfriJ fift X E, ffi,U fiJ Bfr. Fl E W * E fS d ffi +t
(w2 -2t) .
Method
When inserted, the needle is rotated repeatedly forward and
backward ( Fig.2 -21).
I ilfiREEI
tu tE,fr|Jffi , lFlF4+<, igtE BD "
To reinforce stimulation, to induce and to reinforce acu-esthe-
82-21 ffiX
Fie. 2-21 Rotation
sia.
3. Ht* :W+ltnwa,fi s E w oJJ,Dl fi dE€tTED, if {,E,fFl*

DfaF ifi,f€+o
3. Twisting The needle is twisted to one direction as that for
df% ,@e
ffiffi
I
twisting a thread to strengthen acu-esthesia anrJ guide the acu-esth-
esia to spread to one direction.
lf*{f tr't)
funtL*,tft, ff fi|,l if{t ffi ,q *
rr +FX ff ffirLff ffi , ffi ffl ffi
tnE*#rfti Efr F rA ffi ft a z\ +F ffi , uH' E n'RH W.IflLfr MH ffi
hE. ,rLrlK+f+A-+fitA+frrWdr ,A)&Tnft.€(W z *zz) .
Method
The needle is twisted to one direction as that for twisting a
thread. When the needle is inserted into the acupoint, the thumb
twists the needle, as that for twisting a thread, from the distal in-
terphalangeal joint line of the index finger to the tip of the index
finger unidirectionally till sunken, tense and muscle-twined sen-
sation is felt beneath the needle. The needle may also be rotated
to one single direction with only thrusting and no withdrawing
(Fis.2 -22),
82-22 EX
Fie.2-22 Twistine [ ilfiFEE I
To maintain, promote and discharge qi, to induce warm or cold
sensation.
4. Flicking To {lick the needle with fingers during the retention of

needle and to slightly shake the needle.
(ffi'fftr)E)
+t friJ E tr"Hft r$ E +, D) + ffi #rW fi tr*,+t ffi , IF+t [+'M.
'tffiEtt(w 2 -23)}
"
Method
During the retention of the needle, the handle or tail of the
needle is flicked and the body of the needle is slightly shaken
(Fis.2 -23) .
tilfrFeE )
lil tE ftB, EJJ<;g'ri, frEtJtr1 <(tr<(F ffi
"
B *23 IFX
2 Clinical Application
Fie. 2-23 Flickine To strengthen and promote qi circulation and acu-esthesia.
effi
*ltilfiilltx
5 . f;il ;* trJ ffi +F fr ,ri +F fiiJ dr +I ffi , u) |ft'{fr.4+ €.-elhn l& t l- l* ffi
)f t*,
5. Scraping The handle of the needle is scraped by the thumb or
index finger to promote or to reinforce acu-esthesia.
H*.{f f,r*l
H,+t fril fr.WW. tr, t4.<*8, Ut9ffi ** ffi V't # W., tK,
^* q"
It+t R, ffi 7r ffi ffi ry, H T Ttrt l:fifr frnfriJ d1 +f tfr , lE ffijr€ ( w z -
24)
"
Method
If acu-esthesia is not obtained after the needle is inserted into a
certain depth of the acupoint, the belly of the thumb or middle fin-
ger leans against the tail of the needle and the nail of the index fin-
ger scrape the handle of the needle frequently from the lower to the
upper to promote acu-esthesia ( Fig.2 -24) .
t mfttrH )
+t*&+|frljTi+t H{ffi /_'trI UWE4<,ftfiF-=tFffi " ln
t't#-=E 4 ulrnl&+t fril E & H!'f€ + 5 tr ffi .
This method is used to promote the flow of meridian qi when g2-24 =ff++ElJf,ix
acu-esthesia is not obtained. If acu-esthesia is already obtained, the
Fie.2-24 Three kinds of scraping
use of this technique can promote the transmission and dissipation of technioues with single hand
acu-esthesia.
tElt)
fttEAn+fiJ+t l*#, Bp H
(r) u ]:&E}!i++fljf,l, 116
tr+EffiffiE&f"f ffi*t , WET m)r ,E ,EW+zrffi€ffi , +F

*2s) E2-25 XI+6UflE
HfHxf , *.8+1w,ffitr+wffiry-efl.ltfi-LT{+ftjz( w2
Fie. 2-25 Double hands scraping
4n+FJr'f friJ4+f (Wz -26) "
(2) fitlflnt'4>F+F-n*i5FAtr ,H)rfrA. EllH ,ffiF F-
t*4 ,fra?* efr,Efin"
Notes
1) The above mentioned is scraping with one hand. Clinically
(
scraping is also done with double hands. The left thumb presses the
handle of the needle slightly downward, the index fingers of both
hands bend against each other to hold the body of the needle, the
nail of the right thumb scrapes the handle of the needle El2-26 xl+Er'i6ljftx
(Fig.2-25) or both hands scrape two needles at the same time Fie. 2-26 Simultaneous scraping
( Fig.2 - 26) .
with double hands
d.ffi,%
r
=
#lfil*ilt* $
,,r
(2) ln scraping the needle, the fingers should be flexible and
the strength even. Thus sufficient practice is necessary.
tr
6. fEffi;* ffi+#*#W.dr+l Huigt&frilffi .
6. Finger moving This method is used to move the needle with
fingers to reinforce stimulation.
,r
e.'FrF&4FiFt
\A
a. Middle finger moving
tl*,{f f,*l T
H+ffi,sffi. {t ffiEfizJr ffiW#W.dr+l 9 , * 4U]g $efiJffi H!
W tFffi(w2 - 2't) "

Method
The index, middle or small fingers move the needle trody to
strengthen stimulation (Fig.2 -27 ) .
{
I
/
b. z(#&lfri* lilfifEH) T
b. Index finger moving
}gtefil]# ,+E<,11<"
/>( Clinical Application

To strengthen stimulation, to promote acu-esthesia and qi flow.
1
T
W 7. dr-,* w+tFt'tfrdJF:'t ,}gd&fll* ,EID)+E<.
7. Stirring To stir the retained needle to reinforce acu-esthesia and
I
to promote qi flow.
I
tffi,ff tr,*l T
zJilP{ftffig
c.
c. SmalJ finger moving
W+fnt'ffiih+t W ,EI'f€Bfrtr tS dr , &4 Ifr.LT ft+fr+drtF l
= (w2 -28) .
g2-27 €#x Method
Fie. 2-27 Finger moving
To stir the retained needle by backward-forward rotation, lifting
or thrusting (Fig.2 -28) .
I rftF&H)
jgdEftts ,*BI4E<,TtFu"
To reinforce acu-esthesia, to promote the flow of meridian qi.
8. tr;*
H+ffifif++ttfr )w+t HEtrw# " T fi ftHt'4 pJ+*
*.+t+L,ETSfiift^=l.
8. Swinging The fingers hold the body of the needle and swing
B2-28 AX from the left to the right. In the withdrawal of the needle, the need-
Fic,. 2-28 Stirring le is swung to induce the leakage of qi.
ffiffi
ffiWffi
*lfil*ylE
u*rFfi'ftl
u#yk{;l+fr ,+&4rWl+ )b,+&drtu iliff , +#H{Ft T ,EhtE
T *, w H{ ffi }s- i*, Ifr-t;t+LT ffii tr * &1 +t ( w 2 - 2e )
ffi-
" "
Method ^,
The fingers rotate the handle of the needle and swing the body
of the needle in the withdrawal of the needle. The needle should be
swung upward and downward, from the left to the right. In the with-
drawal of the needle, the needle is swung to enlarge the needling
hole and then is swiftly withdrawn ( Fig.2 -29) .
[ ilfifiEEI
" S ft Ff +8 rr ft
l&ftffi Ht ffJ HtE H, €
ln fU ir zt tlt tF ffi
+F
TL,H]fE9-H*fF,ffi"
B2 -2e tEX
Fie. 2-29 Swineing
This method is used to reinforce acu-esthesia, promote qi flow
to discharge pathogenic factors. It is helpful to swing the needle to
enlarge the needling hole for purging sthenic factors and clearing
away heat.
e. H;*ffi++F&++ +1ffi ,'&+l HE6WH,EI U+E<41<"

9. Swaying The fingers are used to hold the handle of the needle
and to sway it from the left to the right to promote acu-esthesia and
the flow of meridian qi.
(H'{ff,}El
+tfll4+-=\EW+f&ft,rif , mfil.zi - ffif+flffi ,EE*W
ffiffi#ffiEa)1+t9(Kl2 -30) "
Method
When acu-esthesia is obtained, the needle is lifted a little and
held between the thumb and index finger to sway slightly and fre-
quently from the left to the right (Fig.2 - 30 ) .
( ilfiFEH I
+FH T{E€ 11 < " +t fril trF=i. Z. e,'ffi.#A +I H, trJ {F
-=1$e ;<5EFî-', Ej {F-=i f"l iE4l 'ffi,4- ,H HT}Jfrl&ffitr
ffifiR,
This method is used to promote the flow of qi. If acu-esthesia is K2-30 EX
not felt after needlingt slight swaying of the needle can promote acu- Fie. 2 -30 Swayine
ffiffi
&lfilfilllx
esthesia; when acu-esthesia is felt, the swaying of the needle can

promote qi to flow to a distant region. I'his method is often used to
reinforce and to spread acu-esthesia. '
t#)E)
wEEEWt)1,6H -LT,EE 16l Hf E+*-, ww w&ry.,^
Wffi)Jlffi&"
Note
The needle is swayed from the left to the right, but not simulta-
neously from the left to the right and up and down. The swaying
should be gentle and moderate, and overexerted swaying is not ad-
visable.
10. Hff;t +tffiJ#frW)fr ,1+<tr&A1*W1fr.ffiffiirffi., LiliH

l*-l!
L:E lJ a
10. Swaying for dissipation When needling the regions around

the nodules, swaying for dissipation is used to move the body of the
needle to disperse the sensation and to dissipate the nodules.
t
b-
t|*,iff,;*l *
F
+t frJfriJtr#ff n+ W VrfiS, E+t T <4.8,
+fr} . zs +F
- t] E. l
ft {+ fi +ru, l"J EE E 4 s " R u fr It)) W & z\ W ry +p.E A, lfr. ffi ffittr ;-

I
F
tr( K 2-31) "
Method
When the needle is inserted near the tumescence around the
nodules and after acu-esthesia is obtained, the handle of the needle
is held between the thumb and index finger of the right hand to move
back and forth like a pendulum clock within 45" to dissipate acu-es-
thesia (Fig.2 - 31 ) .
t [6FeE I
*ffiT#-ffiHfrF,ry'VJ"
B 2 -31 EflX Clinical Application
Fie. 2-31 Swaying for dissipation To dissipate nodules and to eliminate lumps.
11 . #i* >W+t 4&WM#F, r'1 fi tFIJH€, HTFBFIII FJ fla\98 F-

pl
zrl t
"
11 . Swiding The needle is swayed in a circle to reinforce stimula-
iion and to relax the muscles on the abdomen.
t
i
It*tFfii*1
#W-ffi,'Fr'+t qMNqEBfrg 5" - 40" ffi,(F-W#.M+tdr
3 - sI*J (W2 -32)
"
Method
The needle is swirled around for 3 - 5 circles on the abdomen
with an angel of 5"- 40o fcrrmed by the body of the needle and the
skin. (Fis.2 -32) .
t MFEHI
rE-i. fi <, +Ei fi tE +f m, h WW.K tffi . W.EK, lH 4t ft
+ft" ^
To regulate qi flow, to harmonize qi and to strengthen acu-es-
-thesia for the treatment of abdominal pain,
abdominal distension and
g2-32 frx
dyspepsia.
Fie. 2*32 Swirline
12. Tremoring When holding the needle, the hand slightly shakes
the body of the needle to tremor it.
tffi{ff,,*l
ftFJ {RE E, tr +++ +t tfr
-Eg#ffiEgn , ffi zJ' flFE .,Rm+ B! F1ffi .
fs*+}*,tfr+t ( w 2 - 33)
"
Method
After being inserted into a certain depth ofthe acupoint, the need-
le is held by the right hand to manipulate with lifting, thrusting and ro-
tating techniques in high frequency and smail range, so that the body of
the needle is slightly trerrnred( Fig.Z - 33) .
lltti
[ ilfifteEI B 2 -33 Em*
,s r* El ,f,E ,fF +lT 4+< , ffi9tlfiE<lFffi , [ trI ]g dE ff FlJ H fi " Fig. 2 -33 Tremorins
To promote acu-esthesia and qi flow and to reinforce acu-esthe-
sia.
13. f.s;* +ftri1n6ffi €+S,\hin€2'6'R flt ffi _-ffi ,Ritzj.

nEHHttrtffifa+f *"
13. Thrusting The inserted needle is quickly lifted and thmsted in
the same region like a bird pecking food. The needle is lifted,
thrusted, and rotated swiftly in a small range.
ffiffi
&liilfri l#
Iffi,lf trr*l
MUWXfr fi ffi Hfi )b *, |fr.+l +lf IEfiz tT uJ' fl E lfi. Vt &Iffi ffi ffi
++ ,{fr.+l H6 ill6lE ,ltrx ir iS in rE, in '&W& W.tuEA
(w2 - 34) "
Method
When being inserted into a certain depth, the needle is lifted
lightly but thrusted heavily in the same region mainly by shaking the
wrist joint. lifted, thmsted and rotated
The tip of the needle is kept
upward and downward in a small range inside the acupoint. The
needle does not come in and out, but appears going in and out like a
sparrow pgcking ( Fig. 2 - 34) . :
IilfiFEH I
I
tEm "
This method is used to promote the coming and flow of qi, it
can reinforce acu-esthesia and maintain qi beneath the needle.
IF}EI
BptrJ.fr&#&Z"'ffifiU#t$ ,UffiXfr FtEgnt+ffii1-+l " ffi

5€+fr Zi E, +S € 4 F In l:T 11 +t, E A E +ffi , {E fEH zJ., $fr,4
,R,IKEÂ ,*W&{+W4+S 1s0 _ 300 li. EffiFIJEA_LT
7tfFHnufl w,H w fr.wwE€.k o
B2-34 ffiX
Fie" 2-34 Thrustins
Hfrdrh+.,dfijEffi" frffiA+&" , trrtrfiN{4*;}$*4tJ U}ffiXfi
H/_-friJ,
Note
Thrusting technique should not be performed intermittently in a
large range. The rotation of the needle should be slight and within a
small range. The important point is that the thrusting must be done
continuously and the needle is manipulated mainly by the shaking of
the wrist. Compared with lifting and inserting techniqueso thrusting
is characterized by small range, high frequency and nonchange of
depth in the same region. Generally the needle is thrusted 150 *300
times a minute. While Iifting and insefiing are done upward and
&1filfrlt l/*
downward in a large range with obvious changes of the depth.

'Ihrusting is similar to tremoring. But in tremoring, the part
that tremors is the finger and the tremoring should be mild. While in
thrusting, the part that tremors is the wrist like a sparrow pecking,
therefore it is more powerful. The difference between the two lies in
the strength used.
14. tsfEr* y<4t6)s, ETffi A*t*S#fl'ffi

,EI U)',f1<,
14. Pushing by rotation When qi cannot flow to a distant region,
this method is used to promote qi flow by rotating the tail of the nee-
dle.
tffi.fff
'tl
< {- 6 iE Hf , ffi fr } . zi +F {+ +l fr 4+ -=" 4i. P}# & #, +l +ffi
-
fi H'*,41 <fr\ fr fr , fil ffi Fr Et € € ffi H J1 tuffiWtt tF, frl ffi i6 3lJ
# W" E ffiryBf , Bp {4 E rE El, * tr |+ W1 ti't Bt *S H tR, tn Ih:,€ :
+effi]kEx+wtk(w2 -3s) "
Method
If qi is weak to flow to the distant region, the thumb and index E 2 -35 ffi#x
finger mildly lift the needle up from the region with acu-esthesia. Fig. 2 -35 Pushing by rotation
The tip of the needle is pointed to the direction for qi to flow. The
thumb rotates the handle of the needle forward to the posterior trans-
verse lines on the belly of the thumb, then the needle is mildly rota-
ted back. This procedure is continued for several times or oYer a
dozen times (Fig.2 - 35 ) .
tlleF&H)
4l-<M-=.
To promote qi flow.
15. &;*
l4tt"Tfffitri+,iE,fEBfi,B5Eo
15. Pushing To push the needle down a little to reinforce acues-
thesia.
tffi'{ff,)*l
'&+tr &tHtri.+, {tr^,ffiFffi'tt( K 2 - 36)
"
Method
The needle is pressed down a little, but is not thrusted and lif- K2-36 mx
Fie. 2 -36 Pushing
ted ( Fis.2 -36) .
ffiw
[ ilfifieH )
To reinforce acu-esthesia, to induce acu-esthesia and to sup-
plement qi.
16. E;*+tfriJF,ft1#tL{"falfrt'rTmz#. "

16. Suppressing To press the tail of the needle after inser-
tion.
I#tFfii*l
*friJ4etr"tr, H z\ tF . + ffi&,Wffi'R IE{'l R ,[fr-f* WT m
(w2-37)"
Method
To press the tail of the needle with the index, middle and the
fourth fingers after acu-esthesia is obtained to enable the body of the
needle to sink (Fig.2 * 37 ) ,
B2-37 EE
Fie.2*37 Suppressins
t mFeE)
ffi T +t friJ4+< tr fr! 41 <.. S ft fn /:u 9E fitJ # .
To promote qi flow and acu-esthesia as well as to strengthen
stimulation.
17. ffr* +tfriJF ffiffi-#.*rtfrFJfr.ft riffitrffiiffjt.

17. Knocking When the needle is inserted, the tail of the needle
is knocked by fingers to gradually push the needle inside.
TF*|EfiiE)
+t frIJ'4+ < E, F H + +F EX,rr +F xf 7E ff E ffi d, |fr. * taffi--ffi
'.hffiiffit(Kl2*38)"
Method
E 2 _38 HiE When acu-esthesia is felt, the tail of the needle is knocked by
Fig. 2 -38 Knockine the index and middle fingers to gradually push the needle tip inside
(Fis.Z-38).
[ilfiFEE I
ffi T+tfril'4+F<tr*\T:5.^,+-i.,{Fft/*TlHX.+4+F.YJnl&
ru+rffi"
&lf|frillx
'Io promote qi flow after acu-esthesia is obtained so as to keep,
reinforce and spread the acu-esthesia.
1 8. ni* +ffiffit++ttfr ,w+l +wf,#, * th*w.,rt\.Ht +ffilv

ffin-r,q{.
18. Flying The fingers hold the handle of the needle and the need-
le is rotated and released. When releasing the needle, the stret-
ching fingers look like a flying bird.
l#tFfit*,)
+t ffiZs4+<#, ffiE +fr} .m:fHfr,t+fi ffimWWWW,
+6,
f*ffil[*w# ,*w*i\.,trF-ffih, fiinagEro, frIfifi1 ( K
2 -3e) ,&EI+a( K 2 -40) "
K 2 -3e -KE
Method
Fie. 2*39 Flyine
If acu-esthesia in not felt after needling, the thumb and index fin-
ger of the right hand hold the handle of the needle to rotate for several
times and then free it. This pmcedure is continued for several times just
like the flying of a bird. That is why it is called fly,ttg (Fig.2-39).
Flyirg may be performed singularly (Fig. 2 - N) '
( mftfiH)
+*ffi tF H4T 4E<,:41 <, +'fFfl fitl Bff jg tE "
To promote acu-esthesia and qi {low and to strengthen stimula-
tion.
te't) tr2-40 tsnx

-(.E& rlfi HA E-KrXfilH n rXffi ffi ' Fie. 2-40 Singular flYine
( 1) î
H-(8, EpiAElAft H )Llk+tF#( K 2 -4r) "
(2) ffiAi*, Bpfri.zi+F++ +t,N+=#gH{ trn,!nEF
++gnztt( K 2-42) "
Notes
There are two more methods of flying in clinic practice: Flying
with rubbing and flying with fanning.
( 1) Flying with rubbing: Flying and rubbing are used at the
same time (Fig.z * 4l) .
( 2) Flying with fanning: The needle is held by the thumb and

the index finger. The rest fingers are shaking like a fan as a bird fly- B2- 41 E-KX
ing in the sky ( Fig. 2 - 42) . Fie.2-41 Flying with rubbing
# rtil'"?
iri.ii=;1#
Elftl4rllx 3
'{
i
1 e. BJ )r* ;fi+f &<tr ,W+lffi.l4l, {ntJ HF iiu 1: * ffirt'*, X fli Fl'
+ITE :
" :
19. Bending When acu-esthesia is felt after insertion, the needle
is bent to one side to be manipulated. It's also called lying needle
:
method.
tffi{€f,;*)
< ffi , W +t &tU i* tr, W. Fl +t 9, +1,+ ffi frJ ffi Ffr ,'4i
+f friJ'4+
ffi++fi *&ff .f&+it, lfr-4;f ffif4ffi Ffi lt + ( W z * 43),

g2- 42 B-KE Method
The needle is lifted to the shallow region when acu.esthesia is
Fie. 2-42 Flying with fannins
obtained and is bent with the tip pointing to the location of the di-
sease to direct qi to flow to the focus of the disease by rotation or
other methods ( Fig. 2 - 43) .
t ilfiReH)
HH T S-1 .Tt -=, {Fff ts.f€ E ffi Ffi "
This method is usually used to promote qi flow and to direct
acu-esthesia to the focus of the disease.
2a. A$* +tftl'i+<E, ffiffi:W+t*t\4W'ffi41tu1W{n\W.nl

"
20. Picking When acu-esthesia is obtained, the point of the need-
B2-43 EIX le moves and picks on both sides of the meridian.
Fie. 2- 43 Bendine
tH,fff,r*l
+tNJ'i+<E ,'&E +zi. +.fr}ffi'REftm, ffi*++ll+,
>w +f + frJ 4 ht'ffi 11 ftI W M\ W. D:rl, An'& +rJ h re + nl S - ffi
(w2 -44) "
Method
After acu-esthesia is obtained, the needle is held by the thumb,
index and middle fingers of the right hand and bent slightly. The
point of the needle moyes and picks on both sides of the meridian as
to pick something out from the fissure (Fig.2-44).
t ffifeH )
82-44 A\*,
Fie.2-M Picking Clinical Application
To strengthen stimulation, to promote and to direct qi flow and
ffiffi
& l ft'1 fiil /*
acu-esthesia to disperse along the meridian.
21 . *;* fHfrl.tr -' ffi E l+ +f tfr , + ffi & E W.dr+1 H, El #ft{

ftTHSrr"1tErbr +fW."
21. Protruding T'he needle is held between the thumb and index
finger, and is pressed and moved by the middle finger to control the
transmission of acu-esthesia lo onr: direction.
It*rFfri*,1
*t*wlr+l*|Jf+^{&#i )-fr6if1 ,4+<E:w+lfH E, ffiff} -,ri
€ 2.{ . H'fFftB Fr-L+iffi , EIW+I'WI"tT Fltr& ; ffi,iFtlB f"l

Trffi ,alwrtwf,lir"rBfr& (w 2 - 4s)
"
Method
When acu-esthesia is obtained, the needle is lifted a little. The
thumb and index finger hold the handle of the needle, the middle
finger presses and flicks the body of the needle or bends the body of
the needle to one side so that the body of the needle looks like a
bow. To direct the acu-esthesia to transmit upward, the needle is
bent downward and backward. To direct the acu-esthesia to transmit
downward, the needle is bent upward and forward ( Fig. 2 - 45) . ^.*#&EEl9
a. Pressing the body ol the needle by rhe middle finger
I rh*eH I
To strengthen stimulation, to promote the flow of gi, to direct
qi and to enable acu-esthesia to transmit along the meridians.
b. &11'9.4ffifr€trZt
IEE) b. The body of the needle is bent and looks like a bow
#eH ft <4 1 <tF ffi , n7 lElfr-%f<t* 4%'tffi11 %W+f W., +f B2-45 gBE
Fie.2-45 Protruding
T X 3+tE E#ffi9€k11" H /S,f€ Ef H*f R ffi ZFfi "

Note
Fixed flicking is helpful to promote and direct qi flow, to en-
able the meridian qi to disperse along the route of the meridian and
to direct acu-esthesia to transmit ot certain direction and to the loca-
tion of the disease. Fixed flicking can direct qi undemeath the need-
le to reach the location of the disease. For this pu{pose, the hand
should not release the needle; and it should press or rotate the need-
ffiru
le so as to maintain acu-esthesia underneath lhe needle and to direct
it to transmit to the desirable direction and direr:tly to the location of
the disease.
22. ffi&.]* -+'&+t ffiM.f,t *fr , Fr * +7rffi *#-+t W 5 W.

*X&NftkZftlifrf,rZ"
22. Bending and cushioning One hand bends the neerlle to one
side, the index finger of the other harrd cushions the body of the
needle on the skin of the needled point.
(ffi'lf,f )E)
ffifttlT'4F,<E H# ffiHSf iE, - +:W +fffi ffi fd -fi ; 4
FW n - ++ffi 4E # W 5 W-+t X ffi p.nkzFr,rfr4+A ffiffi s'
*F{i, U}tJili.ffifr,(W 2 - 46) "
Method
Bending is a technique used after acu-esthesia is felt and when
the patient feels comfortable, the acupuncturist bends the needle
with one hand to one side; cushioning means that the finger of the
other hand cushions the area between the body of the needle and ihe
skin over the needled acupoint to reinforce the acu-esthesia ( Fig.2 -
46).
t MFEFI
B2-46 ffi4)E T-<+<U*ffitfi"
2-46 Bending and cushioning
Fie. Clinical Application
To promote and direct qi to the location of the disease.
23. H;*
+gBPtg+?4--.Z'H"
23. Seeking Seeking means to seek for the meridian qi"
t|*.fftr;*)
E, # T 4+ <, q h
+t fril z fr4 r"t -L T, EE V! T +t friJ +g + t4.
<,U'4+<"htr.(W2-47) "
Method
If the acu-esthesia is not obtained after the insertion, the need-
le is thrustedup and down and from the left to the right to seek for
the meridian qi till acu-esthesia is felt (Fig.2 -47).
g2- 47 HE [ ilf,FeH I
Fie.2-47 Seekine 4E<,trlffiT)E4l*€"
-,"ffi'
#;
'#*f,l ffi,sw
This method is used to promote qi flow and acuesthesia.
24. iE;*W+tfri Hiit,,q.iftsfm.

24. Withdrawing The needle is lifted from the deep to the shallow
region during the withdrawal of the needle.
lffitFfrt*l
l1+lw ,>w+t-D*frtr€z,4TH,,+t1'l'&+ltriB( K 2- 48)
"
Method
In the manipulation, the needle is withdrawn gradually and
steadily. Or in the withdrawal of the needle, the needle is retreated
(Fis.2 -48).
El2*48 )BX
Fie. 2- 48 Withdrawing
I rtfiF&H )
?1f'l+H0+r*,EIHfSfl"
This technique is for the manipulation or withdrawal o{ the need-
le.
2s. g* EiBft tF fr ,+t+fiJitET B-]', w+f h^lfi frfl, @

4.frffijsm.x'wmmta2x"
25. Retaining The needle is withdrawn beneath the skin, halted
for a while and then pulled out to avoid impairment of tissues caused
by too forceful or too quick withdrawal.
(f*,{tf r*)
EiBft tl.fi Ht ,+t'}-letrT4iitrF{, g +t }+*tJtrH'lf"+t
(w2-49) "
Method
The needle is lifted to the shallow region, retained for a while
and then withdrawn (Fig.2 -49). El2 -4e gx
Fie.2-49 Retaining
I ilfiFEH I
il ftB{ffi ,ufuffiffi4lrA& s,m "
To avoid the impairment of the tissue or bleeding in withdraw-
ing the needle.
26. i€t* W+t j:+F,>r+,'fFflTB&)'fr 6q4iH^.
ffiffi
€
.E
26. Lifting 'Ihe needle is or eliminate acu-

esthesia.
lbxtFfiitl
'&+ltft,ti+,u}ilgg{;|ffi,,EZ.,ffiffifffi+}*( K 2 *50) "
Method
lift the needle slightly to weaken acu-esthesia,
To the tech-
niques of lifting and thrusting are avoided ( fig" 2 - 50) .
I llEFEH I
ffiqqBD"
B2-50 EX Reducing acu-esthesia.
Fie. 2 -50 Liftine
27 . W.i* fl-ri B iEAET, ft'ffi TW tE, \ntfr"4,a-#,:W +f
w.fr ,Dlwfr,fr+lHfRtffi.
27. Pulling When the tip of the needle is withdrawn beneath the
skin and there's the smooth and unstagnant feeling, the needle is
pulled out just like the pulling of a body hair to avoid pain caused
by the withdrawal.
tffi'ff f,,:*l
W+l tEffiiEE E T, H X F T ttt d:r'ffi tn tr, His+fr.+#
w+lw#,(Kl2-51)"
Method
The needle is gradually withdrawn beneath the skin.
When smooth and unstagant feeling is sensed beneath the
skin, the needle is lifted out just like the pulling of a body
hair ( Fig.2 -51 ) .
tilftFEE I
&rE,Htt F{H!R'Hffig.m."
B2-51 fiX Clinical Application
Fie.2-51 Pulllne
To avoid pain and bleeding caused by the withdrawal.
telEI
fr H -ffi&'i* F--ft,ffi n+fri . /ri : * E +t i(w )11, ft ,E
+F
ffi A+&l.zi-+Effi Kftm, ffii:YtFlWS ( K 2 - s2) "

Note I
Another method is to pinch the acupoint between the thumb
Tlt- s"-n.r --n€ I

'+ A4
and index fingers of the left hand, the thumb and index finger of the
other hand holds the handle of the needle and quickly withdraws it
(Fig.2 -s2).
28. llt;* il" +t ffi ffl ++ft & I*.+t +L,I/ilF*] +t ffi #J,ffi /*, ffi tb
fttE"
28" Pressing the acupoint Pressing the inserted acupoint after the
withdrawal of the needle to alleviate pain and to prevent leakage of qi.
ffiE
tffi.fff rtl Pulline
rH ftEffi+ffi&tr+ttLJf rl fHitt&E ( K z
* s3)
"
Method
* To press or massage the needled acupoint after the withdrawal
of the needle (Fig.2 - 53 ) .
[ fififteEI
Ia{+Fffi , BrtS,ffi.gl pflt-ffi."
To prevent qi leakage, to strengthen asthesia and to avoid
dJ
bleeding or to stop bleeding. rl
El2 -53 fi"tx

b
Fig. 2-53 Pressing the acupoint
HEfr HH+I''E+E
SECTION 4 GENERAL STRENGTHENING AND
REDUCING TECFINIQUES
1 . tEffi+hrE;* ,fi*EpJEffi-Ett*.T-r?l'i5, fitE "

1. Strengthening and reducing techniques by lifting and thrust-
ing This strengthening and reducing technique is performed by lift-
ing and thrusting. That is why it is so named.
(ffi'fftrrtl
+t friJtr E 1+-r H'l I
i* m n, ffi * +F,r, E- F_E
6S _h,'& +l- H
tffi#ffi, tllT+ffiXtAElFi* iEZ,>W+t HWmit ,W?+fr't,
ffiffi
ffi*;a, :,: ::,
Method
When acu-esthesia is obtained after insertion, the needle is
manipulatecl from the shallow region to lhe deep region with more
thrusting and less lifting as well as repeatedly heavy thrusting and
gentle lifting. This is the strengthening technique, thrusting as the
main technique. On the contrary lhe needle is insefled from the
deep region to the shallow region with more lifting than thrusting,
repeated heavy lifting and gentle thrusting, the reducing technique
mainly consists of lifting (Fig.2 -54).
t uaffieE I
+l'iftE*.
To supplement the asthenia and to reduce sthenia.
2. lA+t?t'tEt* +'t*tr-ut#+t*1-41$ ,WE "

2. Strengthening and reducing techniques by rotation This
Ez-s4 Eltr?l.)EE strengthening and reducing technique is
'performed
by rotation.
Fie. 2-54 Strengthening and reducing
That's why it's so named.
techniques by lifting and thrusting
It*,ff f i*)
ftffi f*EI T Fi. 6 F! g {S t, Di ru +F ff ,rr +E X j5' H! +F ffi g[ * tr
/\
/t * fi ,A itH B, )J#H,ffi Ei\A' . iB Ej*1E -,Etk&E ffih
^ffi
IW Ft tr h 4l ;tr WEl, Hp8+g f"l,tr, zi+F f4 ffi zi5 ( K 2 - ss > "

Method
After acu-esthesia is felt, the belly of the distal segment of the
thumb and index fin!1er rotate the needle forward and backward' The
EW
Left rotation strengthening and reducing manipulations are differentiated by the
degree of strength, angle, speed and left rotation or right rotation'
()\ I-eft rotation of the needle, with the thumb pushing forward and the
index finger backward, means strengthening and right rotation of the
'*uW
needle, with the thumb pushing backward and the index finger for-
ward, means reducing (Fig.2 - 55 ) .
Right rotation
[ ilfiFe.ffi I
?1.ffi8*"
B2-55 ffif€?l.Ex Clinical Application
Fig. 2 -55
Strengthening and reducing
To supplement the asthenia and to reduce sthenia.
technrques by rotation
MtdF gfi:tra
IffiWWW
E&.-.{@'ift*-"#
gtfilfril/*
3. ?*&?l'tE;t ft&ffiH,+f #.+f .#'ff ffiftfifi'l'R'Flrii11+lW

il\H N+-t*, 'I
3, Stren$hening and reducing techniques by speed The strength-
ening trnd rerluc:ing rnanipulating techniques are decided by the speed of H
I
the insertion, withdrawal and manipulation of the needle.
IIRTEfr}EI
ury+F.t&fi.fl' i8 ,u il, +r
, 1* , h rf'tx ; F 2, 'R it j&, it +f , tx '&&.
tr tr#
Quick insertion
,l€J&'l! +f K 2 - 56) , Slow inserlion
,h{51*(
Method
trits
withdrawal
'AiB
Slow wjthdrawal
Quick
Slow insertion and quick withdrawal means strengthening. While

quick insertion and slow withdrawal means reducing( Fig.Z - 56) .
82_56 6F?FEX
techniques by speed
t ilfiReE)
?1.ffii5*.
6
Clinical Application E
To supplement the asthenia and to reduce sthenia. H
te,*)
rlfiftt &H
)t'ft frZffi , Fl
=it-E5-it=iBZi*
8+Z( 2 57
Kl - ) .
, rlLl5€A)tAfr ,R. ,l;
H
lti
Note
Clinically, the techniques of three-insertion-one-withdarawal lli
and one-insertion-three-withdrawal are also used. They are also per- l_| _
formed slow-insertion-quick-withdrawal and quick-insertion-slow-
a. Triple insrtion and one withdrawal
withdrawal( Fig.2 - 57) and can be referred to.
g
4. LE ffi :il.iE i* AfE€ U+l Ft |lftfi4.b!'IffiTr *11 E X?r+l' i5 H
I
fr\ )f iE, "
4. Strengthening and reducing techniques by confrontation I
and following These techniques can prsduce the strengthening and

reducing effect by directing the needle to confront and follow the cir-
culatory direction of the meridian.
-Tl[-
ili
ilr
r_[
Il*,ff f,r*) _
E, +|'+IWH 4.fl t(, ffi ffi if Z h

+t friJl+ < +f *, +t + is.€- 4, b. One insertion md triple withdrawal
fli(, it[ffi+ Z]r{5W (W 2 -s8. Kl 2 - ss ) "

B 2 -57 =H-iEfll-*=iE
Method Fie. 2-57 Triple insertion and one with-
After acu-esthesia is obtained, the tip of needle following the drawal , one insertion and triple with-
meridian route to nourish qi means strengthening. The tip confront- drawal
ffiiffi
ing the meridian route to reduce means reducing ( Fig. 2 * 58.
Ftg.2 -59).
t ilfifiEH I
fk'r5ffrEi"
To dissipate pathogenic factors.
5. ryEniFtS ;*
Fffillffi+l *tj+f* H'i, E[A,H#' trln*s&.uLtl
+F'{EB\rt* "
5. Strengthening and reducing techniques according to respi-
B2-58 ilm?fE ration This metlrod is performed by the combination of the need-
Fig. 2 -58 Strengthening and reducing ling techniques and the respiration of the patient to differentiate
technigues by confrontation anC follow- strengthening and reducing manipulation.
ing
lffitFfriFl
Bp $,ff, # ry € +t . +€ ft, n* Et Ef jB ft . fi ft
Hf jS t {E ** ; E
z,y,H # ry -1 Ft tr +t. w +1, 0N t, F{ 1B +i. ifi +l h 4l
#l+SfFffifrnE ( Kl2 -60) "
Method
To insert or rotate the needle in the inhalation of the patient
and to withdraw the needle in the exhalation means reducing. The
B 2 -5s fl4itfiHmfilj)lE ,IEa-''ffi, opposite practice means strengthening ( Fig. 2 - 60) .
Hmfiljh?t
Fie. 2 - 59 Tip of needle pointine to
[ ffiffieH I
the direction of meridian qi flow means
strengthening. The opposite practice
nni , il'ffitrE.
means reducing
To promote smooth flow of qi, to reinforce the asthenia and to
reduce sthenia.
6. /Lx;il.rEt* /Lxll.i5,€+Rffi( n4> IEit, UAW 1 ,3,s,

7 ,9 h FH ,{B& 2 ,4 ,6,8 , 10 h9n ,fr 9 ,6 WW,5*ft+f EXt€}ffi}-
lxffi#+, &x. 1& . +f w

-ffi?l'i5trx,
=*F'fi
6. Nine-Six strengthening and reducing techniques Nine re-
fers to the numbers of yang nature (such as 1,30 5,7,9) and six re-
fers to the numbers of yin nature ( such as 2,4,6,8, 10) according
to Yijing ( Canon of changes). This method is performed by rotating
the needle nine or six times in the three layers known as Heaven,
Earth and Man.
ffiffi
ElfilF{l/*
tffi,ff f,r*l
Hl#I 11..t1t , ,y'rt1.tE'Etr" x" Itrlnr*w , " h" ib [f] tr ?l'
(wI2 -61)
ffi
"
Method
borne
Six means reducing and nine strengttrening. T'his point must be
in mind in acttral practice (Fig.2 -61).
{I
IrlcftfiH )
til )tW )It 4l', Llt n&t i5 "
Number 9 means strengthening while number 6 means reducing.
7. #tfl+l';g;* ftffi4'ffriJ4l.Y5jS& + ,&tN ft g ai&T}E+l?L

U a. h if't*Et 15 rE H! f* lFfr W "
7. Strengthening and reducing techniques by opening and
closing the needled acupoint In the course of strengthening and
reducing needling, strengthening and reducing are differentiated by
opening and closing the needled acupoint.
If*,r€tri*)
ft tr it & +t 4L A *r +l' E ; s fi rf +e x.+t 1L, #' +t E 4
HJ +E +t
+L#h{q*(w2 -62) .
Method
To immediately press the needled acupoint means strengthening
while to enlarge the needled acupoint by swaying means reducing
(Fig.2 -62).
Nz
B 2 -60 W&?FEX
I ilfiFEH )
techniques according to respiration
Dltd}J +f,u)rFh't?.
Closing means strengthening while opening means reducing'
tfi.fA++BP trIHfl,
8. Normal strengthening and reducing techniques The needle
is manipulated mildly by lifting, thrusting and rotating when it is in-
serted into a certain depth, and then withdrawn.
Er2*61 n^?f)5x
Fre. 2-61 Nne'Six strengthening and re-
tf*{f f }E) ducing techniques
ffiffi
ufin,j&:frilw(w2 -63) "
Method
I'he needle is manipulated slowly and evenly by lifting, thrusl-
ing and rotaling to strengthen the stimulation wlren it is inserled into
a certain depth ( Fig. 2 - 63) .
tilfitreH )
gE ffi T 116 ft ffi
rE * n rJE.,n fft - ffttfr itr "
To treat disease without evident sthenia or asthenia manifesta-
tions.
B 2 -62 ITm?fEX
techniques by opening and closing the
needled acu-point -
Hrfr5
SECTION
Ertf+*il+E
COMPLICATED NEEDLING
TECHNIQUES
1 . Hilrrt;E +*fufr'&F,Ffffi ( EIIA+€) ./1n.ff lH Etrf?l'
1. Heat-inducing method This technique is a combination of

swift-slow, lift-thrust ( or rotation), nine plus six, closing-opening
and occasionally respiration methods. Since it can induce heat sen-
sation, it is literally known as "buming mountain fire".
Il*,ff i-rt I
fi 7t&El *|.l H!lÊ, +(Fl*,. F . i^=EEIi*. ift m EffilF,
B -63 +il.+Ex
2 +|frilfrlktrW, -BE GI) WtR &tr&F&jE{€ ( 4ffi fA++ ) rXJL
Fig. 2-S Mrmal strengthenins and re-
ducing techniques €ffiflB (W2 -64)
"
Method
The needle is inserted and manipulated in the shallow, middle
and deep regions or from the shallow to the deep according to the
possible depth of a given acu-point. The needle is manipulated for
nine times by means of quick insertion and slow lifting ( or rotation)
in each layer from the shallow region to the deep region in turn,
then the needle is withdrawn to the shallow region, which is called
one time. The way of needling can be repeated for several times to
ffiffi
Eltilfiil*
induce heat sensation ( Fig.2 -64).
t[f,treH )
)yt4l/.'t*',ffl TJ€i.iE.*itr- "
This is a power{ul strengthening method which is applicable to
asthenia and cold syndromes.
IEE)
+* Yl&tFF,fi €, ffi.,& ffi Jr *1#H-'E9- tl sA, * l&- t)J
fUF&( ffi)r+fr+l ) .'l€E( ##*L&) ,E&'R&-tfrf't J:Tr)1*.,

PJ@{FIJE€ ifr,mF&ft/*"
Note
This method is characterized by distinct difference of strengh
in lifting and inserting in the way of quick pressing ( thrusting force- B 2 -64 HT1JXX
Fie. 2-64 Heat-inducing method
fully) and slow lifting ( Iifting mildly) . It's important to lay emphasis
on quick pressing and thrusting so as to direct yangqi to the deep re-
gion to produce pyretic sensation.
2. EX,HIE AEE fr'&R,Efffi ( 4tA+t ),/Lx.#lA [qffii5
2. Cool-inducing method This technique is a combination of

swift-slow, iift-thrust or rotation nine plus six, closing-opening and
occasionally respiration methods. Since it can induce cool sensation,
it is literally known as "thorough cooling".
(l*.{f f,r*l
€J-*[ tr Htffi Wtr, ffiXit;vlltrJ *|j lfr tr A lFlX -+ . lfr
=
E I
EI/*.}KEf &lF-.fr Wf"W,,WtF-fi-E*E+&ffi 'Fft +FW,

( 4fA++ ) x& ( -E=iE Wtk,4-lt:ig = A ),fftrh - E" $
tlltr-EEffi^rytr ,Ift/_F+W,B( K 2-6s) "

Method
When inserted into the deep region, the needle is manipulated
in the shallow, middle and deep regions or shallow and deep regions
L
respectively according to the possible depth of the acupoint, charac-
terized by quick lifting or rotation and slow pressing or rotation for &
-F#
One dcgree
six times ( one insertion and triple withdrawal for twice, or one in-
sertion and twice withdrawal for three times) which is known as one
B 2 _65 EflHE
time. This method is performed repeatedly for several times to pro-
Fie. 2-65 Cool-inducing method
duce cool sensation (Fig.2 -65).
,'ffi'ffi
glfilfitJ lE
t ilfitreEI
trt ft{$ Z'tX, fH T * iiE it! iiL .,
This is a strong reducing technique used to reduce heat in trea-
ting sthenia syndrome and heat syndrome.
te,tl
+l*Wge(Fg,* A T& .+ft , m h ffi#F--'EW tl W, UJ *
l&fU'XW(ffi)r -t&) .tE&( mETe) ,E#FffitTtr*.,t))
|frffi<rffr , iS ttj €fl e H Ht Fl Ht. M-ffi 'IAtIt k*.ftX.Hlt,
DJ fr H flIt n ttfi +itrA! y.r xlih H..
The key point of this manipulation rests with the dJstinct diffe-
rence of strength in lifting, quick lifting ( lifting force-
pressing and
fully) and slow pressing ( pressing mildly) must be perfectly done.
It's important to lay emphasis on quick lifting so as to discharge
pathogeiric factors to eliminate heat and induce cool feeling. The
methods of heat-inducing and cool-inducing should be performed on
6i8trH (it) the acu-points located on regions with thick muscles.
Slow irsertion and quick withdrawal
(sftenglhening)
iB
3. pHHFE;* +*€ElE-i(-h, 5Eis4ll*,
+ -r.11{E*,+F{E
Withdrawal #ffi,,fr+fE{EffJ-a-;f.,**,
fr* 3. Yin-hiding-in-yang method This method is used in needling
First insertion
one single acupoint, strengthening techniques is used first and then
B*
Seeond insertion reducing techniques is used.
Iffi'{f f,}*l
:h H
int{nBlq FlJrfrH,*t*6 h).ifr
&^ry(w2-66)
(1 t) ruEwlF. frE
"{:{ -lTi - Method

"
The needle is inserted and manipulated in the shallow ( 5 fen)

82-66 pBtrHpf;X and deep ( 1 cun) regions according to the possible depth of the acu-
Fig" 2 -66 Vn-hiding-in-yane method point. The strenghening technique is first performed in the shallow
region ( nine times of quick pressing and slow lifting) and then re-
ducing technique is performed in the deep ( six times of quick lifting
and slow pressing) (Fig.2*66).
I llAFEHI
t+
ffiffi
Irtl 4.' lH ltll E - ffi ft+l ffi H tr't h t*, lll + ih'ti iL {s tr i& trl
ffiilE"
Yin-hiding-in-yang is characterized by first strengthening and
then reducing and it can be used to treat diseases characterized by
fever following cold.
4 .+ H FH
VE t*
4 rl E ;E lil - i( _L, fr?1'tr'.t*, fa'fi 4l t*, ? l' i5
#fE.fti5 E+l.ffJE-fr+fE"
4. Yang-hiding-in-yin method This technique is used in needling
one single acupoint in which reducing technique is used first and *rt|&Httl5t
Quick insertion and slow withdrarval (reducing)
then the strengthening technique is used, a combination of the tech-
niques of strengthening and reducing of strengthening first and then i]+iE
Withdrawal again
reducing. i LrlE
Wilhdrawal later
l&tFfr]tl f6&.
5 t3F + p.fiffitHtr ,fr+t tr ftEWE41{E}X-Kffi +p.&11 First inserting
i ry, B iE BrJ l*, E Tt 41. i* F &'IF.ft?l )uW, fr * ffi itfi tr +f

EiF**(W2-67)" -
Method
The needle is manipulated by reducing technique in the deep
region ( six times of quick lifting and slow pressing) and then with-
drawing to the shallow region (nine times of quick pressing and slow
lifting) for the performance of strengthening technique. This tech-
nique is characterized by reducing followed by strengthening, con- B2-67 FE+HPBX
trary to the procedure of Yin-hiding-in-yang ( Fig. 2 * 67 ) . Frc. 2-67 Yang-hiding-in -yin method
I ilfiFEHI
ftEE+l4iaibftE+z'iE"
This method can be used to treat disease characterized by cold
following fever.
te*l
trKffiflH +KpHmr}tgEHF{ffi W'#-*^ lEl.ffifl
pH
iEH fi F'lF ZsHuN,ffihYtETH, tti trJ4AlAf€i*9EAfrt fi ,

qtr T?l' i5#ffi rx, i6,ffi Tffi * ** 7-'1ff,
"
Note
These two methods of yang-hiding-in-yin and yin-hiding-in-
yang, both combinations of strengthening and reducing, are charac-
terize<lby the speed of lifting and thrusting, manipulation of the
needle and the difference in strength, can be used together with ro-
tation, and applicable to syndromes complicated by asthenia and
sthenia"
5. + +'.$ H )* + ++Pi E E- ffi tA W WIfr NttA 6 V,t El frl1 t*,,

++ffi trtrth++ ,i,$ E ,fFt'TEtffi
"
5. Left-right rotating, up-down thrusting-lifting method This
method is a combination of rotating, lifting and thrusting tech-
niques.
(l*{€rr*l
ffit+|4+<E ,ft'N&Ip.Wtr,W, FKE,I€ &xW., lFl H{4
68trt,+W, F,Fffi|- (Kt 2 - 68 ) "
Method
When acu-esthesia is obtained, nine times of quick pressing
and slow lifting are performed first followed by six times of quick
lifting and slow pressing and rotation. This techniqire is performed
repeatedly ( Fig. 2 -68 ).
tIIefeE)
K2*68
=+ffiE3X
Fic. 2 - 68 Left-right /KE+.Fi.FK+iE"
rotating, up-
down thrusting-lif ting method Clinical Application
This method aims at directing the qi of yin and yang, as well as
simultaneous strengthening and reducing. It is also effective for sub-

duing swelling and inducing diuresis. So it can be used to treat ede-
ma and flatulence, etc.
"{ffi" o
6. Dragon-tiger-struggle method This method is characterized by

repeated alternation of rotation from the left to the right to stop pain.
Dragon means to rotate to the left; tiger means to rotate to the right.
Repeated alternative rotation from the left to the right means struggle.
tl*'lf tr,EI
,FftE#ft'4+<E , %I[l;W h +, Fp DJ fr}ffi Fr EfrH -n ffi
ffiffi
+ll*, .'l' . gf : .EF_ X_Wm ( Wl 2 - 6e )"
Method
When inse$ed and acu-esthesia obtained, the needle is rotated
left first ( the thumb rotates forward for nine times) and then to the
right ( the thumb rotates trackward for six times) . This method can
be perforrrred repeatedly or in the shallow, middle and deep regions
(Fig.2 * 69) .
I ilfitr&H I
h+&ffiZl*,+AffiXf.,*f."4t"
This technique is quite effective in relieving pain.
tE*l
t
+++&a ryx,H & wIEfr v)+h+t \r *., tr ffi h " +"
*)1" (PE)
h
,fWlJ* f " h* ffi (Ffr) "
Note B 2 -6e /UH{6iX
The above two methods are performed mainly by rotation. The Fig. 2-@ Dragon-tiger-strugde method
left rotation means "zi" and, o'dragon" ( yu.rg), the right rotation
means "wu" and "tiger" ( yin) .
7 . fiR r+w* )r,R f+wF-fgftfiljjE jiEtrNffix.#*sffi +,
,!"h ffi+fil-+| tul-ffi .b * " )x#.EW, R # A W, ++ ffi ffi , Wffi

7. Dragon{iger-ascending-descending method Dragon-Tiger
Ascending-Descending method is to manipulate the needle by alter-
nate rotating technique of left and right thumbs combining lifting and
thrusting techniques. Dragon means to rotate to the left, Tiger
means to rotate to the right, Ascending means to lift and Descending
means to thrust. This method is also named as Dragon-Tiger Rising
method.
H*.{f f r* )
fr+l 4+<8, w.E UEE+t#tr ft, E +ffiffi Fl Bt, tf, ft
E* ;E*ffi+F EEf ,+,$+tE+t,-E-tr, ffi+lFJ H{+ffi ,+ BJ
(
-L +€, T lffi l:+Ri-a*, U lE lF-4r<84-r W -
gd A T & p B 2 10 )
"
Method
After the insertion and arrival of the acu-esthesia, the acupunc-
turist manipulates the needles aiternately with left and right hands.
The right thumb goes forward and the needle is rotated to the lefq the
#;$,ffi
left thumb goes lbrward and the needle is rotated to the right. l'he left
ancl right hands manipulates the needles simultanenusly; and the ma-
\ nipulation can be combined with pressing downwards and liliing up-

l/
V-\ ,|
,/-
/*V
/\
I wards, i. e.
so as to promote the
the rnethod of thrusting downwards and lifting upwards,
qi Ilow in the meridians ( Fig. 2 -:70)
\N w)
/ \\\
lrv lr
tilfitreH I
+'e +.ffil1€ l| tffi , tft r? w r:ffi .,8 rr# *zi FJifi ,
leli handA* fi$ righl hantJ
This method is mainly used to move qi and relieve pain, treat
pain and disharmony between ying and wei.
8. fr,R t+ffi
*W ftW4;ffriltr tF'flE-tr #W, +#AWE
)f,R
-70 ftRftW*.
Et 2
drlF\E47<ttu/-t*" )LffiE#.( ++) , Rffitr#.,t1BE#%,
ne. i - n Dragon-tiger-ascending-des-
<jg1-r"
cending method
8. Dragon-tiger rising method In Dragon-Tiger-Rising method,
the needles are swirled to the left and right sides after insertion, and
lifting and bow-bending techniques are combined to promote the
flowing of qi and blood. Dragon means to swirl ( rotate) to the left,
Tiger means to swirl to the right, and Rising refers to the flowing of
meridian qi.
I
H
N
tffi,{f f,r*l
)t +t 4+-18, frEl*,*+ lfi.E #.i)r tF- E lf T &, E !ffi.tr #.
drlF-ffi *T&, F H + ffi&+R+f H tnWE trLa:tr., twry.,F-E e
W., * E >&fi i^*F, l&tr &* l:ftdrtF-W, Ht&E #,*
+ffi t
wth tF*ffi , F L) + ffi yiw4;f H 4&E w, tn rtuF-F- 6 rR, 6EI ffi
a.E# Swirt to the left
b.Ffi
rT-
Press downwards
Method
After insertion of the needle and arrival of acu-esthesia, the
needle is swirled for 1 circle to the left and pressed downwards, then
it's swirled again for 1 circle to the right and pressed downwards, af-
$
ter that, the needle is pushed and bent by the middle finger and
moved to and fro,
if the gear of a crossbow is manipulated. Repeat
as
c.6# Srvirl to the righl

_J_ the manipulation for nine times after which the needle is inserted to
the deep region. Then, the needle is swirled for 1 circle to the right
and lifted upwards, which is followed by swirling for I circle to the
left and lifting upwards, and the bow method by pushing and bending
tl the needle with the middle finger is applied. Repeat the manipulation
dTii Prcss dorvnwards
for six times. Pressing and pushing-doryn methods can be combined
#b #n&
q#'ffi$
;i:,.ll:
#ttt'1Fil/*
in trrder to prornole the llow of rneridian qi (Fig.2" 71).
tilffffieE I
.+.& r& - K r4 -ft < z,t*, El tll F ?ft
b.,"
frI!ffiw 1# it, i[ fi fiJ ffi *f5
tffi)ft4+" '?
This method belongs to Meridian-Stimulating-for-Qi-Promoting
rnethods, and can be used to treat symptoms resulted from stagnation
of qi and Blood, such as pain in the chest and abdomen, etc.
te,*) e.&fr Press and move lo and pro
H lri h ,+'t* xff5Jl,F,l+w't* ,f*.t Nw't* , B.&'E Ei& , r:ffi^ ff$ Insert to
the deep region
f*Y+tEfr tX X eH "ft , fr\W t* h t Z "
tJ
Note
In some books, this method is regarded as the same method as
the Dragon-Tiger Ascending-Descending Method. In fact though the
rlames of above two methods are similar, the manipulations are dif-
ferent, so the two methods are listed respectively.
gfift Srvirl to the righl I

W, X- # A +E+fr 11 +1, l+ dr +t R 4E<a41 < tul - ffi fr 'e . )l ffi E- I
tffi E+F €lffi FdA * Rrt tF U +E<,4- Ei"Z* "

I
**, Rffi E*, h.t.E Lift upwards

9" Dragon-tiger crossing-rising method Dragon-Tiger Crossing-
Rising method means to altemately rotate the needle forwards and
backwards with the thumbo combined with lifting and thrusting, as
well as flicking the needle tail to promote qi and move qi. Dragon
____*-\
means to rotate to the ieft, Tiger means to rotate the right, Crossing- Y\ /.\
// t
l/-'
R.ising means to lift+hrust the needle and flick the needle tail in or- -----
ta
1.7
/-/
der to promote qi and move qi.
/t/
L'
1ffi.{f }- r*l
)t+t'4+--"f" ,ft\)-E*Eth{'t 27 W,fH,g , FPJE+E Fl Bfr i.Effi Swirl to the left
#ff+T& ( tffi ), +HEffi r+dr+l tru[tr<,11T & WArrc t j.

'L€ lin ulrlvards
ulfr<11(w2 *72) "

Method B2-71 ti,Rf+ffi
After insertion of the needle and arrival of qi, the needle is ro-
ne. 2-71 Dragon-tiger rising method
tated alternately to the left and right for twenty-seven times. After a
while, the needle is rotated for-wards with the thumb and pressed
downwards ( thrust) , and the needle tail is flicked with the thumb to
promote qi, pressed downwards and lifted upwards to move qi
af,*Itt,nW
fr##
1
:i.:
&1filfiillx t
:f
':l
(F;s.2 ^ 12) . .l
t rtgFeE )
+lX +&<+iî, t F ift ff f' Hn .ffi n++n ffi+f&irE "
The method (,an promote qi and move qi and is mainly used to
treat acute conjunctivitis, initial onset of carbuncles and febrile dis-
eases.
1 0. itq;* i4t,lttF trftwtrfrL:fiirw,fira )t<zffi "

10. Qi-pushing method This is a strengthening method per-
fr*rfJ' Ilotate',n" 'l
8.6
needlestot
'll formed in the deep region, and it may induce the feeling as if qi was
t the left anc
"*
andI riuht I
pushed in.
ii
ffiF:- Press and
#l1+kxd6,
Push andd press
i+Ff{".E
\, e+} ate
tl ner
;s the needle inr
inwards
lift the needle tffi{ff,r*l
andd flick the nee
needle rtail
ail )t+l trfriJ E ( e +l ),tr+< E ffil- 4l t*, is F {fi 'lF € LW. "
flgi E t ( E, r. ) il-ftT H&LIT ( w 2 - 73 ) "
ft trr+ft Fl',lsl, Â
B2-72 )tB{.ffi Method
Fie. 2 72 Dragon-tiger crossing-rising When inserted into the deep region (9 fen) and acuesthesia ob-
method
tained, the needle is manipulated with strengthening technique
( nine times of quick pressing and slow lifting) . Then the needle is
pressed {lat with the tip pointing upward ( to proximal regions) so as
to direct acu-esthesia upward (Fig.Z -73) .
[ilftRtrHI
i6;ff E€fff ffi gfiR,ffi . EI#
&)8 "
To treat pain of the back, waist, elbow and knee as well as
general migratory pain.
11. g5;* H-riE fr'#:F.ffitlftiffif*fi,#ffi F\,lUH-=W+tT

zE"
11. Retentiort of qi method This method is composed of slow-
B2-73 t.E swift needling and lifting-thrusting manipulation. It may induce the
Fie. 2-73 Oi-pushing method feeling as if qi is retained.
Iffi{Gf't)
itfttr fttJ
+ E ( 7 tl ), 4+< tr ffi,T-r 4l t*, in F lfi {E F /t
w.,*trwfJ'H{ffi El
E, Fi€ft tr tr41, {F< g ftrffi iiS fRF
(w2 -74) "
Method
When inserted into the middle region (7 fen) and at:u-esthesia
obtained, the needle is manipulated by strengthening technique
( such as nine times of quic;k pressing and slow lifting) , then thrus-
ted to the deep region and lifted to the original region to maintain
acu-esthesia so as to dissipate stagnation( b-|g.2 -7a).
[ilfitreH ]
IHffiMMTF.M"
Clinlcal Application
To disperse abdominal masses.
12. t*ffit*_ ffi ,+F-LF W,ffi&t\. +t*&(FF{4i*i .tT g2-74 giE

Etffi'+q+ , -€Ft€, -&F& ,frkhh" fihi6" o Fie. 2-74 Fletention of qi method
12. Repeated lifting and pressing method This method is per-
formed by repeatedly lifting and thrusting the needle in the deep,
shallow, upper and lower regions.
lffi,fff,;*)
F;t'I tr fttr {6 4 fA +€ ilW u} lE lfr.1+ <, F r"r JFI ffi i&. 4 ta
{€}ffi, t&EtrTH fiJ&m(W 2 -7s) .
Method
After the insertion, the needle is lifted and thrusted of rotated
for nine times to promote acu-esthesia, then lifted and thrusted in
various directions, and finally thrusted and pressed perpendicularly
(Fis,.2 -75) .
I ilfiFEH I
To treat paralysis, sores , favus and other cutaneous diseases. E 2 -75 ffitrE
Fie. 2-75 Repeated lifting and press-
13. ie5;* rSfE 5 E< fE +H {U, & E ?l' i5 +lX 5 1- <lX tuI # ine method
a ,rt\E "
13. Qi-transporting method This method is similar to qi-pushing
method composed of strengthening-reducing techniques and qi-pro-
moting techniques.
tffi,lf f,r*)
m js ft H fi {,f& tr fffi 4 fa w 6 tR, 4+ < tr :W +tf,+ r"r ffi tr, wlh
ffiffi
:.-
f
t,tr rl ,1fi-t1.f.ffrffi
Method
(Wl2 *76) ,, f
The neerlle is inserted perpendicularly and then lifted and
thrusted or rotated for six times. After acu-esthesia is obtained, the
t
needle is pointed obliquely to the focus of the disease and the pa-
tient is asked to take deep breath for five times for qi to flow to the T
location of the disease ( F-ig.2 -16) .
"% frFtr F,t u.

IilfiffiEH ]
?1Etl}ffi"
T
T
B2-76 85,* To promote qi flow and to stop pain.
2-76 Oi-transporting
Fie. method
T
1 4 . tE t t* ffi "l E E H +E ffi ft, E f*, ffi ft fE fH tln + tuI + IE,
E H ?l'15+ *5',fr<ttFdA nTi,nl " T
14. Qi-lifting method This method is composed of lifting, thrust-
ing, twisting and lifting techniques, and it's a combination of
strengthening-reducing techniques and qi-promoting methods. T
ti*'ff tr;'*) T
ftE ERjF &A ffi W:{E Z, r1,41 6, 12, t s ......
4 +, &ffi +t
T'i ^*+,
a,HDI,
" + AE tr WEtr TK+|, 4E+i 4<,
*F.Y5'*IRW IEJ Ff
T
##:W+t l:ft ,ffitfr4<*F,E l{titft TftT ( K z * 7i )
"
Method
The needle is manipulated in the Human region by six-num- T
bered (yin number) quick lifting and slow pressing techniques for
K-2_N E-E 6,12 or 18... times according to the condition of acu-esthesia.
Fie. 2-Tf Oiliftine method
With the arrival of acu-esthesia, the needle is roiated to promote
meridian qi circulation. At the sarne time the needle is mildly lifted
to concentrate the meridian qi and to accumulate yingqi and weiqi
underneath the needle (Fig.Z *77).
tilfiRE,HI
friE?*fl ,ffiiV4.q". ,ffi f H-L€fr"iE4rT Vk,tlXI#pE
#,finflr.w€m,
To strengthen the healthy qi to eliminate pathogenic factors and
to dredge meridians to promote qi flow for the treatment of unsmooth
flow of qi and blood as well as obstruction by invasion of exogenous
pathogenic factors, such as cold and numbness of the limbs.
TJ-ffi}
t**)
( 1) 'ftffiffi<Z'lt,ffiJJ,X,'nry frA,EHtft f'F^&lr"
l*wzt6ut/{7 "
Q) \nn"tL<T E, Bl1tr rFl ffi ffiin, .nil trLffi E{ffi}l.ft , K
&'l€ E /L IrH ZW.,r +-, Hd A E *X, W+l l*, uli <,,&>E ffifT&. X "
Notes
( 1) This technique is fit for manipulation of the needle in the
middle or between the shallow and deep regions. The strength used
must be moderate and balanced.
(2) It insufficient meridian qi or imbalance between yingqi and
weiqi, strengthenin$ techniques by lifting and thrusting should be
used ( mainly nine times of quick pressing and slow lifting); the
combination with twisting technique, and needle lifting to promote
the flow of meridian qi is also quite effective.
15. +€;* + #+ffiffifi 2.H,trmZffiEt-..m{+, ffi AfXET

ffiz.
15. Qi-mediating method Mediating means to harmonize and re
gulateo lt's used to dissipate the retention of the pathogenic factors.
lffi,ff''t*l
mffi&pnE FH, ir & wr{,J ft41 E<zw, Bp K fl firj pH
r|,
F&'EF,1- LFHW4+R, ;NJ \Ffr h, W.[nJ+t H @ 5 E WE 4s'
ffi ), +t +ffi nffi fn, +,H#rf -.. f tr ; *tr #ff H i, E h E
fr+t. in#ffiflrj/rr ftfr.g<Z*, Bp)ffif,| NJl'Ffrtl, FE'E&,
^tl
ftx}n&. ,4+<; Eft€ FH4| ,W.Bl+t I ( 4 5 p-W.E 4s" R) ,+t

g}ffinffifn, +,H #s}..<tr tr ; *eEfrflH i,E hhrJE fr+f
(K2-78)"
Method
Judge the yin or yang location of the disease. If the disease is
located in the yang, the needle is inserted to the yang region, quick-
ly pressed and slowly lifted for nine times and then pushed to the yin
region ( an angle of 45"is formed between the skin and the needle)
by bending the body of the needle with the tip pointing to the direc-
tion of the focus of the disease. The patient is asked to exhale for
five times. Then the needle is held straight. After a while it is with-
drawn. If the disease is located in the yin, the needle is inserted in-
B 2 -78 +=X
to the yin regiono quickly lifted and slowly pressed for six times. Af- Fie. 2-78 Oi-mediatine method
ter acu-esthesia is obtained, the needle is lifted to the yang region
Wru
and bent ( an angle of 45o is formed between the needle and the
skin) . The neetlle points to the fo"u. i the disease anel the patient
is asked to inhale for five times. Then the needle is held straight. Af-
ter a while, it is withdrawn( Fig. 2 -78) .
I IfiFEH }
+W:6.fttrX,lBtrrm pE , at pH*FffiEFtJ E dI ItH Ffr ,l+-Vfr
*FfE*4lJ51EE pH.
To eliminate mass, to harmonize yin and yang, to direct yang
to the yin region and vice versa.
16. Pyretic strengthening method This technique can induce

pyretic sensation.
(ffi'lft)*l
E#E+rt'*H 4 E +F'R& ++ X, tr +>W +ifiil i( fr , IRH
-rA" E*ttsE'E)J,E+WffiFlBfrE&ffi{t t -s tf,.,lft{-fT
n'8,*++LEERD BtgF,fn, E*tr+fr#.E 3 - 5 tR" E+"'tr
w&mw,F&*m" ffiffifr,lH w+tE ,ry'fvw+ififr , €.f[i(

7L(K2-7e)"
Method
The acupuncturist presses the acupoint with the thumb or index
finger of the left hand, inserts the needle into the acupoint with the
right hand. When acu-esthesia is felt, the left hand reinforces the
pressure and the thumb of the right hand rotated the needle forward
for 3 -5 times. When heavy and sunken sensation is felt beneath the
needle, the needle is heavily thrusted and lightly lifted for 3 - 5
times at the area with acu-esthesia. The thumb rotates the needle
forward for another 3 - 5 times and the point of the needle reaches
the area with acu-esthesia and keeps the heavy and sunken sensation
beneath the needle to produce pyretic sensation beneath the needle.
After the retention of the needle according to the pathological condi-
K2-7e nitx tions concerned, the needle is withdrawn and the needled acupoint
Ftc. 2-79 Pyretic strengthening method is pressed quickly (Fig.2 -79).
t ilfiFeE I
iE,HTffi*iE.
wffi,
*lfflfrtJ l#
To treat asthenia cold syndrome.
17.,H;5;E'4i+*aJF.eHB,frk& "
17. Cold reducing method This technique can induce cool sen-
sation.
tffi.rf f
't)
w#E+rr'+FEI+S+F K &+li( ,tr+:W+ffril , {FH-.. t
E" E+W,#EJJ,E+Nffi FIE)+*W,€ 3 - s W,lft+tTn^
K,€iE | +tr 8, +t').8 &'BD Bt*$,fn, )+.&#tfrtrffi 3 - s
+-i.,'ffi flTflarffi , F & HB . fiPffi ffi 'lH H +l E,g *l4fifi H,

6fll+t7L( Kl 2 -80) "
Method
The acupuncturist presses the acupoint with the index finger or
thumb of the left hand, inserts the needle into the acupoint with the
right hand. When acu-esthesia is felt, the left hand reduces the
pressure, the thumb of the right hand rotates the needle backward
for 3 -5times. When heavy and sunken sensation is felt beneath the
needle, 'the needle is withdrawn a little and the point of the needle
is lightly thrusted and heavily lifted for 3 - 5 times in the area with
acu-esthesia. The thumb rotates the needle backward for another 3 - E 2 _80 )HEE
Fic. 2-80 Cold reducing method
5 times. The point of the needle is kept in the area with acu-esthesia
to relax the area beneath the needle and to produce cold sensation
beneath the needle. After the retention of the needle according to
the pathological conditions concerned, the needle is quickly with-
drawn without closing the needled acupoint (Fig.z -80).
( ilfiFfiE )
j6.H+**&irT.
To treat sthenia heat syndrome.
1 8. i* ;irl. )E 4 fi tr fu '&F, rS ry . F lff 4,1 lX * # A+* E' fr{

^ F-rt+f*, H T trIF +
l*tHFX*tr Z.
^m,WE
18. Strengthening method by inducing heat This technique can
induce hot sensation. It is composed of strengthening techniques by
swift-slow needling, respiration, lifting-thrusting technique, as well
as shaking and scraping methods.
wffi
lf*'{tf ;El
+,H # F rf, rff ,i,, Iti6 { tt"f ,{ Fl ffi LIJ frfr|'l*,'Ft +f fril 1 tl,
^
@W+l r r|,t1il&t.t*;+ffiV!tF3 tr.,u&4#fiTffif&B " tnfi
ftffi,n{+ ffi#lffiHtry..tr rY-ff, Flfs.s*nr3 w,tfr.+r').gnd riijtiT
a*E5" ,\rJ'WIg.YtEl+&.#, ,R&+t+L( K 2 - 8l ) "
Method 'n&'fl/*
The patient is asked to exhale and then the needle is inserted
for I fen, when acu-esthesia is felt, the needle is quickly pressed
t /tl and slowly lifted for 3 times in the area with acu-esthesia. Each time
First layer
the needle is thrusted I
fen, this procedure is repeated for 3 times to
2t ______+
produce pyretic sensation beneath the needle. If there is no pyretic
Second layer I
sensation, the patient is asked to inhale by the nose and exhale by

3rt ------l
the mouth for 3 times to make the point of the needle tremor so as to
a. titrft I +,K&€€3 n If there is pyretic sensation, the needle is
produce pyretic senastion.
a, Three times of heavy pressing and slow lifting for
each layer slowly withdrawn and the needled acupoint is quickly pressed
h. &&&tE3tx (Fig.2-81).
b. Three times of continuous perfomance
c. &tgfr.*,a&*4L
c. Slowly withdraw the needle and guickly press the
needled acupoint lrttF&H I
E 2 -81 *X?].X
+WE'fkilrt fX *il W € #., r|fr Rrfiffi & * h y*g ffi 5 Z&+
fHlEl, BI>+ "
Fig. 2 - 81 Strengthening method by
inducing heat
This method is less stimulative than heat-producing needling
and it has the same indications as those of the latter, which can be
referred to-
IEtrI
( I) A*El'&x./\.ffu=*s*tF"
Q) E ntTfrJ Hn*sLffiEffi il' trIRi+#lB
=ry,
(3 ) H +l' 56El &ffi ffi'lERfE
"
"
( D tnEF:&t1lnfr#sR, trIH' f* <)8{4' W,&Ffr friJ14.WW
tTf tBf 14,#"WsftIRWttTl*W&4F-,ffi T,I,fiJWWW3lx"
Notes
( 1) This method can be performed in the Heaven, Man and
Earth regions.
( 2) Sometimes pyretic sensation can also be produced without
respiration, three-time lifting and thrusting.
( 3) Retention of the needle is done according to the patient's
condition.
wffi.
&lfflfr{lt*
(4) If pyretic sensation cannot be producedo "connecting qi to

dredge meridian" can be used based ein the manipulation time of the
merirlian needled and in combination with the respiration. It's un-
necessary to rigidly adhere to 3 times of respiration.
1e. ifizkiEit +l|ft'&R,nfvfr..ffi fffi YqE, *#AWE fr fiJ

't*ffiH-rt*rt, H TEIF&H m,frt &.
19. Reducing method by inducing cool sensation This tech-
nique is done by means of inducing cool sensation. It is composed of
reducing techniques by swift-slow needling, respiration, lifting-
thrusting techniques and shaking or scraping technique.
lffitFfi-E.l
+ ffi# tr + wt,, ffiHrA<,, #+ffi ff
tx,ry:19.fu.Ti*6 gK
wlvw+fwEt{nwE ( nu*F ) ,lT+frH Hfinf ,:Fff EiE r

h,fi.l AtTkly*dEFJis*ffu'lF&FR3 a,€ffiE I tl, tAtJ
&-Lr*i€* &tF 3 W, DJW4+ftT HH " lnE ffi B,*,ft* Hf*B
ffi ,rulw+f€.it&s,6n*1L( w z - tz1 "
Method
As the patient inhales and insert the needle into the deep
region by stretching the skin with the pressing hand and without
XS
rotation of the needle. Withdrarv the needle a little when acu- Heaven region
esthesia is felt, slowly press and heavily lift the needle three
ttlll
Irlll *S
---l--lT I
Man region
times for I fen upward and downward to produce cold sensation
I
.l-ilLl------
riltl
rus
beneath the needle. When 1 fen is retreated, the needle is ma- Earth region
nipulated for 3 times with the above procedure to produce cool - i-ilLl------
sensation. Withdraw the needle quickly without pressing the
a. t tR&&#tItr4lUH
needled acupoint( Fig.2 -82) . a. Slowly insert to the Xarth region
b. 6#'lE&F€3 n
b. Slowly press and heavily lift three times in each layer
IrnnmB t
".1|=#388tr*$Heaven region
Ar*&Eft H+}*fiil H € E, tYfr ffitr ffi ht Y6 fE ffil 5 Z I c. Quickly lift to the
AfHlEI ,AI*t " B2-82 Hz.l<EiE

Clinical Application Fia. 2-82 Reducine method by indu-
The method is less stimulative than cold-inducing technique cing cool sensation
and it has the same indications as those of the latter, which can be
referred to.
I*;EI
tri*, -E'F,'F.. -frt ryq . F lffi i5 l*,, # # + W l* rtr E\fuI F-fr,
zJ< i5
+rX" H TATAEffi4€Ff EI€ +ItraFf'EHE ,i'-ft&}J
.#+s# ##ffi
tP ru*'.
#ffi
ERn\W$ffitj+r* "
Note
Since this method can produce cold sensation, it is literally
called hydraulic infusion reducing methori. This is a complicated
method composed of the reducing techniques by swift-slow needling,
respiration and lifting-thrusting in combination with shaking tech-
nique. Actually this method is a needling technique simplified from
cool-inducing technique.
20. Afi#,F,iE E)t WF'l*,E uit "*fi fuJ'fi<h *, *#A

+* +t 11 <. /Lx € fr +.t* "' +lXM ID))iW R, frt E,
? l' ft gg
FI F!
20. Blue-dragon-waggingtail method This method is characte-
rized by directing qi with the tip of the needle combined with sha-
king and Nine plus Six strengthening techniques. The performance
of this method looks like a dragon wagging its tail"
tffi'fff,EI
l+ f t- f.+ r"r ii friJ, *, ft w E lk, +t')a fril l,J ffi Ffi , 4+ < tr, H )w
fi+frryryiWdr ,*T&+#ffifrU .,E fr,trwif1Hfiil f"r * f* , u)tE
dr%:<t1ifrffi{€+( Kl 2 - 83 ) .
Method
The needle is inserted to the shallow region obliquely; or the
deep region first then the shallow region, with the tip pointing to the
location of the disease in question. When acu-esthesia is obtained,
the handle of the needle is rotated slowly, like the steersman turning
the helmo from the right to the left to transmit meridian qi to he dis-
B2-83 tant region (Fig.2 -83).
fig. 2-83 =ltEEE
8ue-cfagm-wagBing-tdl rnethod
IilfiftEH I
Tt -=h *-, #6'A?l'ffi . A ffi iEe fr , W',JJ 4'11fr.41 *1 lF ffi "
rlft ft H TH fwtRF_ -MM Efn -X'F F,ffi + ffi i[, tr ft,,tum]ffi . 4
<T)E#"
This method aims at directing qi, strengthening asthenia and
warming the meridian to promote the circulation of qi and blood.
Clinically it is used to cure various abdominal mass, goiter, tumors,
scrofula, arthralgia and other problems due to the stagnation of qi,
blood and meridians.
Wffi
21 . gH#tkt* Fi ffit$*i*, E * Effi.t&+t .n+tIl-=.ffi'rtt*
tH A tfri h\, * * A H. i +f H't[i +& il.t F- it *'t*, 4 l* M lU rH, W W
* ,fry"tA "
21. White-tiger-shaking-head method This technique is a com-
bination of lift thrust, rotation and respiration methods, as well as
swaying the erectile needle erection of the needle. The performance
of this technique looks like a tiger shaking its head.
It*|frfit*l
H*[fA+€ jtft, H B lfr tr ( ]e,*l ), 1+-1 tr W +l'WWtr fr +*
il ,finaffi++_H ,ilJ+& jtJftft , € rfi E fr,I , T Ffi +f fttt^,4Ryt
*ffi , ffiEfffi lLtr itf[ffi *.WXn, !fr.%<W % WfiJE * ffi
,
l++tr41 ,H)Lffitfi(Wz -84) "

Method
When inserted perpendicularly deep into the musclen the need-
le is shaken quickly like the ringing of a bell. Lift the needle while
shaking. At the same time one end of the meridian needled is
pressed by the fingers of the left hand to close the meridian at this
direction to drive the meridian qi to flow to the other direction and to
the location of the disease ( Fig.2 -84). K 2 -84 BE'E)(X
Fie. 2-84 White-tieer-shaking-head
lrefeH) method
+YEu'41<z * , #6EEg "
This technique is used to promote meridian qi flow and to re-
duce sthenic factors.
22. Etu# iE +tLft(r.tr'lFr*5fi r"r'41<*9E Affii FXtul-a

fr +rx, wEfrt lD)tuzwxfri tr z "
22. Black-lortoise-exploring-hole method This technique is a com-
bination of slow-quick needling and directional promotion of qi flow.
The performance of this method looks like a tortoise exploring a hole.
tffi,ff f ;*)
)Kft*tJ {i,tr, fr iB E i* tr, f* EF.+fu+f4in f"r,ffi ffi E
^
(W2 - 85 ) . E Zl H i' H WfriJ D)+ +t ft 'f+6i' fril /* fi , 4 ir t*lj
#€DJlgtEf+FlB" B -85 6'€nn,x
2
Method Fic. 2 -85 Black-tortoise-exploring-

hole method
When inserted into the selected acupoint, the needle is with-
.ww
drawn to the shallow region and then thrusted to various directions in
the shallow, mitldle and deep regions like a tortoise exploring its
holes ( Fig.Z 85 ) . 'Io thrust to different directions can reach the
most desirable acu-esthesia or reinforce stimulation to strengthen
acu-esthesia.
tuftfteHI
+.eH ft <fru r^R +f frll B fr , v) &_ffi.& -4 t&, tE41 % \ilt
ff.m ,El,fftmD* w,^{^}FtfffieroIfl "
This method is effective to promote the circulation of qi and
acu-esthesia, dredging meridians and directing acu-esthesia from the
a. *tlA#tr
a. Inrertion into the deep region shallow region to the deep region and other directions.
b, LEEiIE
b. Li{ting to the shallow region
c. &ffitf,ft
23. #FtiEilF)E ,ft'#.*'E*5 n **irt
frRr-ryiffifE ffJ#A ,
c. Rotation by lifting antl inserting WHFI|FH in fr FtEffi n i/€Z.it, i\ 4 Z.

d. :l&-ii 23. Red-phoenix-meeting-its-source method This method is a
d. Double mtation and single flying
combination of slow-swift needling and flying manipulation, Its per-
Et 2 - 86 fr,ttilffix (ftn ) formance looks likes red phoenix spreading the wings, that is why it
Fg. 2 - S Fbd-plpenix-meeting-its-sarce is so named.
rnethod (l'.leeding dennnstratim )
tffi'{f f}*)
frw HNJ IÊ, 1+ <tr H-L^ E e ii tr, lF<ffi +1, Flff
+t
+E, t*trffi € ffi fa+€, # a - w.-i\, Iv 9s frF[E ru -K iE,
uiLiE41a<WlFffi(W2 - 86.KI 2 -87) "
Method
When inserted into tLe deep region with acu-esthesia ob-
tained, the needle is lifted to the shallow region. When the needle
is shaken by qi, insert it into the middle region. Then the needle
---t----
{
is manipulated rvith a flying technique like a red phoenix spreading
its wings to promote the circulation of meridian qi ( Fig. 2 - 86,
Fis.2-87).
t mFeH)
'fj'a,+'t fX{+ff *|JH&, A ffiiE 4t& ,l-r<ff'fFH"
, El
+ rx ffi ilE iB sJ ir, rlj E fr ifr E ii, tr+ a'6. wi5 trx, fr\#E'{q * ff
_i_ t, ,ffi" tlfiffnJffiT&ffitrffiffiiE,
B2-s/ firlilrySt(+m)
This method is used to promote qi circulation, wait for acu-es-
fte. 2 -gl Fbd-phoerix-rneeting-its-scurce
nethod (Fbrd perfonnance) thesia, maintain acu-esthesia, dredge meridian, and promote thg
-ffiffi,
flow of meridian qi. Since this technique is characterized by deep
needling followerl by shallow needling, it agrees with the quick-slow
reducing technique and thus exerts reducing effect. Clinically it can
be used to treat various pain disorders.
Er,frr
ffi ft l*, t) iiE Je15,11 "
IAppendix l JJoint-crossing-meridian method T'his way of need-
ling is a method that moves qi to joints where regulation of qi method
is applied aftenvards. This method is used to facilitate joints and
move qi-Blood.
It*,l€tri* I
-#
+ NX h'3 +I frJ4F' < E, tI 41 <f* {F fi ts tr a Je fi', ffi Yt $l
xt( Kl 2 -88),
Method
After the insertion and arrival of qi, the acu-esthesia should ra-
diate to the joint with the manipulation of qi-moving method. Then
the needle is erected and applied with regulation of qi method which
B 2 _88 XTA€
can be manipulated for 3 - 5 times. In this method, selected acu- Fie. 2-88 "bint-crossing-rnsidan
points are primarily local ones ( l-ig. 2 - 88 ) .
IrtfifEH )
H Ey ffi )8,8,4- <'ffi tulE ffi , * E#Effi rffiffi +ffi iE "
This method can relax the Tendons, remove obstruction from
the collaterals, moves qi and activate Blood. Usually it's used to
treat muscular atrophy, bi syndrome and paralysis, etc.
t rfi' z 1 fi HE t rfr fr Emt?.48 ftE +E+1.i5 B! tr fllj E{ix t, B

itffiir?|.Y5, Fffi€7t# tr/-l*u)'41ri"W+tf* " AfX * h-Ltr
-ffi mR +Fi5 5 ft fi|J ?l'i5fE fr A H'l Fr* "
I Appendix 2)Five-zang-crossing-meridian method Fiv e -Zang-
Crossing-Meridian method is a strengthening-reducing technique on
selected acupoints on the base of Mother-Son Strenghening-Reduc-
ing principles, followed by Blue-Dragon-Wagging-Tail method which
can move qi. It's actually a combination of strengtherring-reducing
techniques based on acupoint selection anci needle manipulation'
fte
#lfttNt tE
lffirFfri+^l
+t*ftUnntr nfi tH *-tg-fr,Y.Jtgia 'h # + , **rt%.fir "
tn nfrr zffi , * u* w, fit]{,\w%x, t+ 4#. <ffi $+'4-t ffit w Rz
tN,lfr.<t1ffiffiiffi ,L*T_w.4,tl&,{frxfH+( Kl 2 -8e) .
Method
This way of needling is to make acupoint selection according to
the theory of generation and subjugation among the five elements. For
example, the treatment of Liver disease should focus on reinforcing
the Spleen first. So acupoints on the Spleen meridian are selected.
When the acu-esthesia ia felt, Blue-dragon-wagging-tail method is
applied to distribute qi which will fill in and converge the meridians
of the five zang organs to keep them in harmony (Fig.z -89).
[ IfiFEE I
+ififiEflFfriE, trJ 1EgEEntrf . [tlpF.t.fr.Af mE.,11<4
E2_89 TNEtr€ fl]Efltrf
"
Fig. 2 - 89 Five-zans-crossing-meridian Clinical Application
method
This method is mainly used to treat zang-fu organ diseases. It
can regulate the excess and deficiency of yin and yang in zang-fu or-
gans, and move qi to the organs.
tZ.H , iEi{+E , L}rE-=r,fi.G}ffi

"
I Appendix 3 J Passing-joint crossing-meridian method Pass-
ing-joint, means to pass joints; Crossing-Meridian, means that qi
meets meridian. This method can remove the stagnation of qi and
blood through manipulating techniques.
t'*,{f f
't)
t* ; tr H ffi H H ** * fX h %tl, U lEfr?W 4.1 r5 e r€ if , < ffi;e.11
#U
- € *[,fn . IEI H{, &, trJ € rB ffi 'H B! ffi *, ffi?1 ++ friJ4l' 15 + }*,
u[F]HlF;r?it( K 2 -e0) ,
Method
After the arrival of qi, Blue-dragon-wagging-tail is applied
first for a moment and the needle is retained for 5 minutes; then
White-tiger-shaking-head is applied for a moment so that meri-
K2-e0 )EX{4 dian qi can be moved to joints, qi and Blood can circulate to cer-
90 Passing-joint crossing-me-
Fig. 2 - tain areas. Meanwhile, the deficiency or excess property of the
ridian method disease can be taken into account in the application of streng-
W:ffiW:ffi
thening and reducing techniques so as to improve the therapeutic
effect (Fig.2 -90).
I MftEHI
tlft *i fil"w'ffi *, hu x fr ,H-ffi # H-h'H.z "
This method is mainly used to treat syndrome of the type of qi
and Blood stagnation, especially good for joint pain'
HAH Htut+*
SECTION 6 OTHER NEEDLING TECHNIQUES
W &ffi +l fr|J +r*tl', ffi l\+l Xfrr

U t-+ 4 Yi W T 1fr * E fr Oblique needling ol Wei
+E, W++tYfi ffi#.X HH *1 )Lffi /i nin T .

Apart from the technigues mentioned above, there are still some
other kinds of precious needling techniques contributed by acu-punctur-

ists in past dynasties. The following are some commonly used ones.
1 . fidHr.;* B-ffi ,fifit-&W,

ffifr&l*,t I H^WHJI-24"*fu54-,8<1-tT
<41 T%W, FLTWE E til, " KxXm>> + tK*tJL
#H*T,frIJHEHW"
1. Needling ying and wei method As to the circulation of yingqi
Pressed needling of Ying
and weiqi, weiqi flows in the skin, circulates in the collaterals and
distributes in the shallow region, while yingqi circulates in the meri-
dians and flows in the deep region. Therefore in Nanjing it is sugges-
ted shallow needling for wei phase and deep needling for ying phase.
tffi,{f i-rtl
( 1 ) fJ- fr|J r. pH *F r), F, H i* fi{, ffi lA E lH friJ, u ft, ffi &{fr tro
H5. ; g fl H H H{,z".fr?+fr(fiEt Ff r. pH Z-r, di*ffi ,:"ffiE+
&frX{n,'fFllE B!r5,tr#, f^,tr€ifill ( K 2 - el ) "
( 2 ) fr|Jltrrt' tr+++fj i8*ljEtrT, HiSffi fil +e{ffi +}r* B2-s1 (ls€)filj€lE
fr\wffi-+tRE ,4ffi+fiil* , BflDA+iBtrESt " Fig. 2 - 91 Method of needling Ying
(3) *ilHrE ,E+&tr.{-ffi,'fFtrrffi jf ,fr+++ftfi|J,,\ET' and wei recorded in Nanjing
fltH*f €i4ffifr:ArffiZFfi ,itbr[t\i-,ta|I tffifnffift( Kl 2 *ez)
"
Method
( 1) The needling of rvei-yang phase should be shallow with
tranverse needling technique to avoid affecting yingqi in the deep
layer. When needling Ying-yin phase, care should be taken not to
impair wei in the superficial layer. Before needling, the acupoint
should be pressed by the left hand first to dissipate weiqi in the
shallow region, then the needle is inserted ( Fig.2 -91).
(2 ) For the needling of wei phase, the needle is quickly in-
serted into the skin by the right hand and is rotated, thrusted, and
lifted to stimulate the first layer of acu-esthesia. Or normal manipu-
a. frll** lating technique is used to induce desirable acu-esthesia.
a. Needling of wei
(3) For the-reedling of Ying phase, the acupoint is pressed
first by the left hand to disperse qi and blood, then the needle is in-
serted by the right hand perpendicularly into the deep region or into
the painful area. When proper acu-esthesia is felt, the needle is
withdrawn ( Fig.2 -92) .
ITAFEH I
1ffiHI./_'<"
To regulate Ying-nutrient qi and wei-defensive qi.
b.*rj€i*
b. Needling of ying
2. Single needling method This is a simple needling method
B -e2 ruHLX
2
which produces mild stimulation.
Fre. 2-Q Needline ying and wei method
IF,fFtrE)
fJ'*il *flJiE lsl, i FF,l4 +tffi.*, ( W 2 - e3) .
Method
When inserted into the muscles, the needle is withdrawn
quickly (Fis.2 - 93 ) .
tUfiFEHI
#:ffiNIW, ffi T 4' ) L&.fiFft 4W*,H t++h.tr*gg E "
Since the stimulation is mild, it is used to treat children and
those who have never received needling treatment or patients with
K2-s3 HnU^ extreme weakness.
Fie. 2 -93 Single needling method
++ fr., J-
3. t€l$^ +t* tr*ffiufift*+ktffifHl&trlftjffi+i*.
3. Rotatory needling method This is a stimulative technique
mainly composed ol rotation and it's a little bit strongJ.
ttR.f€f rtI
lr+f'fril^H{gI*!JAl-ntI:W.H:'Zf,n,fr +fftft },7r<-.W'FtftE
t;fft# ( fAf€ ) ,E*frFtHd&tr'l*ljffi+i*( w2 -e4) ,
Method
When the neet-lle is being inserted or withdrawn, the needle is
rotated quickly with the thurnb and index finger of the right hand
(Fig.2 *94) and this is a relatively strong stimulative technique.
IilfifEH)
H Trufflj ( rer,,'{ta+€ ) 4x6 (?}ryw.++ ) x H grfrtr+fi*
"
For inhibitive ( heary rotation) or exciting ( mid rotation) purpose.
4. #Wfr +**tr -ffi DreiEEtffi t 6! .lt))ffi',&WA'flft gtfilj

#+trx, '
4. Sparrow-pecking method This is a method of rapid lifting and B 2 -e4 ffiffi^
thrusting. The performance of this method looks like a sp€urow pecking. Fis. 2-94 Rotatory needling method
l&rFfrt*l
&+l +fiJi6-fr.wtr E,>w +t w t-R T 1ffi , ln &zwJAfi ,
ffi$nA.W_LTEA( K -es). 2
Method
When inserted into the required depth, the needle is lifted and
thrusted rapidly like sparrow pecking (Fig.2 -95).
tilfiFEH I
€H :r u *rj#t El H!, AEffi ffJtL?.ffigg +, 6{Ifi4ffi #F ff{
tF,ffi,frfi8&HTx6} H#rX "
This technique is used for stimulation only. With the monitored
lifting and thrusting, it can exerts both inhibitive and exciting effect.
5. Eiiffi .+rt & u ffi iffi t t, in € W*ffii tl W.41 Z,)tt ir IiF

^
/(Affitriffi'ffizffffiiAz,
5. Leakage-needling method This method, as sectional perfor- B 2 -e5 Gffi^
mance of the sparrow pecking technique, is characterized by lifting Fig. 2 -95 Sparrow-Pecking method
,ffiffi
and thrusting like the dripping of water from the roof.
tffi,f€f,;*l
E &W* #tiE [[ A 6 IA, E{t E I W tr't 1 / 3 friJ
itE fH
* ; S :$ 1 /3, l)3 41'E W/F ; lt B +t ZW,,jr \n frtJ \ni, @ tE t tz
^,'M11'&W
I1',&W*ttri fH ft ( Kl 2 - e6 ) .
Method
The indication is somewhat different from that of the sparrow-
pecking method. Inserted l/3, the needle is manipulated by spar-
row-pecking method; inserted another l/3, the needle is again ma-
nipulated by sparrow-pecking method; withdrawn t/3 each time,
the needle is manipulated in the same way ( Fig.2 -96).
B 2 -e6 Effi^
Fie. 2 -96 Leakaee-needline method I MFEHI
+ffi T$exlj w}' B Ht F,l +*, ffi T*fi firJ .ifr +,
This technique is used for strong stimulation for the purpose of
inhibition and inducement.
6. EEFA +EUFBNX+, fr\E "

6. Tremoring-needling method This method is characterized by
tremoring.
tffi'fff,,EI
E+|NJE41:#''M. t:T
F gn, fr,&+f tfr-L tn ffi ryn,
B! pI ffi
,f#,jfr$fr?1qlt,I&dtfrffiiffi( W2 -e7) "
Method
The needle is tremored slightly up and down when manipulated
by scraping or flicking the handle of the needle with the index finger
to shake the upper part of the handle of the needle ( Fig.2 -97).
[IfiREE)
€H +fr.€, flJL A .+F 4*ltt.eYTffiX, €X6fFffi .
For excitation of flaccid vessels, muscles and nerves.
B2-s7 Hm^
Fie. 2-97 Tremoring-needling method
7. f;Lft7t +t*t^+t*!JÊffi^n-EuA&ffi& "
7. lrregular-needling method This way of needling means that
the manipulation of the needle after insertion does not follow a cer-
tain rule.
ffiffi
ElftlFil#
H*,ff ;*)
''
lt-+1fri,l..-fr.WE.tr, iBpEaET, F1rfiil ,cl'R4'lq ,
4rfiBfrlirtr ,a\frsEfria,ffiHfftjt( Kl 2 -e8) "

Method
When inserted to a certain depth, the needle is immediately
withdrawn beneath the skin and then thrusted slowly or quickly, for-
ward, or backward, to the left or to the left freely (Fig.z -98).
t llf,REE I
tr $efiUffi , ? ffi Tufi + effiWfr,ffi".m.m. "
For strong stimulation to induce and relieve congestion and
stagnation of blood.
8. lalfftt +WW?-+tfinH tffalK)t1tffii EZ "

B2- e8 6lfl^
8. lntermittent-needling method This method is characterized by
Fig. 2 -98 lrregular-needling method
intermittent retention and manipulation of the needle.
tffi{ff,;XI
fl-fiil -ft wE E, r'jmfa++F tfrw, ffi Eft 4J, FFtffi d
'6
O
ffi+€frn,HHH7_,HFWW(W 2 - ee) " O
Method trH=
so
Insertedto a certain depth, the needle is rotated, lifted and fls#'
thrusted for several times. Retained for a while, the needle is rota-
I
I
I
i
ted, lifted ancl thrusted again. After a while of retention, the previ-
ous procedure is repeated for several times (Fig.Z-99).
E 2 -ee l4€nt
Fig. 2 -99 lntermittent-needling me-
tnafeEl thod
ffi Tfr.€tr5KEX[Jl FJ 1MWW, UX6'h El H!, isHl&*ilH,
,JFtrttFhtwff{*,
To treat angiectasis or muscular flaccidity, this technique is
used for excitation. If the stimulation is strong, it can also be used
for inhibition.
e. ffi tf E+tr* A*fixlJ E,EEttHr4+t +E fa#,tfr.+l

+5 H ffintLz+ #WfI iffi tr Ht . t*
9. Retaining-needling method The needle is rotated to one di-
rection so as to twine the muscular fibers on purpose.
ffiffi
&lftl*ntt
lffirFfi]*l
* fil l'nfitr ffi , 11 + fi t+lF, *,+ q ta ffi ffiry,4 ryffi 4r
ofr.
'ffi '8,, * ffi *11 N4&,*'t*s\41'i5 ( Kl 2 - 100 ),

Method
Inserted into the muscles, the needle is rotated unidirectionally
so that the point of the needle twines with the muscular fibers, and
then other strengthening or reducing techniques can be applied
(Fis.2 - 100).
I ilfiFEH I
E2-1oo Hfig+tX
Fig. 2 - 100 Retainin*needling method Clinical Application
Strong stimulation is used for strong constitution with sthenia
syndromes. With the combination of reducing and strengthening
techniques, strong stimulation also can be used to treat asthenia syn-
dromes.
1 0. * rAffi ${?5;X +*En* E XE-ff UJ' El?1--"frl7'*,

10. Close-open supplementary technique for promoting qi flow
This method is used for promoting qi flow.
tffi,{€f r*l
BlraffiE+*ffi Eh.E +E{]Etfr gI tu* W:ti <}rA. E
ll+tlt,'&<ffi'41, trflfr8 fir"41, iIH{ El'HE+ru ffi&E+t tr
*S{i, t +4#l %-<#J Ft tr 11 "'&F,ft Tt frtJ Ei & f:r & ft Efr *F {i,
fi{ rarmja# ,EI&Bffry",UIfr<1E4Bf{?( W2 - 101).
Method
The left hand helps the right hand to lift and thrust or rotate the
needle to promote qi flow. In the manipulation of the needle, if qi
flows back when it is desired to flow forward, the thumb of the left
hand presses the back part of the needle to prevent qi from flowing
back. If qi is desired to flow back, the front part of the needle is
B2-101 XtAffiSffi.X pressed. If qi flows to both sides, the side is pressed to direct qi to
Fie. 2-101 Close-open supplementary flow along the meridian forward ( Fig. 2 - 101 ).
technigue for promoting qi flow
[ ilfifEE I
ffi8111t."
To promote qi flow.
t+ fi, + .I
ffiffi
ale -..*,
EE.
- D-EI
e-l J .><D
(F!E> th,fiijtt
OLiAf'TeR 3 DESOfilf'TiOt,i Oi; t\iHF:Dl- Il,irj
T!:Ot"if,i I GUF:{; I t,i r-iF: I J I r,ic
<<fr%>>trJeTfitJrE #ribfiffi9 ,lbhril+l *tl gt+$R.f++l

H! ,b E . frtJ ft Ft tr + . {+ <, 5 }E -r H! F XlJ . ? F 15 + fA, * frJe E e
ffiilffr++frljFr8+.
l? 6 H F!fritr, H F H U )L+l N./ ryffJ " luHJ" ; fi &ffiffiM.ffi

/* . it uJ. + E, F H *rJ ii, *!J lfr ffl H fi
ift *,'-, t)) 8.8 ffi$ n ffi
+tfrilffiE, pji6ff+-4#J&ffiffiiEF!"
^ +-fitj" ( {+€.ffi
AEXTEXi-trBt ) ; " trfrlJ"€flxffinH€'XffiAimE S A! ; ^
*
=*u
" trffiaff;NJ M.E, hl*. F . W+ = ffi TFIWE ful h
E*IJ*" Ê
ln Neijing much description is devoted to needling tools, prin-
ciples for needling techniques, acu-esthesia, regulating qi as well as
various methods for strengthening and reducing purpose.

In the record of the needling techniques in the chapter of "Offi-
cial Needles" in Lingshu, the discussion is mainly made of the nine
needles in dealing with nine kinds of pathologic changes. Based on
the pathological condition in question, suggestion is made of shallow
needling, deep needling, the number of needles used and the selec-
tion of the needling angle in correspondence to the "12 needling
techniques" for the treatment of various syndromes concerning the
selection of acupoints. "Five kinds of needling" is suggested for the
treatment of five zang disorders; "three kinds of needling" refers to
the needling done in the shallow, middle and deep regions after the
insertion of the needle into the skin.
ffiW
( frlA) itlfllix
SECTION
H-fr
1
tl*il8
NINE NEEDLING TECHNIQUES
+ rL fr=F Il t'j ?A ( fr %> / XZs H'l.}, ffi. trt ffi N. M. ffi )t fF T'
lFl ffifi|'lrx "
This section is devoted to the discussion of the nine kinds of
diseases to be treated by the nine kinds of needles recorded in Nei-
jins'
1. ffi*il A*EF fr+tffiJ414ffittrH-f iffitFffifrkg,ft*

ffifrnEHffiBf ffifrmf*,
1. Shu needling This method means to needle the Shu-Stream
point and the Back-Shu point of the meridian involved.
,r
tt*.fft';t) :
*f,NEH ffiFf , E"I RA JE %.bNW N WJE T DJ T glffii(ffiffi .I

X(t 3 - 1) , PJ&HS{,FHJeB!fiEEf''rt fiffif'r.,1'-fr.Xffr.X4 I
'fr.'F'fr',(Kl :-1)J"
Method I
To treat diseases of the five zang-organs, Ying-Spring and Shu-
Stream points located below the elbow and knee on the meridian in-
t
volved ( Table 3 - 1) and the Back-Shu points of the five zang or-
gans ( such as Feishu, Xinshu, Ganshu, Pishu and Shenshu) can
beselected{Fig.3-1). r
' t3-r fi'flE*ffint
r
%.w Rli #rx
,r
+ *.fftkFrt & f6. JiXl
a&rn,aa%. *E r&.
I
+)'ffi'c%. ')'F+ ,fn
.e-Krnfl+4 n* ,*.6 I
x-E}..fnET% 4il6J *.;+

I
Lr'fr|',w% s6 *.r*
ffiW
( ft/4)
Table 3 - 1 Ying-Spring and Shu-Stream points

of five Zang organs
Meridian Ying-Spring point
Lung Yuji 'laiyuan
Pericilrdium Laogong Daling
Heart Shaofu Shenmen
Spleen Dadu 'Laibai
Liver Xingiian Taichong
Kidney Rut gt Taixi
tilfiFEH I
YaFfiNEtrffi.
It is used to treat of five zang-organs.
oazhu*fi
' FengmenXl-1
Ffi6r reistru
lueyinshuffD9'fr
,L.ft Xlnshu
DushuEft
Geshu flffi6iI fiffiFive
ffFff Ganshu Zang Shu points
oanshu EE'fr
ffif'l Pistru
weishu H.fi.
Sanjiaoshu =Rf{ Ff( Strensnu
QihaishuSff-fu
oachangshuiffiff )€-'eil Guanyuanshu
Shangliaot# Itffit€y Xiaochangshu
CttiaoTkE: Hffiff Pangguangshu
Zhongliao FE F€ff Zhongliishu
XialiaoTE Htrd.fu saihuanshu
*FBuuivang
K3-1 mfilj
Fig. 3 -1 Shu needling
€^ffiBf ffifiifif}*.
fr, + -* E€I A4
ffiffi
ffie) ittfr{t/*
2. Distal needling Distal needling ro treat the upper by

means
needling the lower or to select the acupoints located in the distal part
of the meridian. This method is used to treat disorders of the six fu-
organs.
tffi.ff f,r*l
i
*/b,l x x nrd6 ffi H{, E"J 4q fltrf lE E = FB %. V,JT A i( fr\ Z " rW, Ep
" ffilff t- ,wzT " ru" am
rtgw. ft+ . rnffi r
zH , fi H ffiErrg = E .fiEfiE{
^ff{" * E . g[ T, flfi fitrf H! ffi itr, E fii
x t' *E,,FL
F-fmJ€firirTHot{n#FEl*ffi (8t -27 "
tfr Method
The diseases of the six fu organs are treated by needling the
lower He-Sea acupoints on the three yang meridians of the foot.
This means "treating the upper disease by needling the lower part
of the bodyn' and "He-Sea acupoint functioning to treat the fu or-
gun{ .
For example, gastric disease can be treated by needling
ry[
Zusanli and gallbladder disease by needling Yanglingquan, etc.
Currently diseases involving the head, trunk and viscera all can
be treated by needling the acupoints located below the elbows and
knees ( Fig.3 -2).
B3_2 iE€fr|J [ [6pFeE I

Fie. 3-2 Distal needling
?atrifitrFtffi"
It is used to treat diseases of the six fu organs.
tEEI
ffi ffi trffi xfiff a,8 = vH %wT aX, *flft i6HT i6tri fitr
wy<|fr "
Note
Fu Shu refers to the lower He-Sea acupoint of the six fu organs
on the three yang meridians of the foot which are effective in treating
diseases involving the six fu organs.
3. &frt +B+FiAft%W*HH0fr4,++,SFH ffi4.tu?ffi
3, Meridian needling This method is used to treat the disorder of

the meridian itself. The acupoints selected are all located on the me-
ridian with pathologic changes. That is why it is called meridian
needling.
ffiffi
(frtiltittfin#
t'*,i€f,r*)
ftt fr]{-,f tL%.wFfi i!. zft ft, m mw 6 )&,a +Rwq* *1 tu
fr ( tilm In . 6F #, Ir'. ffi + ),'f -F \fr,W ffi ffi ?1 VI fif{ 16
tr(K3-3)" ^
Method
This method is used to treat the stagnation of qi and blood as
well as accumulation phenomena ( such as blood stasis, sclerosis and

tenderness) over the circulating route of the meridian proper by
needling the acupoints on the affected meridian alone ( Fig. 3 - 3) .
[ ]lfiREH I
h+%$Hfi!ffiA. B3-3 efrJ
Clinical Application Fig. 3 -3 Meridian needling
To treat the disorders of the meridian proper.
4. *AfriJ 4f* tJ #tjfr. tA trr +.,tttlsZ "

4. Collateral needling This technique is mainly used to needle
the collaterals.
t'*,ff tr;t)
4}* E /i *lJ {+ t m ift H! fr uJ' % hklP.H fi m H! }- E
(Kl3-4)"
Method
To needle the small collaterals shallowly to induce bleeding
(Fig.3-a).
( ilfiffiEffi )
ffiTi6f*i[.*itr"
It is used to treat sthenia and heat syndromes.
te'*l
* Tir#*{ t*t\frilffi"t&} + , fr\t\t&Nl xffsfrJtf',, E m 16 El3 -4 &NJ
Fig. 3-4 Collateral needling
tr-LDHB'l &ffit*,N|nkxr r*, !n=t*atf (fif.TW+t ) 'trffiflEI
?dffi*{Efiil S rrr*+4E f ztrrtfd ffi "
Note
Since this method mainly punctures the collateral, so it is
called collateral needling. The method is commonly used to let
blood, such as triple-edged needle ( known as sharp needle in the
ffi-ffi
se'dff ffi
ancient times), cutaneous needle or heavy, puncturing for bloodlet-
ting by a roller, they all belong to collateral needling.
5. fifrt
+txftt?+t*lHtflJr FJ f.]-ff fi|Ji*,
5. Muscular needling This method means to insert the needle di-
rectly into the muscles.
It*.fff,;*l
+ W ftffi VFI# T €' €fi *F H'l iJi FJ, ft FlJ F{ H ii rft nrl H *[ ffi FI
(Kl3-s).
Method
This method mainly inserts the needles directly into the muscles
attached to the bones ( Fig. 3 -5).
tilftfteH I
ffi T hT? EILA H! tritr . E ilE&WE ffi + "
g -5 ,)f;lj
3 This method is used to treat muscular pain, flaccidity or old
Fig. 3-5 Muscular needline trauma.
6. t;E*'J At*i#Fh.i5Sfr.fsz&2W,fr\E
"
6. Major reducing needling This method is used to eliminate and
dredge stagnant blood and ascites. That is why it is so named.
tH,lf fir*)
&WB+. fr. E+, 7F E+ 41, 4-t U 9J Jl 5 I ifi EI fl' *tJ tX fi F ilt B& Ir fr
trzKH!*tlit( Kl 3 -6) "
Method
This method is used to incise or to puncture for the elimination
of pus and blood and dredging of ascites in the area with abscess,
hematoma or edema ( Fig. 3 - 6) .
I llfrFEH I
ffiTtrttr#Fffil5z]<"
To dredge pus and ascites.
B3-6 xE*U
Fie. 3-6 Maior reducing needling
7. 4fr1 4r*EiifitJ&N+,fik&
"
7. Cutaneous needling This technique means to needle shallowly
into the skin. That is why it is so named.
ffiqk
'=.'d a6
WF'M#E
(frnlfflfrillx
l#tFfiiFl
i*fill#gEi*i{ffi${n,^ fiILlAE( Kl 3 -7) "
Method
'Io needle shallowly into the skin and not deep into the muscles
(Fig.3-7).
I ilftffiEH I
thi+ffi&E EK#.l*,Wffiir"
To treat cutaneous numbness and superficial diseases.
tH,*)
js*Hffift, F t tfr ffiPl E ffi fi'. wHfriJzxw
4,,{t fifi T
R, &tsJiEErfrftffiEzi, EijtffiFIF!, YAf /6Ee,A{f "
K3-7
Note =filj
Fie. 3 -7 Cutaneous needling
In the past arrow-headed needle was used. In the current clinic
practice, cutaneous needles and roller-needling instmments, im-
proved with the inspiration of the old practice, are used. So the in-
dication is enlarged.
ft*E"+fu11R1i.-)o
8. Opposite-side needling This method means to needle the left
for the treatment of the right and vice versa.
IF.{f trr*l
f
atutuIffi4e&tr )Ltu X{n* Y6 ,fr tuH! ffi ABEiA H! i(
i
{n* i6 l? , * T %W'W-14. tr EI tr tiE, fiI r}L i* &68 Y6ffi
(Kl3-8).
Method
To treat the disorder on the left side by needling the right side
and vice versa. Since qi in the meridians exchanges from the left to
the right, this method can also treat diseases ( Fig' 3 - 8 )'
trtgFEH l
EffitrIA,Effifjh"
To treat the disorders on the left side by needling the right side B3-s trfilJ
and vice versa. fie. 3 -8 Opposite-side needling
ffiffi
(fr4)
le)El
5" aNJ" *l,)tr'J.6f. -ffi" -ryNJ",&ft" Effifr W,fr ffitr
w zl* " xxIslf..t& , *l€ L%w,w*&,*H ry.|N,st HI ffi" try
fril"zif( Kl 3 -e).
Note
Miu-needling is similar to opposite-side needling ( to treat the
disorders on the left side by needling the right side and vice versa)
which is used to treat diseases locating in the collaterals and not in-
vadingin the meridians there isn't any change in the pulse too
E3-s WffiJ (Fig.3-e).
Fie. 3 -9 Miu-needline
e. i+fiil 4i*€*f+)Wfi'HntrfrUL1ff.#-91frt* ,frt A .
9. Cauterized needling This method means to insert rhe caute-
rized needle into the body.
^F-fffi.*)
'& +t + & ft,f+ Ht r / 3 - t /2, flfrw,H
E t< t,Ha.,'H,+t EI
r-fi#tl+t{6FlJAtFl( K 3 - 10.Kl 3 - t1).
Method
The needle is burned red 1/3 - l/2 and then immediately in-
serted into the selected acupoint (Fig.3 -10,Fig.3 - 11).
t IftFEE I
ffi *i6f * ffi ,l*Ifr ,ffl H+ffi irT
"
EI3-10 tftftx Clinical Application
Fig. 3 - 10 Method of burning the need- This method is used to treat cold pain, scrofula and carbuncle.
le
'*' Xll *K frJ%>id+t B! aE +t H,e, E fr E ft + in # H! *

H,Efuffi&ft.fi +1 ,+E+1 frjfl.€fr.K
,w+t ,w+t.fi
Etffix.f,l, ^H v ffi(-4'fiillFH i[, T F K 5 * ( KI 3 - 12,
^+l
#3 -2) "
IAppendix jNine needles
Nine Needles refer to the needles made of metal recorded in
Neijing, and are the earliest recorded needling instruments in Chi-
na, i. e. arrow-headed needle, round-tip needlen blunt-tip need-
le, sharp-edged needle, sword-shaped needle, round-sharp need-
B3-11 SfiU le, fili-form needle, long needle and large needle ( Fig. 3 * 12,
Fig. 3-11 Cauterized needline Table3-2).
ilq/4) itl Nl r*
t3 -2 JLt+ft
R n6
* x*'1x,,fr4" i,fi,&trk lL'fr4L,*&
ffi*&4+ 1.6 -f Ex h *,;\frt Afrt, +
{,t* 'E{an
4 t"W*i,41'X ih\ Ftvt#tirsn,+&E
ffi=n* 1.6 + qFfr +l+,^4frntLrtt
H:&1+ 3.s -i * q+nk,4* irt n', . * nl

Ebt'.
wfrffiR * ,fxnY.firh ,v\$4n | .J-
+l8W*tfr,41 l .6 -J-
.+
L ,]
ffiw*1t 1.6 -| *+Lftt, = ftfr ifr&fntF,tr**i* 3t'
+#.
4 -i 4:f
H -L&-qt2.5+<h\ ' fr*"a],+^l iW.Ntli$.,+7rfi1!&
st
6-f
ffi;;Ftn+f 1.6 t wfr E-H",+l * ifn.,t,'Bn&X+,
&x,1l4kn, EJ'KFI 7 -J-
ffikaq 3.6 +
+h*" 4'e,41 Bs-rz n+iB
'X*e+x4llX Zdntrr- Fie. 3 - 12 Nine needles
7+ 114 &'l=,+l+ iflff iL,&,',f-*I
ffit'.&11
1x"+l
irtrY'N,Xnd.AU.it
4t 4lX-*"&,*+
H )LX1+
r*w
f {t *,'Erl-" E)-n
+FX1t.kR'B,kW
Table3-2 Nineneedles
Name Size Shape Application
Cutaneous disease. with-

Big head and out fixed location, fever o-
Alrow-
l. 6cun ,to like an ar- ver head needling the skin
head needle
*f shallowly to remove and
discharge yang-qi
Pathogenic factors in the

Round- Round body and
1. 6cun striae, nrbbing the superficies
tip needle ovate tip
without impairing the rmrscle
Meridian disease and in-

sulficiency of qi: streng-
Blunt- Big body, round
3.5cum thening done by pressing
tip needle and slightly sharp tip
the nnridian to e:Sel pa*nge-
nic factors
Shutp- Carbuncle, bi-syndrome,

Round body, tri-
edged L 6cun obstinate disease; purgng
edged and sharp tip
needle heat to let out blood
'646A .4fie9
l4-#e'm
tu#w
r'r.:l 1i.::1=::
( fr!4) itlfril/*
( continue)
Name Size Shape Application
Swonl- 4 cun in
Sword-shapetl Suppurative tumes(ience;
shaped length and 2. 5
and sharp incision to eliminate pus
needle in width
Round and
Round- Carbuncle and sudden
l. 6cun sharp, slightly big
sharp needle obstnrction; deep needling
head, small body
Cold and heat pain,

l'iliform Filiform like
3.6cun slightly retenti<xr of the need-
needle pine needle
Ie
Palngenic factors hiding in

L,ongest in body deep regiors and distal oL>
Long needle Tcun
and sharp tip structive problenr: deep n€ed-
ling
Edema, obstruction of
joints, needling to reduce
Sharp and slighr
Lârge needle 4cun edema. L,ater on cauterized
Iy round tip
needle is used to treat
scrofula, abscess, etc.
ff=fr *=*il8
SECTION 2 TWELVE NEEDLING TECHNIQUES
trrfEfi|.l*&€ *___-ffi.
These are the needling techniques discussed in Neijing for the
treatment of twelve meridians' diseases.
w,fi\& "
1. Symmetrical needling One needle is inserted on the front and
another on the back. That is why it is so named.
t+ *, + r+
E
(Ftsillitl*UllX
tffi,rf trr*l
rill*U-+&Bt,L', fH Efi&*[ Fii+rf , fr *+&HffiH ,
fH E TfH tr H": Hft 4t, *ffi E ;6 IErffi ,$t * " iXff -- Bfr - ffi , Pjl
PHx't'fBtrttt.tX,ffrjhllftfrJ,li-tF" D,l FH*tJ" ( K 3- 13 )"
Method
One hand presses the front ( corresponding to Front-Mu point on
the chest), the other hand presses the back ( corresponding to Back-
Shu point). The needles are inserted into the tenderness felt on the
front and back. Such a front-back needling technique is known as
symmetrical needling, also called "yingyang needling" ( Fig. 3 - 13).
I rtfiFtrH I
ffi xt ffi xtrf ffiffi t\ ffiffix$Hi(fi H fr t fE m E fr|J, Bp E B3-13 En[
Fig. 3-13 Symmetrical needling
Art" ^
This method is used clinically to treat visceral diseases by the
combination of the Front-Mu points and Back-Shu points.
2. ffi*tl AE}+i*lJ S +i trHE.E-frJgl*ffifr*, " ffi" y'r

" €" flH,H,"
2. Trigger needling This method means to repuncture after the
needle is withdrawn. "trigger" means repeat'
IF.rft'*)
ffiffi ffi.# Ffr ffi./=,trT +t, ffi?1 +tx tr, ifi lnJ,B afi 4[€ 6 )F
a,frH-eR,f&,HelT61 ( K 3 - t4) .
Method
To needle the region felt painful by the patient. When the need- NE,H.
Painfirl point
le is manipulated, ask the patient whether the pain of the needled
region is stopped. Then tendemess on the other region is needled
(Fig.3-14).
t rtfif E.H I
jlLE€Yfi iF€{4ffi ffi H0 ft*!.l'*, Ttr,(r'
Painful poinl
To treat migratory pain or diseases.
El3-14 ffifilJ
Fig. 3 -14 Trigger needling
3.'h*il AfXfrtjtrEl''WFtrlt/6lfl*-fr\,ffi';hthfrA,WE "
3" Rehabilitating needling This method helps restore the function
of the affected part. That is why it is so named.
ffi.ffi
(frfr) l it l fin t*
tffi'lf f ;'Al
ft, A*Nl 1+<8, + ffi # lff.Xfr rh frV,'ffi dr, T ffiF.& +t
^,
Method
The needle is inserted beside the joint. When acu-esthesia is
obtained, ask the patient to move the joint and repeatedly change
the direction of needling for dredging the meridians and relieving
spasm of the tendons ( Fig.3 - 15).
t IfiF&H I
iX ffi FJ rA E + xt ffi A fii H.Bffi H'l
g['fn w ffi +t fr\
"
To treat obstructive pain due to cramps of musculature by need-
ling around the affected region.
Bs-rs &fi|J
Fig. 3 - 15 Rehabilitating needline
4. frfr| A*=ft -*friJ,t[:6x<4\l #. 4Er=*il, =fril
# ,IhFtr"z1'ifr#&,.
4. Ranked needling In this method, three needles are inserted
together to treat deep small obstructive disease. It's also called triple
needling.
IT*TEfrftI
*\.a*NJ( Kl3 - 16).

Method
is inserted into the middle and two are on both
One needle
sides. Three needles are inserted together' That is why it is so
named (Fig.3-16).
t mF&H)
B3 -16 fffi[
i6 f ffi 4y*6 ffi &zl' ffi *{{n&i H! tr)ffi +itr "
Fie. 3 -16 Banked needlins
To treat deep obstructive pain over a small region'
telEI
ilff *{}*5'WNJffiE,'W*\ry-X *NJ .,tfr* E fi|J ; 7rfilj
\r=*RA,fiIxfrfi=*U"
Note
This method is different from rehabilitating needling characte-
ffiffi
(fr-q) l iil fril tx
rized by repeatedly needling in one acupoint with one needle or to

more directions. Ranked needling is done by using three needles, it
is also known as triple needling.
5 . +frfriJ +r?n+t * nr t+ filJ lt fiil , hH " r,E" zffi. , pH &,H l*.2

_y.&"
5. Surrounded needling This needling is characterized by inser-
tion of one needle in the centre and four around for shallow and su-
perficial needling. The Chinese character " yurg" means shallow,
sharing the same meaning of "yang" in yinyang theory.
tffi{€}r*l
F#i<ly,t 'Ftrmt.|
1 +t,XEftLT ,EE&l*,friJ | +t,friJ
Method
One needle is inserted on the middle and four others are insert-
ed on the upper, lower, left and right respectively. The needled
833-17 frfrJ
Fie. 3-17 Surrounded needling
area is not concentrated, so it is called surrounded needling ( Fig.
3-17).
IfiftFtrH )
4rxi6 HTI6F+5 ii rr ffi fl st Ht FiE "
To treat obstructive disease with superficial cold retention in a
larger area.
I*), l
)8.4\ffilt +trF Fll E, EF )t & NJt* Vt'&*P +lt
"
Note
Plum needling was developed on the basis of surrounded
needling.
6. Htt*'J AfE€-ffiEruEffi ,+lHxtffiFfrB!fi|JfA"

6. Perpendicular needling The skin is kneaded and the needle is
inserted perpendicularly into the location of the disease.
tH.ff f,r*l
fr*i+€ftit{nftEffi ,mE:W+t#ATfrtJZ,( Kl3 - 18).
Method El3 - 18 Efifi[
Knead the acupoint and needle try the skin (Fig.3 - 18). Fig. 3-18 Perpendicular needling
ffiffi
(fr!il
t ilfifieH I
To treat superficial and collateral disease by shallow needling"
IE'*)
)84\*#5IhEfrlJElffifrtJ "
Note
This method is now known as needling by the skin or transverse
needling.
7. ffifrt *wh pH.fftiuflt[E'l-trf frl*

"
7. Shu needling^pfrBl
This method means to direct yang away from yin
to eliminate heat.
lrnrFfri*,1
tsfffrll*EsHfilJ &l &!{F <"4+<E'lF'lFKfi iE H
(K3-19)"
Method
The needle is inserted perpendicularly deep to wait for acu-es-
thesia and when acu-esthesia is obtained, the needle is slowly with-
g3-1e hlfilj (Fig.3-19).
drawn
Fig. 3-19 Shu needling
I ilfiREH )
r,
}^r,fr4l pH .ffillt,{&T$ F!-ffi+rx ,D)'{EffiIF.
To dissipate pathogenic heat through directing yang a\'Yay
from yin.
8. E*il 4EiAjE€&I1f+*A ffi*ffifit*.," 8" F" +*)8"

H!H,B..
8. Short needling This method is used to needle the region near
the bones. o'Short" means "near".
Iffi,f€''*I
TKETA*+( K: -2o.Kl 3 -21) "
Method
B 3 -20 EnU
Fie. 3-20 Short needling Insert the needle slowly to the deep by slight shaking and then
'ruffiffi
(t\lillitlfill llt
rotate it mildly when it gets near the bone ( Fig. 3 *20,Fig.3 -21) .
I ufiFeH )
h,a'rT+w*frffi,ffi"
'fo treat deep located disease like obstructive disorder of
bone.
e. ;Y*il +lbftf-*+fi*fr|.lFt_-.ffi z.'-t*,fi\E.

9. Superficial needling This is an obliquely superficial needling
technique.
l&rFfii*l a. *Sffifitl
a. Short needling of the hand
?*E&*UElf'+fti*fi{ (W3 -22) " b. tr*Fffi*l
Method b. Short needling of the fmt
Transverse needling or obliquely shallow needling (Fig.3 -n). El3 -21 ffifilJ(+filE)
Fie. 3-21 Short needling (hand and
I rl.fiFEH ) foot )
&NlnwuliafJlFJ+^€."
To treat cold cramps of muscles by shallow needling.
tEEI
frJ F* +twiil FtJ, E +.tbfrE Ffi TH"
Note
Superficial needling, cutaneous needling and surrounded need
ling all belong to shallow needling. But cutaneous needling means
shallow needling with fewer needles, while surrounded needling
means shallow needling with more needles. They're both different K 3 -22 Efill
from this method. Fie. 3-22 Superficial needling
10. Yin needling This method means simultaneous needling of the

acupoints located on both sides.
tH.ff r';*)
' IFJ-X{n ,fEWlNJlFJ4xZ.fillZ( W3 -23) "
Method
To needle an acupoint on the right and left sides simultaneously
.'ffiffire
(fr4)litlfilllt
( Fig.3 -23).
I ilfift&H I
i6ltrj*,
To treat yin cold.
IE,TI
EtrW {/IJFJ E i(nffiWf, lEl fitJ, rlf ,ft tlfi ff fi ffi +l t *ffi .
EI3 _23 PEfi|I
Note
Fie. 3-23 Vn needling Acupoints of the same name on the right and left sides are
needled at the same time. It's widely applied in modern clinic.
11 . Ftt*{ A*EtfiJ | +t ,*tu#Nl t +t ,ff.*Warr*|J,

fi\fls^ *+ffriJ" "
11 . Accompanied needling This method means to insert one
needle into the selected acupoint and another into the acupoint near-
by. That is why it is so named.
l#48fi1t^)
EjtHfilJ | +r,#Eit**.*r4bnfrtJ 1 ft( K 3 - 24) "
Method
One needle is inserted perpendicularly, another is inserted ob-
liquely beside ( Fig.3 -24) .
tilfiFEE I
)tffifrJ#*MH Atr,H rtfi BE.E , ft 8fr.6& , ,-,.6fu.
B 3 -24 Fft*lit H!HiE"
Fie" 3-24 Accompanied needling Clinical Application
This method is used to treat stubborn obstructive syndrome with
obvious tendemess, fixed location and prolonged course.
lE;E)
ix ff *U *x t fi r& E *F fr ffi ,r v, iL14.'ffi t& tF ffiffi lk "
Note
This method is used to help dredge the meridian and activate
the collaterals over the tenderness.
12. ffifril +*fr2F-BniHffiffifl+ ,fit&,

12. Repeated and sparse needling This way of needling can
ffiffiffi
(t4t4)litlfi(l/*
help subside sores and swelling. T'hat is why it is so named.
tl*'{f f,}*l
4 rt.E H $, fi{ A i* lirt t! ft'R, ft#ry rl ffii* fi|J fi fir Ht *tJ
Method
The needle is inserted perpendicularly, and withdrawn straight-
ly, characterized by shallow needling and quick withdrawal of the
needle. This is a repeated, sparse, shallow and bloodletting tech-
nique (l'ig.3 -25).
I mFeEl
Hai6frffifi+.1+6+.
To treat carbuncle, furuncle and erysipelas. - B3-25 gefil
Fie. 3 -25 Repeated std sparse need-
tinc
te)El
.4rtEll.m.*|J*.
Note
This method belongs to bloodletting needling methods.
H=fr tr*il8
SECTION 3 FIVE NEEDLING TECHNIQUES
]{Tf fiJ*,frIX'fiABfi*lJ"
These five techniques are differentiated according to the relation
between the five zang organs and five constituents( skin, vessel, ten-
dono muscle, bone) .
1 .+ *il A*}itfitj f Affi , dr tE'w, lD)w.+:tr, tr fitj+& lfr 6 Ee

frl,ft&+fl1"
1. Semi-needling Semi-needling means to needle the skin only.
That is why it is called semi-needling.
.ffi
ffiffi
(t44)
It*,ff f r* I
i* € i{
fi|J *|] T H,ii, frrJ 1+ l*., tti $t'R, W I*+E #' &.+' -- t+
(w3 -26) "
Method
The needle is inserted r-rnly into the skin and then is quickly
withdrawn like the pulling of a piece of body hair (Fig.3 *26).
[ilf,feE I
K 3 -26 +Ai
i6 HTi6fir(+ H * . f,-t*V.Wffi ,e+5 nfr IEA Je ffi Wffi
Fie. 3 -26 Semi-needling U&.HWNffifi"
To treat wind and cold attack of the superficies, fever, dyspnea
and other diseases involving the lung as well as some skin diseases.
telE)
m it ffi H ffi f I fir.l 4.J Ls.i * ffi rfttr^
"
Note
'Ihis method is frequently used with cutaneous needle to treat
:. ::..i t.l,)
children in modern times.
.,-i. i'r'i
li I:
.i :
''. Il,' 1,
r, fiX
.... 1:-T Location ofdisease
t.
\ . ..'r'
2. *trr-t*l ArXB^Hft*4frffi.,F,* ,Mtn*Jry.,tt& "
w;
2. Leopard-spot needling This technique is characterized by
multiple points of bleeding which looks like leopard markings.
t'*.{f f,;* )
ts€-ff DJX{nn F,L" ilElltr*lj S mHtF|J* ( W 3 - 27 ) "
Method
To select one acupoint as the centre and to needle sparsely
K3-27 Z\&NJ
around for bloodletting ( Fig,3 - 27 ) .
Fie. 3-27 Leopard-spot needling
IUAf eH )
figi6rrE+*rH+"
To treat tumescent and pyretic pain.
te*)
E i, [' +-m.ft&, frft 4}* 5,L'r..fHff '
Note
Since the heart controls blood and vessels, this method works
(t4/4)
on tlre regulation of cardiar: qi.
3. r€frtj +{t*lrf.-15 t(tiEft,flJtw J:fra47+ffriJ,w*,

3. Joint needling This technique means to needle the tendons
arouncl the joints of the body.
ti*,lf tr;*l
&[+ fr\.t| & #. Xit Wft il't fl:|frft J:frfi * fri], W h ffi * T fr ,
V\fri.ffih HtEffi#Fi.J€iiFffm ,{&E( Kl 3 -28 ) '

Method
This method focuses on needling the tendons around the
joints. Since the tendons converge around the joints, the tendons
and muscles of the four limbs all end near the joints ( Fig. 3 -
28).
I rtfifttrH I
4iaffitritr "
To treat otrstructive disorder of the tendons. B 3 -28 Xfi|l
Fie. 3-28 Joint needling
te,*l
,r,rn&HZKH6F1fi-ffi."
Note
Cares should be taken not to impair the vessels and cause
bleeding.
4. A6*{ fif,t" ,+l*?frtjTEiln+f+4[,fl

'4+4, ^/_'t.+h',a."
4. Hegu needling This kind of needling refers to the needling of
the region with thick muscles. The Chinese Character"Cu"means
major muscular convergence.
t**,{€tr,*l
Bffi *IIJ rA E le.frlLfr t?#.+f+ FI )t Ts, Yjt+| tr, i]B E /* E I
,f&nFEffi#f,+*|j( K 3 -2e),
Method
To insert the needle deep into the regions with thick muscles,
then to withdraw the needle to the shallow region and push the need- Bs-2e 6eFlJ
Ie obliquely to both sides (Fig.3 -29). Fie. 3-29 Hegu needling
'ffi
ffi.ffi
(frtil l iil *u lx
I MFEH I
ffiTiftf#ifi"
To tretrt obstructive problems.
t*'rl
+'txfriJ T h F] Z tEl, ffl g fltL 6J, [&.ffi fii€. W <, |lfi ft -L € -
fl'EXIJrX.
Note
This technique is characterize<I by inserting the needle into the
muscles. Since muscles are controlled by the spleen, this method
can regulate splenic qi. Clinically this is a kind of heavy needling
technique.
5. fffl*l AxilEftHitH$,^fl'ffiiE ,fihF,.

5. Shu needling This technique means to insert the needle per-
pendicularly and to withdraw it straightly for the purpose of dredging
the external and the internal.
l#,tf t;*l
El3-30 ffi0ru iiE-ffHj&flHs+i.l^x!JE€€f 6!*ffi*{rx( Kl : *:o; "
Method
Fig. 3-30 Shu needline
This method means to insert the needle perpendicularly deep to
the bones and withdraw straightly ( Fig. 3 - 30 ) "
I NfiFEH)
*6€tr(AffiW#fiE) "
To. treat otrstructive pain of the bones ( including diseases loca-
ted in the deep regions).
IEtrI
fi T'F t€, &4*6A5',F<,fHD "
Note
Since kidney controls bones, this method can regulate renal qi.
t+ fr, a-
rf
ts .ffi
ffiffi
(r\tillitlfr{l/*
Hpqfr
SECTION 4
=fiilEftSf'*
TRIPLE NEFDLING AND
QI.DIRECTING TECHNIQUES
fifilli*.
1" Triple needling techniques The needle is manipulated in the
shallow, middle'and deep layers respectively in the intradermal,
subcutaneous and intramuscular regions.
lffi,ff fi'r*l _
,ifr\l*,, D)Btfi <, fi'rJ * fr. 5, ; E *tJ lfr , u) EFfr <. Zm ; F,6
fiil&rfr,D{TA€(Kl:-lr;u B3-31 =fitix
Method
Fig. 3 -31 Triple needling techniques
The needle is inserted to the shallow layer first to expel patho-
genic factors and promote blood circulation, then to the middle layer
to disperse yinqi and finally the deep layer for the purpose of de-
scending meridian qi ( Fig. 3 -31).
I UfiFEE I
ffiTt*Wtl.fl,{XffiE-..,
To remove pathogenic factors and to maintain the healthy qi.
2. +5'E +r*€--ff ft,t fii8 E frA,rE'EBlff*ilE "

2. Qi-directing technique This method is characterized by slow
insertion and slow withdrawal.
tffi,fGf,i*l
gfffi ai({n*f #H E ,ffifra .ry:F...+ffiffi+r*,ilF
.)AfA+€, T EEITlffi ,EW 5 trW, ffi
fffi h. FEE. iEEfH+, f+
ffT{+eBIrA, gfl,6Hfl ( Kl 3 -32).
Method
When inserted into certain depth, the needle is manipulated even-
ly, slowly and mildly with lifting, thmsting and rotating techniques to
obtain acu-esthesia. The strength, range and speed of lifting, thmsting
and rotation are the same. When acu-esthesia is reached, the needle is B 3 -32 +.X
retained for a while and then withdrar,rn ( Fig. 3 - 32) . Fig. 3 -32 Oi-directing technique
.ffi
ffitr
t ilfitreEI
Art7r'F-A hr'm ttr ffi , + ffi V)h fr 2i Ito i$ fr,,T ffi6 r& trt
&ffiffiitr"
This method does not have the effect of reducing and streng-
theningo it is irsed to treat adverse flow of qi and blood as well as
non-asthenic'and non-asthenic diseases.
.ffi
ffiffi
ffiusH iEnfff,
{i}-iAt}TtR 4 f'Hf-i[TFIATf,t*t f iF:f,nl- i f irj
ffi ii+l*ft M<$,1tA>>fril.trûtr,E+lrfr.ffi tu?*ffi Xfr ffi ++r*
+t').flJ *n- X H'l *['fn, *g\ - + I wJ XEX* +l *X ffi El ffi '
,ffi 9, -H. d, trr f1Jffi * + iun $J vr'H tF ffi iagHa tr ffi E ilI " )n rl,
ir tH V't E hffi LY,WWffi tuI fiit +l fr "
is a special needling technique for the fili-
Penetrated needling
form needles following the needling techniques discussed in Neiiing.
This way of needling requires horizontal or perpendicular needling
from one acupoint into another one, accomplishing the purpose of
needing two or more acupoints with one needle.
Penetrated needling is characterized by use of fewer needles,
the stimulation of more acupoints and alleviation of pain produced by
needling. The coordinated effect of several acupoints is helpful for
effective treatment. Several special penetrated needling techniques
are mentioned below.
1 . JEIf,TI AA,fNT*H!M*F,{UHfJ.JEffiTfrffiE "

1 . Vedex needling Vertex needling means to needle the top of the
head" That is why it is so named.

E* xintrui
t.E Shangxing ffiIfi Qianding
H* eaihui
IF,GT'*)
li-LEî4$t, iftEf;+fiildtr-+i( n 2 /*
" fJ'B ta*E
FK(K4-1)"
Method
The needle is inserted from Shangxing obliquely beneath the
skin into Baihui for 2 fen. The acu-esthesia is distending sensation
over the whole head (Fig. 4 - 1) .
IMfDEI Ba-r ffirnf,f

htr rFry+ . Hi,taqh^. HE tr H*4tLlb4l*,flh Fie. 4-1 Vertex needling
^.
.'ff,'..#$1#
Elttlfflti
&FEffiW *. *|J'g P * . nF,ry' &- frEiH + f . #J W. yi E'f-, tn E v)l

W*,rtrt*lb+F^fiiflffiX.
Anacupoint used in acupuncture anesthesia for extrauterne ges-
tation, subtotal gastorectomy, gastrostomy, neoplasty of gastric per-
foration, releasing of intestinal obstruction, cesarean section, opera-
tion of gallbladder and cholic canal, exploratory laparotomy, apen-
dectomy and repair of hernial sac"
2. iE,$tt A^{ntr H Ft,FffiJflw+*\fttfi fr Z "

2. lmpulsive needling Impulsive needling means to needle the
higher region.
El6 Muchuang
fiff Zhenging
i(-lK[iil roulinqi
frfl Chengling
tffi'fftr;EI
j,'* ttfiivlrt +l ,'# MNI ,fr.&rt.iittJ z h tLft, ftlS,Eg{FK.
,H(K4-2).
Method
The needle is inserted from Toulinqi to Chengling for 2 fen, lo-
cal acu-esthesia is distending and painful (Fig. -2).
I rlfif$H I
B4 *2 iFi+ff ++%.ft.. zJr-J Lffi F,E ffi #, BRffi .

Fic. 4-2 lmpulsive needling
It is used to treat cerebral hermorrhagic paralysis, cerebral em-
bolism, cerebritis, meningitis, multiple neuritis, sequelae of infan-
tile paralysis, and ocular disease.
3. iExtt trA^{nETt, fi*ll lvJi&xTtri Ez "

3. Tongtiatt needling This technique means to needle the part on
the top of the head.
tffi,ttf *l
lîsEXtrf,l, ir"'Efi|J, i$tr 4^ q 2 h * *, ftHff +*
rn.f-nwK4-3)"
Method
The needie is inserted beneath the skin from Shenting to Baihui
for 2 fen. The whole vertex is felt distending ( Fig. 4 - 3) .
Ba-s iFXFt
Fig. 4 -3 Tongtian needling tilfimeHI
"ffruf,$
fHTifiti,'S'd .*,ffi .*€ . AqFe€,ft ,WryEifi .4ry%ff..
tgffi , ffi IfiJ il' Sr - Afr ffi"tl$.ffiFl . n& 4, * ft 'f}.- M 4 ft .
. t6 ++ ffi , nfr
WrfL{4+:. Hff trffr .{ftmIf.. .fft{..ffiflJl .&W.,1'll *ffi. HHfr.

H-'ffi . &fu .Emffi . ilf+tfrt .k EKLk*Rfu "
It is cold, headache, verligo, meniere's disease
used to treat
neurasthesia, neurosis, hysteria, apoplexy, psychosis, cerebral
hemorrhage, cerebral embolism, cerebritis, multiple neuritis, facial
spasm, hypertension, hypotension. coma, collapse, syncope, heart
failure, disease of eyes, ears and nose, dermatosis, gynecological
disease, and reproductive disease,
4. iExtt$l#*il A^{UET**[, haEl rfrrlZF'rftiftffixt "

4. Tongrtianzhen Duifengci needling fhis techniques is used to
needle the head just like the blades of both swords facing each other.
A* BiJIfi
lp Xinhui Qiardirrg
tffi.{fr,*l Shanpxinu.
" \ I EA
,r,-L E X tr +i w p.wE H + x ; fi ,!,\ d& el ict+1 th p. fifru I
;>--5--_+-...1 ..BaihuiEIfi
'f Houding
il'*tr aX . ffi f,t fH Xf *l.l 5 H * ir, flB F"r # {$ . 8K, i[ t E ---
trA.-dElf,( Kl4 -4),
Method
One needle is inserted beneath the skin from Shangxing to
Baihui, another needle is inserted beneath the skin from Qiangiian
to Baihui. Two needles are inserted face totoIface into Baihui. The
acu-esthesia is spasmodic and distending, jut
just as that over Shang-
xing, Baihui and Qiangiian ( Fig. 4 * 4) .
K 4 -4 iHx#fi*a[
Fie. 4 - 4 Toncrtianzhen Duifengci
I ilftFtrH I
needling
tt6ffiEl'l**rffi"
It is mainly used to treat obstinate headache.
5. iExH**tJ 4Ê * jEXxFtJ Fltr-A7(nT'4F.&.

5. Tongtian-pointing-to-Hui needling This way of needling is so
named as the needles are inserted from Tongtian to Baihui.
IH,f€f ;*I
Es,4r-J-€fl ,5\fallfr]l:AtsffiBxi( f":trFt{flllF!tr
1. s
Ai(i*Htrfrtj ,it+t 0. s - 1.2 't ,D}4+<*1H.,ffi+l ts - 30 h
6+(K4-s).
".'#
&&ffi
,4 4
sftiffi
Method
The patient sits uprightly. 'l'he ar;upuncturist uses
5 cun fili- l
form needles, and the needles are inserted beneath the skin from
,k-/
\I-\
\rr\
iE)( Tongtian
Tongtian on both sides respectively to Baihui which is located postero-
interiorly to'Iongtian to a depth of 0.5 -1.2 cun, till the acu-esthesia
is obtained. Retain the needles for 15 - 30 nrinutes ( Fig. a -5 ) .
IrtfiFEH I
tift *,i+i tnT +'g
B4_5 jEXH=NTJ \ . W &. F ft , 4fr ffJ . FE: fig K tffi . i6 I$A .
Fte. 4- 5 Tongtian-pcinting-to-Fli needing

T*"
Clinical Applicatiorl
The method can be used to treat headache, vertigo, nasal prob-
lems, stiff neck, pain of the waist and legs, enuresis and uterine
prolapse.
6. iE]n#f+ At{-u,ET)EX{'|Z* ,fi\E "

6. Tongdingpang needling Tongdingpang needling means to
needle the region beside that for Tongtian needling.
F)t Chengguang
tf*,fftrr*)
ifttrf;+*lli1EXX, ftBEK.,-F ( K 4 - 6) "
^fi-t.$t+|,
Method
The needle is inserted from Wuchu to Tongtian. The acu-esthe-
sia is distending pain (Fig.a-6).
tilfiFEH I
iFI Efl+^Hlftffii("
B 4 6 iErn*fi An acupoint used in acupuncture anesthesia of thyroid operation.
Fig. 4-G Tongdingpang needling
7. tHtrl&zlt AÊFA# ABEflfri#ft E-'liltntr/-"
7. Brain-clearing needling This method is used to tranquilize the
mind to clear away heat and to stop fright.
Iffi,{f f,;*l
ArX * Efr lrEH+, ffi *E{41, €tr86 ffi#, 4.d ffiffi
trH7t4!,fiB**$EK.m( K 4-7) "
Method
This method is marked by penetrating needle from
"W. t:* ,tu':
.{i s*''
: . .::,., l.a- r:..:.:l:i:ii-:d-:=.:
... . r::,i ;::-l:::,lt:1E:-::,:'::"j:,1:ia
. :.ar :l:.. ::::::r:-r': i.:n :!r;rt ::t::lt-.:
Qianding into lJaihui, from Quchai into Wuchu, from l{anyan rn-
to Qubin, from Shuaigu into Jiaosun antl from 'fianchong into
Naokong. Each of the inserted needle penetrates beneath the skin
into another acupoint. The acu-esthesia is clistending and numb wuclru 7ith_-
Quchai ilI f: H'tIfr t)iandrng
(F'ig.a-7). i5* fiailrui
llauyan ffi[P- $f| Shuaigu
Xuanlu,Bt Xltl Tianchong
fi7lr Jiaosrrrr
I rtaffieH I Xuanli mj2l1 Naokong
*ifi g,$ *,ffi . -H *t! . flfi lffi ffi. . /ffi ,i+ fi . M ilb. ffi +A, i+ % (lLrbin ffi
i--?t
'fotrqrao
F.FJ
yil
Fgq "
It is mainly used to treat acute headache, high fever, cerebral
hemorrhage, psychosis, epilepsy, convulsion and neurasthenia.
B4-7 )E[e^
Fie. 4-7 Brain-clearine needling
8. Ffr x{#fril + lt))W&|Jo{#.fHx'j'l* ttri Ez "

L Shuaigu duifeng^Wl+4.dft
needling This technique is per{ormed like
the blade of double swords facing each other at Shuaigu.
tf*,{f trx)
,l.itFHx# +l t-ffiB'd7( ; F r,'FtilUXi,E fr -+tlll-EE
4/d,+t ffifIlj**Fffi .FK( Kl 4 - 8 ) "
Method tFH raiyang
One needle is inserted from Taiyang to Shuaigu. Another need- *A Shuaigu
le is inserted from Fengchi to Shuaigu. The acu-esthesia is spas-
modic and distending over the side of the head ( Fig.4 - 8) . fitfr!, Fengchi
trtfiFEH I
+i6trE,H,fH * ffi ,lntnl&m o
Clinical Application B4-8 BeX$efilj

It is mainly used to treat obstinate headache and stiff pain of Fie. 4-B Shuaigu duifeng needling
the neck.
e. #tff*FEx'i*{ 4*wffilt.apHffixxf fiJfrilzffi4F,4 "

9. Zanzhu taiyang opposite needling This way of needling is so
named as Zanzhu and Taiyang are selected and needled towards each
other.
tH,ff trr*l
E{ 1. s t€fi,
lil^ffirT!ft E r"r E Ttrt pH X**|J, )t +t
| - t.2af , Frya FH XifrH f"r Bfrt'' fr\WfIi\+frtJ, sfi 1 -
1"2 f ,++ffi&DIMEKhE,W+t 30 h++( Kl 4 - e) "
l':r
irr
Elrtlttl^
Method
1.5 cun filiform needles are selected. Fint, insert the needle ho-
rizontally benea*r the skin from Zanihu towards posterio-inferior Taiyang
---\&FF 1-aryang to a depth of I * 1.2 cun. 'lhen, irsert another needle horizmtally be-
8 neath the skin fmm Tuiy-,S towurls anterior-superior 7-arhu to a de.pth of

| - L2 cun. Stop manipulation till the acu-esthesia of soreness and dis-
tention is obtained. Retain the needles for 30 minutes (Fig.4-9).
I rtfiffiEH )
+i6ft** rfr ,tYtuEtx"
B 4 -e ffifSXFEr$n|J Clinical Application
Fig. 4*9 Zenzhu tdymc opposite need- The method is used to treat headache in febrile diseases. It can
ling
also help remove fishtail lines.
10. Ear-clearing needling This method can clear away heat in

the ear.
lt*.{f tr;*l
-f't rt4ll fr.+l ,friJEtllth+; fi -$l )y\Tiefffi, filJ 9l FlT H
(Kl4-10)"
Method
is inserled from Ermen to Tinghui. Another needle
One needle
is inserted from Xiaguan to Tinggong ( Fig.4 - l0).
I MREH)
$fl
fiH
Ennen
rnggong
th4€,4r9,4fr,F4,
ffi$ ringhui Clinical Application
f* xraguan It is mainly used to treat deafness, tinnitus ear carbuncle and
otorrhea.
K4*10 FETA 11 . - fr,++ a^{nEH rLtrtrry.+t ,ID)* )twE "

Fie. 4 -10 Ear-clearing needling 11 . Erlong needling Both sides on the top of the head are nee-
dled like two dragons flying.
tffi,r€f r*l
(K4-11)"
Method
The needle is inserted beneath the skin from Quchai to Tong-
"ffiruffi
tian for 2 ten. Thr: acu-esthesia is rlistending pain ( F;g.4 * 1l ).
lueffifiH)
+ ift ffi ,tl . 44 t€'tr 8rr . tg fmi . tfr i+ fii . H ft . &fr ft. . * iF'Y* itq
4.ft."
It is mainly used to treat epilepsy, neurastheniao hysteria, psy-
chosis, rhinitis, nasal parasinusitis, and multiple neuritis.
1 " fr# fr H
2 fitl,|
r* 4x H nfr !,4.tr'J fri tr W f(, xt }i Fr tt *il *tr
tfr|+F'' "
12. Quchai opposite needling This way of needling is so named
/-..i >"^
as Quchai on the Bladder meridian of both sides are selected, and e)t@
they're needled towards each other.
6-)
I**.ff tr'tl
R 1. 5 rl€ft, fr H -{flll ffi #-i\tbJfr -frtl ffi *X]A EfriJ7--,
+f | *2.f ,W++ ls - 30 /nW(W 4
*12) .
Et4 -11 -tu++
Method Fie. 4 * 11 Erlong needling
1. 5 cun filiform needles are selected. Insert one needle from
Quchai on one side towards Quchai on the opposite side beneath the
skin; then insert another needle from Quchai on the opposite side to-
wards Quchai on this side beneath the skin, till the acu-esthesia is
obtained in each acupoint. The depth is 1 - 2 cun, and retain the '-_ \
"ha dd!e*.
needles for 15 -30 minutes (Fig. 4 -12). 9rt€
[ ilfitreH I
+ia*,R" . F tre E . HffiZ^BE .tr*FfiA, rElrtrF'ffi.
Clinical Application 'ffi
This method can be used to treat headache, blurred vision, eye

pain, decreased vision, nasal obstruction, nasal bleeding and sore g4-12 ffi=riHnlJ
throat, etc. Fie. 4-12 Ouchai opposite needling
13. iEtr E HH*il 4*R106. E HffiXfHExt-friJffii&2.

13. Yingxiang sibai opposite needling This way of needling is so
nanred as Yangxi and Sibai are selected and needled towards each other.
tffi,{f f r*)
E&, ry 1. s rf €ft, fr,îry&i(, +l'+f"r E E fi ti- lE i#
Gffiffi
;
::l
fi.ffi*[ it +l t t k,{; , t\ #Ltft'r#w.ll?'h )8 , F' Jfi plt fr

f l- 4t fq ii ,
{l&)rfiWHtr*tJ ,itfl0.8 - 1.2 =f ,v]1#Ll)tlE,f4+f 20 -

30 tlW( Kl4 - 13). ;
Method
'Ihe patient STIS
sits uprightly. 'fhe arcupuncturist uses 1.5 filiform
needles. First, The
The needle is inserled into Yingxiang beneath the
skin, with the tip pointing to Sibai, and the depth is around I r:un,
till the soreness and distention feeling in the nose and eye areas is
f*lr, ...->
F,,? 'iG--tl
obtained. Then, another needle is inserled into Sibai beneath the
skin using penetrated needling skill, with the tip pointing to Yingx-
X H,,' iang, and the depth is 0.8 - 1.2 cun, till the acu-esthesia is ob-
tained- Retain the needles for20 -30 minutes (Fig.4-13).
I UftFEH )
B4-13 in6aErifilJ +iafiE€AE -4,,Fil . i8Ftifi iH +,ft "

fie. 4 13 Vnexidrg sibai opposite need-
line
The method is used to treat biliary ascariasis, constipation and
epiphora induced by wind, etc.
14. xr ts
+ *|J arf4xnfitlftwxxt t'"t7K'hi(NJz,frt& .
14. Double he-to-zhong needling This way of needling is so
named as bilateral Heliao are selected and inserted to Shuigou.
tt*,ff Fr*l
iEery I t€ft, E 4s" ffi h *WiGXpl zK i6 X*tli--, #+t
0.3 -0.5 t', XffiEK)HBhE ,W+l ts -3a E:l4 - 14),
Method ^W(
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist uses I cun fili-
,/'r\ form needles. The needle is inserted into Heliao in an angle of 45"
,-\ r.js\
gr14> to Shuigou, and the depth is 0.3 -0.5 cun, till the acu-esthesia of
sore, distending and painful feeling is obtained. Retain the need-
Ies for 15-30 minutes ( Fig.4 -14).
I rl6F&,H I
*Yff Fffi E *I,,H JXI6'8,, Fffi ETIE .
B4-14 n^ri+aj
The method is used for first aid in syncope and to treat infantile
Fie. 4-14 Double he-to-zhong need-
ling convulsion, back rigidity, nasal problems and facial paralysis.
15. !U€*4+E*tJ ,f }*B}edi(.ffi+x, ffiitfEqEfiljrr

1+r,.
15. lnter-needling between Dicang and Jiache This way of
needling is so named as Dichang and Jiache are penetrated to eac:h
other.
lt*tFfit*l
trMfiF.y.lb6,m 3 tP;{;l ,f"JffiFlt f4rE*|J ,)t+12 -2.s
t,Fryffi+-X,H2-ta{;iFlle,6'Frtr*|J ,itt;I 1-s -2 t,
&.u4&<hE ,w+t 1s - 30 +w ( Kl 4 - ls )
"
Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist locates Dicang
first, and use a 3 cun filiform needle to penetrate to Jiache, the
depth is 2-2.5 cun. Then Jiache is located and inserted with a
2 cun filiform needle to the direction of Dicang, the depth
is 1.5 -2 cun. Stop manipulation till the acu-esthesia is ob- E a 15 fl!€*n+Eru
tained in both points. Retain the needles for 15 - 30 minutes Fie. 4-15 lnter-needling between Di-
(Fig.4-ls). cang and Jiache
t MFEHI
tififfiffi tr Pft, irilil[fi,H.
The method is used to treat facial paralysis, deviation of the
mouth, salivation and toothache.
16. *iUH*F*tl r$**Rtiry.j&6fl Ft ff +frilffn'i+E "

16. Da di to jia needling This way of needling is so named as Da-
ying and Jiache are located and inserled to Jiache.
u*,ff t r* I
Xil,trft 1 - 1. 2 -l,Fql/titlfi, ffl l. s'i€ft fl trSF n
(K4-16)"
Method
The patient sits uprightly or lies on his back. The acupuncturist
E4-16 xfllHMru
locates Dicang first, and use a 3 cun filiform needle to penetrate to
Fie. 4 16 Da di to jia needline
Jiache, the depth is 1- 1.2 clr;nir. Then Daying is penetrated to Jia-
che with a 1.5 cun filiform needle, the depth is I - 1.2 cun. Stop
manipulation till the acu-esthesia is obtained in each acupoint. Re-
tain the needle for 15 - 30 minutes ( Fig. 4 - 16) .
l._
tinlrti#l^
I mtrtrH I
*lfrmmhErfi, thtlg,,
'Ihe methotl is used to treat facial paralysis, deviation of the
mouth and toothache.
IEEI
+.tx4 +nff 1fi,6 ffi !+tr-fifrl ft -- A *, EXh tu6 ffi ffi #t*
ffllttdE"
Note
This method r:an be regarded as a variation of Inter-needling
between Dicang and Jiache, and a more stinrnlative method than Di-
cang penetrating to Jiache.
17. )\+++ +*/rtrffiHl,MFJ" /\" +fri4F,&

"
ffiF Flanyan 17. Bazt needling Both sides of the head are needled. 'lhe two
*Fji Xuanlu
needles form a Chinese character "eight", which is similar to an in-
*18 xuanti
verted "V"in English.
frE Quo;n
t*,ff*-,*l
,,,€ntE x ffi t fr )t +t,'# E NJ€ ffi trt, flHffi g{m, BK
(w4-17)"
Method
The needle is inserted beneath the skin from the upper of Han-
yan to Qubin. T-he acu-esthesia is numb and distending over the
temple (Fig.4 -17).
/,^\
,r'//^\\\\\.
e\ fe I ilfiFEH )
€
EILjG& -e! 4 M € ft , * H'l*r* 4^. "
It is mainly used to treat headache, migraineo vertigo, neuras-
thenia, facial paralysis, toothache, facial spasm, Meniere's disease
84-17 /\+fi and multiple neuritis.
Fie. 4-17 Bazi needling
18. T-shaped needling of Ermen and Xiaguan The two needles

inserted form a structure of 'f.
Im'ff f )r*)
-ftr,.4ll )t+l ,/n'H r"t Tff*rj pf e ir f-uJi *x ;51-El )j,
TJei\i$ft ffiffi.-.F,P8"s7t. ftte\tr*lslJK .ffi( Kl 4 - l8 )
" Hl J Enren
Method lfr€'ringgong
One needle is insertecl beneath the skin from Ermen to tjJ-r* Tingnui
Tinggong and Tinghui. Another leedle is inserted transversely from TX xiaguan
Xiaguan to Tinggong. The acu-esthesia is distending and numb in

local area (Fig.a-18).
B4-18 EInTXT+frrj
I rtCF&HI Fie. 4 - 18 T-shaped needlins of Er-
ffiTlhftHqf.4r9.4H, men and Xia8uan
lt is used to treat deafness, and muteness.
1s. EA++il 4;ttSfhrAH'-*E++:|ftfii&2"

19. Crossed needling of Baihui The needles inserted to Baihui
appear like a cross.
u*.{f f ;r}
AHfr mx i& +twH * i(; E Hld cE I'Bt is fl i*E F|J 1E r$ tr
lx trtr- a i( ; Fi,fFll,f,. E H 7\ lft E *il E E H a^ X ft t*,tr *Fm . EK
"
(Kl4-le), B'rilfr Qianding
Method
.rE$ Zhengying
The four needles are inserted frorn Qianding to Baihui,
H4 eaihui
Zhengving.rE€
Qiangjian to Baihui and bilateral Zhengying to Baihui respectively. \
EIfr Houding
The acu-esthesia is nuurb and distending in local area ( Fig. 4 -19) . f,
ffilel Qianglidn
I r|fiFeFI \..,,,
ffiTi6f * ffi ,4*%*.qg.m'iHfrfix,m"
Clinical Application -t''!
To trerat heaclache, neuraslhenia, epilepsy, anal prolapse. K4-1e trA++fiU
Fie. 4 *19 Crossed needling of Baihui
20. ,€Ff,/t ,fÊl iEXf FAH ,frk&
"
20. Technique for improving eyesight This way of needling can
clear away heat in the liver and improve the eyesight.
tffi.{f f r*)
A€Hi(#ff , lfltrTtrFil5H + 6-X, fiB${{r4 HA.
ffi , f"r i{€ +ET4.i$4F6dT flR*F ( El 4 - 20 ) ,
Method
fi4
ffi I I t
f4 lrarzhonsslrrr
'fhe needle is inseried beneath the skin from Gaohuang througlr
to Jianzhongshu. J'he acu-esthesia is like antcreep or painful and
nunrb. This sensation is lransmitted upwartl from the region around
the ear to the eyes (lrig.4 __20).
t il6ffie8I
ry
B 4 -20 EEix 21
fHf i6)?HRfr.
To treat eye diseases.
. WftEFAfrTJ ArxBfiqxaitHfil VqltxTfr'4+& "

F,e" 4*D Tecl-rnique for inproving eyesieht
21 . Sihua zhiyang needling This way of needling is so named as
Zhiyang and Sihua ariselected.
lffirFfitt)
'fffFpfn,frHfrlinffi-ft'0- 3 - 0. s -l ,4+<tr:W+tlft E Fr EEft
4 -21) "
Method
The patient lies on his stomach. Geshu is inserted perpendicu-
larly to a depth of 0. 3 * 0. 5 cun. After the acu-esthesia is ob-
tained, the needle is penetrated to Danshu beneath the skin, and

the feeling should radiate to nearby areas. Retain the needles for 2A
minutes (Fig.4 -2t) .
6pE Zhiyerlg
-! ^
I UEFEH )
8ffi€'r Ceshu
\-z -li6uluiE
I I
I
"
da Danshu The method is used to treat hiccup.

I
r
I
I
(
\ IEE)
*
vglL" h*ffia.i(, H flEft5lEfttgAffifi,4fiin ro/i
\
ffiiEz.
Note
Ba-zt tr]?USpEFIJ
Fie. 4-21 Sihua zhiYanc needling Sihua is a composed acupoint. It consists of Geshu and Danshu
which forms four flowers. That's why it's so named.
22. (48l;+ 4^ft^Fr€E*Fmfl'7_,fit & "

22. Xiangwei needling The point of the needle is inserted to the
direction of the tail.
Elrtlillfr
It*tFfi;*l
ffi - Fl"tl't*' ifi l.{ ji'k ital t tE . lt6 i6, 9 ti . }$ ffi . 4, f t . tlf,l i't
FfitE frX(Wl4 - 22)
"
Ht,:frF+l l* ,rIt'l*)Wfl,tfrfffr ..{,M.6'.l, ,BMXFfi4E n}."
ffi a,FI,Ef *'
*t € ll,i it'v.dit I J . IJFI XXttr 41h'l. "
)tr+r ffi w'f.t},11:41ry.NT*il 6 t,
ft B tr *l5ffi , EK, A Ht'
iA#ftiT ikffi,.
Method
First method: Including Dazhui, Taodao, Shenzhu, Shendao,
Lingtai and Zhtyang ( Fig. 4 -22) .
The second method: Including Jinsuo, Zhongshu, Jizhong and
Xuanshu.
The third method: Including Mingmen and Yangguan.
The needle is inserted subcutaneously on the middle line of the
spinal column into the concerned acupoints 6 cun. The acu-esthesia
is numb and distending in local area and sometimes transmits up and
down along spinal column.
g 4 -22 i6Efl
Fie. 4-22 Xiangwei needling
IrnFeH )
+ififfiriE.Hffi .flfr m.ffi fr.
i+ ffi . t+ {4.F_W,mF+. l} €,*
'14 fr X+,i+ t4'Y+ E n ., L''16 - t' € 4, ffi ,9, H H )F, Fl lsl ?+ 4 )H ffl
flI . fig . ,{F . H ffi , U D-I'I Fs.rE fr.ffiffi , M.B 4+ 4ffi . T nimF .
It is used to treat epilepsy, hysteria, cerebral paralysis, psy-
chosis, neurasthenia, tumescence, carbuncle, ulceration, multiple
abscess, neurodermatitis, palpitation, bronchitis, dyspnea, pain
over the shoulder and back, intercostal neuralgia, disorders of the
liver, galibladder, spleen and stomach, diseases of urinary and re-
productive system, sciatica and paralysis of the lower limbs.
23. Htrxft^ arxE6t*tJH*{trw%t'Bt roXffi 4+E "

23. Needling technique on the four points of the back This
*av of needling is so named as four points of the Du meridian on the
Lur k are needled.
tt*,{f i-r*)
,fF,ft{v, ry 7 -lK* +1, faH K9&i(Ee-ft ll i(,tR* ft ll
Et ts -3a /tl++" H+tffilaJri..|:4tLil+ffi( 4tr+ffi) , Dllrild&F|.l
.wffim
ffi( l4l 4 -23) "
Method
'Ihe patient lies on the stomach. The acupuncturist uses 7 cun
long elongated needles. "Ihe necdles are penetrated from Changqiang
to Mingmeng, then frnm Mingmen Io Thiyang, and then from Zhiy-
ang to Dazhui respectively. The depth is 5 *-6 cun, till the acu-es-
thesia is obtained. Retain the needles for l5 -'30 minutes. During
the retentir-rn, the needles may be lilied and thrust repeatedly in or-
der to enhance the stimulation (Fig. 4 -23) .
[ il'fiffeHI
* i6 zJ. J L ffifH ffi fril ft.16 i6 )ft . nfi A 66 +. . *'k'Y+.+q % ffi.
t)< LE
X.+l o
The method can be used to treat infantile paralysis, posten-
cephalitis, atelencephalia and rnuitiple radiculitis, etc.
B4-23 Hpqn#^ 24. frEffixt+*friJ Ai*ryfi8E$Ft}frIitffi tr Eit ,lD)xxWE AtJxt

Fie. 4 *23 Needling technique on the frfrdzffiin "
four points of the back 24. Opposite sword-blade needling on the chest This way of
needling is so named as Xuanji and Zhongting located on the chest
are selected and needled towards each other just like the sharp
blades of two swords facing each other.
tffi,ff f,;*)
,ftp
t H,+1, H fifruLrifr,ff , H T i& EfriJ E, + E
FF{n, ffi 2 gE
}-rfilfiUA,it+t |.z - I. 5 t, U4+A.htr,FHEf*IE H +E

Frt ?AE rAfifrgLfr |,tfril E i T m ff x'J'l* *t, W +f 20 - 30
,
h++(w 4 -24) "

^
Method
The patient lies on his back. The acupuncturist selects 2 cun
filiform needles. The needle is inserted downwards beneath the skin
from Xuanji to Zhongting to a depth of 1.2 - I. 5 cun, till the acu-
esthesia is obtained. Then Zhonging is needled upwards beneath
the skin towards Xuanji with the same method. The two needles lcok
like the sharp blades of trvo swords facing each other. Retain the
needles tor 2A - 30 minutes ( Fig. 4 -24) .
g4-24 IEEX$Bfirj
Fie. 4*24 Opposite sword-blade need t rtfiFEH I
ling on the chest +hfi68R,ffi ,,l',EF,l[,[+ "
ffiffiffi
'l'hr: metho<l is used to treat chest pain and palpitation.
25. H= * frtJ,Sr* H 4{firt. H . lE fft =,t'i(tn* Nl, D}lhWJ .

H . JF " -'i -[ " *{.fn n', ,4 fi fit|+ h ,
25. Three-barrier needling for the stomach l'his way of neerl-
ling is so named as three acupoints located on the chest, gastric nnd
abdorninal regions are selected to treat diseases of three barriers of
the chest, stomach and abdomen.
t'*,{f tr;* )
4^ffi7t ,&-rr4+<'hE( K 4 -2s) "

Method
8 cun elongated needles are selected. The needle is inserted B4 -25 E =Xfilj
from Jiuwei to Shenque beneath the skin, then another needle is in- Fie. 4-25 Three-barrier needling for
serted frorn Burong to Tianshu beneath the skin, till the acu-esthesia the stomach
is obtained ( Fig. 4 - 25> .
I ilfiFEH I
,Ei?#ffi<. H ffi tffi . ffi E,E8mllv#.+<)g.Zitr "
The method is used to treat sensation of gas rushing, gastric
pain, diarrhea, chest pain, hiccup and other diseases induced by qi
reversion.
26. tffi+sldfg^ 6yt4xt'ffi +*,i(u'tfr,BTffii1+& "

26. Weight controltechnique by the midline of the upper abdo-
men This way of needling is so named as acupoints located on the
midline of the upper abdomen are selected to control weight.
tt*.{f tri*l
,ftpFl.&,8r7 rlffl, H EffiÊ ls'-30"frr"r?+w^FH
ffi,ffS!F>Flr-B/n++lx4EUtE ,j$*fi|J# t0 -20 ,rffi
2oo ,
€HFIffiFi6f 1K(Kl 4-26)"

Method
The patient lies on his back. The acupuncturist selects a 7 cun
elongated needle, which is inserted into Juque at an angle of 15o-
30" to the direction of Shenque, the depth is 5 -6 cun till the acu-
ruffiffi
esthesia is obtained. 'fhen electro-acupunctule is applied with high
frequency-low electric stimulation, and it's advisable to keep the fre-
quency at200 times every minute. The stimulation lasts fol r:onsecu-
tive l0 -20 minutes. Treat once every or eve{,other elay (}'ig. -
26).
[ [6ffi&H I
Eifr flsB+,ft ( xwt€.[F.# ) "
This method is used to treat obesity ( with potbelly) .
at*za ,ttrtr&ffiBtst
Fie. 4-26 Weight controltechnique by 27. Tw.+*id[E^ Ar*4xTffi +&i(D]W,n1ffii4+&
"
the midline of the upper ab?omen 27. Weight control technique by the midline of the lower abdo-
men This way of needling is so named as acupoints located on the
midline of the lower abdomen are selected to control weight.
IF*IEfi]EI
tEft, HfffTB,lffit^,S ls" -30'frEm
.f4rHF{n,ffi6
Ertlfrfr*tj,#f,|4 -5 t, uTffiFKffiWF.hE " mF,l*tH
+lly,utr*++ 200 wtu\fifr{frJwZ )E& 10 -2a hffi ,€ B EI
ffiEi6r?1n(K 4-27)"
Method
The patient lies on his back. The penetrating needling is ap-
plied with a 6 cun elongated needle from Yinjia located inferior to
the umbilicus to Qugu at an angle of 15o-30o, the depth is 4 -5
cun till the acu-esthesia of distending, fullness, sorenss or heavi-
ness in the lower abdomen is abdomen is obtained. Then electro-ac-
upuncture stimulation is applied at a frequency of 200 times per mi-
nute for consecutive 10 - 20 minutes. Treat once every or every
other day( Fig.4 -27 ) .
[ ilfiFeH )
+ififfiFfft,&, trJiftlU'E +ld ffiW,
The method is mainly used to treat obesity. It can also be ap-
s4*27 TFtr&ffiBts^ plied for urogenital diseases.
Fic,, 4-27 Weight controltechnique by
the midline of the lower abdomen
28. .t.Etf+rfiF*tj A*ffi*f1-fir]T-LffiS{.fIffi(H! E m, '5
4*lv4lt .E 24914trX. BW+r trEE#F+fi Z\Nffii&z"
28. Five-row needling with elongated needle on the upper
4. ,,t*.!,*,
i'h
W lffihW'
abdomen This way of needling is so nanred as acupoints lorra-
ted on the upper abdomen including Juque of the Ilen meridian,
Youmen of the Kidney meridian and Burong oq the Stomach me-
ridian are selected, and there're five parallel needlecl lines during
the retention.
tffi,ff f i*)
,ffi7 tf'Ef, H EmÊ fi" -30"ffif'l++ffiit-tFl
,ftpFh,fn
E4{, tthl s -6 t ,UtW-WHfrKffiWAhF,tsffil":J#trfi'

H M lt X trAErFE fr it ; 4'EXj6-exffi X, m tr T +t EM +*
iH,ft,fLffi)jfr4&ht* zrn rr.,E trNJW7_-, E4 l0 - 20
++
"&F 4ffi B i6f 1 ri( K 4 -28) "
^
Method
The patient lies on his back. The acupuncturisiselects 7 cun
elongated needles. One needle is inserted into Juque at an angle of
15'-30o to the direction of Shenque, the depth is 5 -6 cun till the
acu-esthesia of distending, fullness and soreness in the upper abdo-
men is obtained. Then the same method is applied for the penetra-
tion from Youmen to Huangshu which is located lateral to the umbili-
cus, and Buron to Tianshu. Electro-acupuncture stimulation is ap-
plied to at a frequency around 200 times every minute for consecu-
tive 10 - 20 minutes. Treat once every or every other day ( Fig. a -
28).
"7\
17'
t ilfiFEH I
fiEF+fr( TtrEBfl+qE fr.E) .
Obesity (obvious upper abdominal obesity) .
EM / H'f'l Huangshu
lelEI tuque
+i=fiFfril,&,i6lEi+ffi ( K 4 - 28 ). B4-28 _tFEfl=.fifiFfi|J

Note Fie. 4*28 Triple-row five-row need-
If needling penetration elongated needle is only applied ling with elongated needle on the up-
per abdomen
from Juque to Shenque and Youmen to Huangshu on the upper abdo-
rnen, the method is named Three-Row Needling with Elongated
needle on the Upper Abdomen, and the indication is obesity too
(Fig.4 28).
2e. Ttrtft= tlF *rl El ffi Efifil,l TT ffi *F'ff f i(.'g 4i(, ffi +t
Elrt
,6e.-*flFY-4rZ\ftlrn&& "
29. Triple-row needling with elongated needle on the lower ab-
domen 'I'his way.of needling is so nanred as elongated needles are
used to insert acupoints located on the Ren meridian and Kidney
meridians, and there're three rows of needles during the retention.
/qffi oaheng tffi.tftr;il

Xffi'Iianshu
S'fr; Huangshu
,ftF
t'tfi , E NWi:TLT qk? ts" - 30" ffit"1 ffi ,F
Hh{n, A7
ffiG Fushe
i WfriJ, )t +t 5 - 6 t, U,). EKffi m E t E, s ffi # r *,
ti1 W. lEl
H H' fr tr e ffi €1, * E & -b € ly, ffi H rnl*,€
+1' *tJ # Z,, fin 4.'h
Qichong
ff
frfl
Henggu
Qugu
E*ffi 2ao tREfriH, jary.friJK r0 -20 +lw ,€ E Exffi H i6
ft t tR(W 4 -2e) "
Method
E 4 _29 TFEf,I=.8.TfiFf;[ The patient lies on his back. The acupuncturist selects 7 cun
Fie. 4 - N Triple -row or five-row or
elongated needles. One needle is inserted from below Shenque at an
seven-row needling with elongated need-
angle of 15"-30o to the direction of Q,rgr, the depth is5 -6cun till
le on the lower abdomen
the acu-esthesia of distending, fullness, soreness and heaviness is
obtainedin the lower abdomen. Then the same method is applied to
Huangshu to Henggu. Electro-acupucnture is applied with high fre-
quency-low electric stimulation. It's advisable to keep the frequency
at 2A0 times every minute. The stimulation lasts for consecutive 10 -
20 minutes. Treat once every or every other day (Fig. 4 -29) .
IIMFEH I
+Y6 fi Bflf. ft , &# U W<ErERffi iE "
The method is mainly used to treat otresity. It can also be ap-
plied for urogenital diseases.
30. TEETTfiflF*il EH*fT*|JTTffi*FffF}.'E%,H%

30. Five-row needling with elongated needle on the lower
abdomen This way of needling is so named as elongated needles
are used to insert acupoints located on the Ren meridian, Kidney
meridians and Stomach meridians, and there're five rows of needles
during the retention.
tt*{ftr}E)
,fryFF{n, R7 rl*fi, H 30'fi ft ffi €
l+|fr tTLT%tr 15' -
}.fotrfiil Jt+t s -6 t,u,;WffiEKFfAffi€H#h4+,F+HlEl
frt + r*
reffiffi
El7,a'{v
Wfr l*, H H ft e,ffi 'H' ft fril Z, x ffi -$ t't+bfrl Z, f* ffi +* J: tE
+1'4y ,U'etlt+ 200 tk!'J)ffi:+\frilH. ,)&r& 10 - 20 hW ,1+ FJ lI ffi
Hlfttr I li( l4l 4 -2e) "
Method
The patient lies on his back. T'he acupuncturist selects 7 curr
elongated needles. One needle is inserted from below Shenque at an
angle of 15o*30" to the direction of Qugr, the depth is 5 -6 cun, and
it's better to obtain the acu-esthesia of distending, fullness, soreness,
heaviness and electric shock feeling from time to time in the lower ab-
domen. Then the same method is applied to Huangshu to Henggu as
well as Tianshu to Qichong. Then electro-acupucnture stimulation is
applied at the frequency of ?-ffi times every minute for consecutive
l0 - 20 minutes. Treat once every or every other day ( Fig. 4 29) .
([eFpml
+ i6Ets Hffi ,,&6tilR+FE"RmiE "
The method is mainly used to treat obesity. It can also be ap-
plied for urogenital diseases.
tEEI
isffiEft+F hwn:xffi^trEFf#t ,frt ]'fiFf;|J, nljFIT
wt +t't#F*ll, &,i6T w{iElg.*lqgfl+ffi ( w 4 - 2e ) "
Note
If another elongated needle is inserted from Daheng of the
Spleen meridian to Fushe, plus previous five-row needles, seven-
row needling with elongated needle on the lower abdomen is com-
posed. It can also be used to treat obesity with lower abdominal pot-
belly ( Fis.4 *29\.
31. BHidflEf+HrA*'J 4**EW.W4W.4 {nxf }f"rfilIZm

1+& "
31. Opposite needling on the spleen meridian for weight control
This way of needling is so named as acupoints on the abdominal
part of the Spleen meridian are selected and needled oppositely.
Iffi{f f ;*l
,ft[Fh{n,ry 3 t€+t ,iifrW]r-i<e ls" -3o"RFltfHf E
0. 8 - 1. 2 l', & U4,+F1bE, & trI T m ff 4b &ie € /fi , * I)) fu h
.,.
fff'fu
t420o tKflt'$fr?xfri.wz,*tj# l0 - 20 ,l+'l ,4@ t] ettffi tJ lh'ff |
IA(KI4*30),
Method
'Ihe patient lies on his back. 'lhe acrupuncturist selects 3 cun
filiform needles. First, Fu'ai is needled at an angle of l5'- 30o to
the direction of l)aheng to a depth o{2-2.5 cun; then Fujie is in-
serted with the same method to the clirection of Daheng to a depth of
rh./. 0.8 - I .2
cun, till the acu-esthesia is obtained respectively. Elec-
tro-acupuncture stimulation can be applied to the needles at a fre-
quency of 200 times per minute for l0-20 minutes. Treat once ev-
ery or every other day( t'ig. 4 - 30 )
n
.
tilft*EE I
+iAEgB+)ft ,W*{flAnh4# "
B4-30 !4)fiBgflljHfi|J The method is mainly used to treat obesity with overmuch fatty
Fig. 4 - 30 Opposite needling on the tissue beneath the abdominal skin.
spleen meridian for weight control
32. ffi*tstEidEE^ Ar* tr Effi gFtX +lfriJ,DJ *FlJdxts H!
E#tfri& "
32. Weight control technique by intersected needling on the
abdomen This way of needling is so named as needles are insert-
ed intersectedly to exert its effects of controlling weight.
tH.ff f,r*)
t
Fl"fn, 4r 1 0 E +1-, H wF E t s " - 3a' ffi r4 xf fi |J fu1 ffitx'-
,ftp
i(w p.ftfril )t+t e t', F4rE lNtJzi(E rafiuz, 4- u4+<h E,

&4Tmfi&!+*iB€lfi ,+U-E//lffi 200 t\tutr*fi+fil.l# 10 -2a
hW,€ B EIffi F i6f I n( K 4 -37) "
Method
ffiS Fu'ai
The patient lies on his back. The doctor selects 10 cun elonga-
tffioaheng
ted needles. One needle is inserted in Fu'ai at an angle of 15"-30o
ffS Fulie
to its opposite Fujie beneath the skin to a depth of 9 cun. Then the
points on the opposite side are inserted with the same method, till
the acu-esthesia is obtained. Electro-acupuncture stimulation can be
applied to the two needles at a frequency of 200 times per minute for
l0 -2O minutes. Treat once every or every other day ( Fig.4 31) -
tr4-31 trffiAx)fiEg^
Fie. 4-31 Weight controltechnique bv
IrttFtrH )
intersected needling on the abdomen
+i6Egfl+E ,AWIF{IFE "
'l'he methocl is mainly usetl to treat obesity and potbelly.
33. Hffi +f, )fr88,^ 4r&H ryffi Itr .riMmi\ frUzDl/fi,ngw&,,

33. Weight control technique by dai qi shu 'l'his way of need-
ling is so named as Daimai and Wushu are used to control the body
weight.
ti*.{f f,r*)
,frtr
HF{n, ffi 7 -t'f: +t, H ffi ft't i( g 30" ffif;+ Fr 5. ffi X h.ffi +
iE€, v'gh+4 200 th.w)ffi#friJ}ffi.z,)E&fr\w to -2a hffi ,'&

F Eiffi H i6f 1 7i( Kl 4 *32)
"
Method
The patient lies on his back. The acupunctur-ist uses a 7 cun
elongated needle, which is inserled obliquely at an angle of 30'
from Daimai towards Wushu and the center of the umbilicus, and
the depth is 5 - 6 cun, till the acu-esthesai of soreness and disten-
ding is obtained in the lateral abdomen. Then electro-acupuncture
stimuladon at a frequency of 20O times per minute can be applied to
the needle for consecutive 10 - 20 minutes. Treat once every or ev-
ery otlrer day (Fig. 4 -32) .
B 4 -32 HffiffiHNtsA
Fie. 4-32 Weight control technique
by dai qi shu
[ilfiFtrH )
+ i6 fl s E+ E Zffri]ffig,$flE t #"
This method is mainly used to treat lateral abdominal obesity
seen in overweighted patients.
34. trgE ffi r&fff+*il Artry+r'Hwfvtu^H&eq ffi}lumi(,

IrIwW Atl *xt r"t m *!J iI € "
34. Opposite sword-blade needling between Jianyu and Quchi
This way of needling is so named as two points of Jianyu and Qu-
chi on the Large Intestine Meridian of Hand Yangming are selected,
and needled towards each other just like the sharp blades of two
swords facing each other.
ti*,ff n-;t)
'f+H lF 4'fn, ry 6 -if ff , fr H EfrBftA f"r ffi *gt Eif = Fl
ffiEILW*IfrlJA, ffft 4 - 5 ]1. trE( ffi }tU, +t +f"t t' f"r E BBxt
.f
ltff'$
a
.:
Fl , * +1 W M N, +r. & U +ry"+ W;

)t +t 4 - s C, ?H El' nt )V n\W
$KS-JtXhE"
'i|J W$f so tl++,ffi+fHt &nl"Ifirg*lJffi}I
(Kl4*33),
Method
The patient stretches hjs arm and sits uprightly. The acupunc-
turist selects 6 cun elongated needles. The first needle is inserted
from Jianyu teiwards Quchi through the belly of deltoid rnuscle lo a
depth of 4-5 cun. Then another needle is inserted from Quchi to-
wards the direction of Jianyu with the needle tip pointing upwarcls,
and the depth is 4 - 5 cun. During the retention, two needle tips
points to each other, and the acu-esthesia of soreness, distending,
heaviness and numbness in the arm should be obtained. Retain the
needles for 30 minutes. Electro-acupuncture stimulation can be ap-
plied during the retention( Fig. 4 -33).
j
[ ilfiftEH I
_+ffi E HE )ffi .ffiffiZs#, J-AlI&fn "
The method is mainly used to treat pain or motor impairment
due to paralysis of the shoulder and arm, as well as muscular stro-
B 4 -33 HBEffi'ISX$EF|J phy and bi syndrome of the upper arrns.
Fig. 4 - 33 Opposite sword-blade need- .
ling between .ianyu and Ouchi
35. #ryff AÊl4E+ry€i6t'LfffiffiWtr"
35. Needling of hardness This method can penetrate hardness .
and is used to treat diseases of the upper limbs.
I fr',* I
H# Xiaoluo '*,{f jt i( )t +t, ftti f,+ firJ, LA\E w tJfr x, E filJ H iH i6 i( _L
ffiW..m .fiK, trII{€6,8 *15, T{+e+$( W 4 * 34) .
fr ,+l^x
HAdd Qingleng-vuan
X#'rianiine Method
The needle is inserted from Tianjing through Qinglengyuan into
the upper Xiaoluo. The acu-esthesia can be transrnitted to the shoul-
der and down to hand ( Fig.4 *34).
[ilfiREFI
*iff -Lffi ffi &. zJ. JLffi ffi tr )fr.ft. -L Ei Jff fAH H fi+ fr
E .E1*ii'H. ^.
B4-34 *Ffl Clinical Application
Fic,. 4-34 Needling of hardness It is used to treat paralysis of the upper limbs, sequela of in-
fantile paralysis, numbness of the upper limbs, tlifficulty in raisinp;
:
*.q ..-.-E g.*.;,

i:l *"'&[i ,5
,,,.1ii=ffi
--)El7'f/t17
shoulders, pain rf the shoukler and elbow joints.
36. fr fuT+fr{ ,F^l^JtJrlhfiUXf',1'S f?\fthrlThf't&F,

"
36. T-shaped needling of Quchi This way of needling is per-
formecl an und Quchi and appears like a T shape.
r)uze dHi#
^
0*,{f i-r* ) *\ \,
-- fl,,\. ffi 'ru XfrIt-t W 6,,t yVi(, fr
* +f it Hftl t t,
ftrsffi .w#.M{&+*13( t5l 4 -3s) ,, ^ffii#
Method
One needle is insefted from Quchi through into Shaohai. An-
other needle is inse{ed I cun perpendic;ularly into Quze. 'Ihe acu-
esthesia is numb or sol'e, and the feeling may transmit to the wrist or
hand(Fig.a-35).
IrttFEH )
+i6-tiiffi&,H.ffJe=F',F ,
pEffifl+,ffi , HmEft, H* , ry 84 -35 ffi'tgT+frlJ
tliSRE+t fri+,ffi,D "
Fie. 4 -35 T-shaped needling of Ou-
Clinical Application chi
It is mainly used to treat paralysis of the upper limbs, pain of
the shoulder and elbow joints, sore throat, hypertension, high fe-
ver, goiter and urticaria.
37 . # * 9.G 1'lf*fiil 4*E gx+t FH +'E/t %il1 #zffi 9.re,W

i<, lurf,E+olj * ff r"r fi tl zffii 4+ &
37. Opposite sword-blade needling between Yanglao and E- T.hizlwng
Zhizheng This way of needling is so named as two points of Yang-

lao and Zhizheng on the Small Intestine of Hand Taiyang are selected ftft Yanglao
srvords facing each other.
If*,ff trr*l
{FHiEe'fn, R 3 t H+t, 16 H #ZitE {iEtr f"r fH f"r tr B4-36 *UgEX$*n|J
Fig. 4-36 Opposite sword-blade need-
U4+<hBi,ffi+t 20 -30 /iW , HfiF{ffift+t#.ffixt,# pl/ilffi ling between Yanglao and Zhizheng
HfilJHi*(K4-36)"
Method
The patient sits uprightly and stretches his arm. The acupunc-
turist selects 3 cun filifom needles. First, the needle is inserted
from Yanglao to Zhizheng horizontally; then Zhizheng, is selected and
+ fr+
$ ;ffi'.,''ff
penetrated towart-ls Yanglao horizontally. 'l"he depth is 1.5'-2 cun to
both acupoints, till the trcu-esthesia is obtained, Retain the neeclles
tor 20 *30 minutes. l-he needle tips point towards ear:h other during
the retention; and electro-a(iupuncture stimulation can be applied
during the retention ( !'ig. a -36).
Iuefeffi)
tiftIfrt&E{+ , E Hfl'JH,ffi , *Iffi ,flf.rfr+ "
The method is mainly used to treat stiff neck, elbnw spasm,
pain in the shoulder, back, elbow and arm, headache and lumba-
go, elc.
38. 6,* Hflr*rj Ar*EqxtP*a. fr l+i{it,fr FtE #u[ll *tJ rm'
4+A "
38. Ling Ze pointing to xi needling This way of needling is so
named as Daling and Quchi are selected and needled to the direction
of Ximen.
tl*'ff tr'EI
dlll ximen
1al@ -lianshi trEElitlr Fl'{t ,4x 6 tttf ,rd^)tW.XE 30" ffi (nJlf,l1}I
fif Neiguan
Ft trFrJ )fr +f 4 - 4 . s
--J-,
FEt ffi y+ X ffi lF] H F rA 1"1 *F ll XT tA
l+,w+t20 -30 h++(m4-37) "

Method
The patient sits uprightly or lies on his back. The acupunctu-
rist selects 6 cun elongated needles. First, the needle is inserted
K4-37 E)+tofgnlJ fror Daling towards Ximen at an angle of 30o to a depth of 4-4.5
Fie. 4 - 37 Line Ze Pointing to xi ne-
cun; then another needle is inserted from Quze towards Ximen rvith
edline
the same method to a depth of 4 - 4.5 cun. It's advisable to obtain
the acu-esthesia that will radiate to fingers, elbows and forearms'
Retain the needles for 20 - 30 minutes ( Fig. 4 -37 ) .
I mfiEH)
+i6,1''l+ .,m,F +,t'fllEF H "
This method is mainly used to treat heart problems such as pal-
pitation.
3e. Eilx{Hfrrj ,F}*i&RtgAit tr " H ll " -Xm,Rxf f"r Xil
*,i* ,i\r+ #,*fu,,

# 4x.fl. ""jY
fl o:,-# effi.""
Elrtl#1.,f
Zr{ti$if, "
39. Lingmeng opposite needling 'fhis way o{ needling is str
named as two points of a compeised acupoint Lingmen are selected

ancl needled towards each other.
1ffi,{f f i*)
H E 4'fn, fl s t.E fl, fi )^:kF,i(, E 3a" ffi Ft 4 I 1-E ra
'f+
frNJ )t+l 2. s - + -f ; &v&/^{ll i(, ffi IEF}-r* rir )c.wxfr tq fi

*tJ, )fr.+f 2. s-4 -l, 4&F,M.ffr ffi X +i" H ffiffiE+ffiffl J$ *[}r i+ "
4!l] Xinrerr
ffi+l2a-30 }ffi(Eal4-38)" I'nl& iianshi
Method fi{ Neiguan
5 /rE oatine
The patient stretches his arm. The acupuncturist selects crtn
filiform needles. First, the needle is inserted from Daling towards

Ximen at an angle of 30o to a depth of 2.5 -4 cun. Then, Ximen is
selected and needled with the same method towards Daling, and the
depth is 2.5 -4 cun. It's better to obtain the acu-esthesia that will
radiate to fingers and elbow from the two points. Retain the needles
B4-38 Eltr$BAl
Fig. 4-38 Lincmeng opposite needling
for 20 - 30 minutes ( Fig. 4 - 38 ) .
IUEFEH )
+ifi ,L' IEE,H,,L' fi HZR,m.ft .
Clinical Application ^
This method is mainly used to treat heart problems or blood in
urine due to hyperactivity of Heart fire.
40. E&,l'/t 4^trAde,L..{fffi ,w&2"

40. Heart-strengthening technique This way of needling is so
named because it strenghens the heart.
tf*.{f f ;* ) 4l1-l ximen

lslf€:ianshi
)IXWit+|, /ft ET 6F|-4.fi *X. lEl'fFX, eA[ n X' +t B fi)Q Neiguan
m. Ea -fK , El -L,f€6H *[ , T{€A+$ ( Kl 4 - 3e ) . tE oaing
Method
The needle is inserted beneath the skin from Daling to
Neiguan, Jianshi and Ximen. The acu-esthesia is numb, sore and
distending, and the feeling may transmit up to the shoulder and
down to the hand ( Fig.4 - 39) . B4-3e ffi,ur^
Fig. 4 - 39 Heart-strengthening tech-
tffiFEH) nigue
+ifi,1'7: FE.XiH{Etf H{+ -'f H ,ffinn-+W.'ffttrrf3. A
@ ffiffi#T
W u,,"=ffi rr',F
q-W&til.* F ,t&fii ,ffi/rEdttpEul:
"
It is used to treat heart I'ailure, disorder of the peripheral circu-
lation, colna, exhaustion, syncope, hypotension, meniere's dis-
ease, rlizziness, hysteria, epilepsy, vomitirrg etc.
41 . Hypnosis needling This way of needling is so named because

it is helpful for sleep.
t?id l.ingdao tffi'Frt*)

i& !F.
FB4 Yinrj
Tongli
,i.i+ ll^ jf ft , i*tr-Ffffiil , 4ltfrN. jE IE , *f,.rE;i , ftB
.id:l-j sheun'en E H-&+ffi,.m .[K( K] 4 -40) ,
Method
'fhe needle is inserted beneath the skin form Shenmen through
Yinxi to Tongli and l.,ingdao. 'Ihe acu-esthesia is numb. sore and
distending in the shoulder or hand (Fig.4 -40).

B4-40 {EgEn
Fie" 4-4A Hypnosis needling
I llfiffi&H I
+iafr BR .ffi ilb. ffi i+l ffi .,1''F .,1'.i tr E . H m. JEfi .,fft m
rf." - 4tir?# .*y .++ -qFts fil Hffi "
It is mainly used io treat insomnia, epilepsy, psychosis, palpi-
tation, heart failure, ltyperlensiono hypotension, sleepwalking,
dreaminess, r.reurasthenia and hysteria.
42. ;€trfifr .+^ €i6qttffi-<E'f-.,fiHflfifFffi ,frt EZ"

42. Lung-clearing technique This rvay of needling is so named be-
cause it cures cough and bronchitis and clears away heat in the lurg.
ti*,lt'-r* I
jltft', ift E T *+frt'| j$ ?4 9F X, F Fl t + Nl 2 - 3 -'1,
,,. zt lt,Fl X
ff/*m .s.fi.BK , r"t T trI{€efi}.m*ffi , t": t ET.f€Et'H ( K] + -
ftS.lingqu 4l)"
-- tiH-laivuan
Method
The needle is inserted beneath the skin from Taiyuan to Jingqu
anci horizontally upward 2 - 3 cun. The acu-esthesia is sore, numb
and distending and may transmit dorvn to the thumb and index finger
B4 -41 t€fifi^
and up to the arrn ( Fig. 4 - 4l) .
Fie. 4-41 Lung-ciearing technigue
++
--_lE--:s:l
tflfifeH)
:Ltfi\&ft "
It is mainly used to treat brorrchitis.
43. rLffi *tiDFl Ftt+*{ 4r* E ry+t pfirt'l %v.ttLffi.nr aijfr m

';(, IuatJ',l{. Mx''J iiii*|J,fi\A,
43. Opposite sword-blade needling between Kongzui and
Taiyuan This way of needling is so named as two points of Kong-
zhui and Taiyuan on the Lung Meridian of Hand Taiying are selected
swords facing each other.
l'*'ff f ;*l
t . s - 2 t', mff4ifH rA mtxf z., 4'\+HW.FKEffiBX H., W +t

30 h++, gflH{&,trIl[ffi€,*|JHrE( K 4 -42] "
Method
The patient sits uprightly, stretches his arm rvith palm facing
upward. The acupuncturist selects 3 cun filiform needles. First, the
needle is inserted from Kongzui to Taiyrran at an angle of 30" be- ,JLE r.ong,zul
neath the skin to a depth of 2*2.5 cun; then the needle is inserted
from Taiyuan to Kongzui beneath the skin to a depth of 1'5 -2 cun-
Two needle tips point towards each other, and the acu-esthesia of
soreness, distending, heaviness and numbness in the forearm should
be obtained. Retain the needles for 30 minutes. Electro-acupunc-
*
ture stimulation can be applied during the retention ( Fig. 4 42) .
IllfiFEHI
+iArZFffi.rEl,ffi.K_m"
Clinical Application B4-42 $e^rHff#filj
Fic. 4 - 42 Opposite sword-blade
The method is mainly used to treat cough, asthma, sore throat
needling between Kongzui and Taiyuan
and hemoptysis.
44. tdtEr.fa*Il ArEB=|FJ fr BHYEffi x, +t Fs+'d^xfriJzffi

4&E "
44. Jian Xi to Gu needling This way of needling is so named as
two acupoints of Sanjian and Yangri are selected and needied to-
rvards Hegu.
,'*S ,#% #ts'

ffi,#ffF
g;ry_5::t:::i.::: ,. : ::,i
i:
a:i4:ii:ii.:i:,ij,r.a : : i.,-.1
'lj,T -TT
tl*,ff trr*)
V-MlrF+,Iil l s tH.+l ,ftft,'1tEJfiJ +|dE 4s"fhf.+*lJ,
j)IEr 0. s -0.8 t
,ulw.tlr&,rffiax6tutEtftlt#)Irlt" +i4ttrtli4
fd'"'E#l1h'l5 ,ilL+l L 0 - 1.2 -t ,N)1#'1)tE ,f4+f 20 - 30
/tlffi , H 6tr,l&El hnffi H, fri)f&.$ ( K 4 - 43 )
"
Method
The patient sits uprightly and stretches his hand. The acupun(,-
turist selects l
5 cun filiform needles" First, the needle is inserted
from Sanjian to Hegu obliquely at an angle of 45" to a depth o{
0.5 -0.8 cun, and it's belter to obtain the acu-esthesia of soreness,
ItFliK Yangxi distending, heaviness and numbness that may radiate to the palm
center. Then Yangxi is selected and penetrated towards Hegu t}9-
AA t legu neath the skin to a depth of 1-1.2 cun, till the acu-esthesia is otr-
i'.lgl
Retain the needles tor 2A * 30 minutes; and electro-:acu-
Saniian
tained.
puncture stimulation can be applied during the retention ( Fig. 4 -
43).'
(rtfiFEH )
B 4 -43
tdxXi6nlJ *i6* )H . rE tH . i&ffi ,L'i4 .iA,F #,
Fic,. 4 - 43 Jian Xi to Gu needlins Clinical Application
The method is mainly used to treat headache, sore throat,
vexation in febrile diseases and all pain syndromes.
ler*)
Ar*+il,Hffi "
Note
This method is prohibited in pregnant women.
45. i+pEft A^tr€ift Wiftf,Et4.ffiftn4L,

45. Yang-thrusting needling This way of needling is so named
because it specializes in treating disease of the yang meridian of the
bladder.
If*.ff trr*)
A4 +iitr +1, l* N-f"t -L HE 6 tr(fr X, +f ffiH ffi,fr ,,e *f
m.m.[K4fi4€H( El+ -++;,
Method
The needle is insefted beneath the skin from Weizhong to
Chengfu. The acu-esthesia appeas like sore, numb and distending
'i'.:ig1$j;:,;ffi
rrr electrical sensation in the lrip or foot ( l'ig. 4 - 44) .
t ilfiReH I
frlt chcnglu
* ?ft 'fft frE
4' )LffitF I=aift /ft
. . t ft8 til.* M.IFa, 4 ln'lr*++ % "
Clinical Application "1
It is mainly used to treat paralysis, consequela of infantile pa-
ralysis, numbness and pain of legs and multiple neuritis.
44t weizhong
46. &gfi4ft +ti.h=.egwtFm,w&2"

46. Spleen-invigorating needling This way of needling is so g4- 44 )Q[Bfl
named becaues it invigorates the spleen. Fie. 4 44 Yang-thrusting needling
tffi.{€f r*)
frJif;+*ljF€4)ei(, ftBffi *fiffi . m .EK ( Ki
4-45)"
^lx.4..iijt+1,
Method
The needle is inserted from Futu and puncture obliquely up-
ward to Biguan. The acu-esthesia is sore, numb and distending in
the hip (Fig.a -45).
t mFeE)
*,i6zj',JLii5 |LZK H.. H,F .n4fi+t,'54 fi TEim& "
It is mainly used to treat infantile dyspepsia, stomachache, ne- B 4 -45 fiPl4fi
phritis and paralysis'of limbs. Fie. 4- 45 Spleen-invigorating needling
47. ffi=+f 4^=X44ffi*F ,fi\E,

47. Triple needling of the knee The three acupoints to be need- KHF xiyan
led are all located around the knee.
u*,lf f i*l
ffiHRAf+X|J 1 - 2 t', EIffiAEfiil fiBffigFM-,EK;
, FH ffiF
itFt t -3 'l,ftRffi.EKe,g*F( K 4 -46) "
Method
The needle is inserted obliquely I -2 cun into Xiyan or through
both acupoints. The acu-esthesia is sore and distending and is felt
over the knee. Another needle is inserted 1 - 3 cun into Yang-
lingquan, and the acu-esthesia is numb and distending and will B4-46 m=f,|
transmit to the foot ( Fig.4 - 46) . Fre. 4-M Triple needling of the knee
.,m **;M".W
h t'-r #
lrlfiffiEH )
iliilA x fi \ifi t'ilw +tr()J,.
_f-
It is mainly usecl to tre:rt ;rairr atrd strain ol- tlre knee joint.
48. *+T+*rJ 4;*U*r]r-fi rlr,1,.tp l-?-:{lifiilZ,EkA "

48. Crossed T-shaped needling of Weizhong T'lris wav of neerl-
ling is so tramed Lie,:ause il is pcr{rrntted ar,rutld Weizhorlg and ap-
pears likt: a 'l' shape.
Iffi,ff i-r*)
*+t )i*pnft tft tr 4: rlfi l* it ; h *
i& E\' M€'F XCi filJ ' fl'
44: weizhong HftX.At_A,?*tr( w4 -47) "
a)uquan dhR Kr 4l3E welyang
Method
The needle is inserted transversely from Weiyang to Ququan'
Another needle is inserled perpendicularly into Weizhong. The acu-
is sore and numb feeling lvhich will transmit the
esthesia foot
(Fig.4-47\.
efFH-ffiF @Weiyang Ququan
1 1
@*+ @'Wei"hong
B4-47 F+T+nil [ilfiffiEH )
Fie. 4 * 47 Crossed T-shaped needling + ifr T niftrF . zJ. J L ffi E E iBft ffizj.,frE ffi f )ft "
of Weizhong Clinical Application
It is mainly used to treat paralysis of lower limbs, sequela of
infantile paralysis, and numbness of the leg' I
4e. JIIFH 1 ff
4'^ld'l'dEiEftf'n4( E l''l\nn*El:4) -4.1ffitr,,
49. First Yang-penetrating needling 'i'his rvav o{ 'eetliirrg is st'
r,allerl because it cern prontote the florq of rgi froln the vang nleritiiair
blutklt'r rnt-'rirlian o1' l"oot-'l'aivang.
(ffi,{f fi'r*) I
M4l'Liit*,
IAA T fril4.&,t,,Ht pE' ftF.\th X' FIH
,e4ffi#m.m.FK( Kl4 -48) "
Method
R 4 -48 JilpB 1 +i
The needle is insefied beneath the skin from Pucan to Kunlun,
Fre. 4 - I First Yang-penetrating need-
linc
Fuyang and Feiyang. The acu-esthesia is sore, nurnb and distending
ru{ffi'ffi
l
L----,-----
tElriiftl^
ttit
tlll
I rlfif EH )
f. ifrilAX t \irt Nfl*+tr{)i,,
It is mainly used to treat prairr and slrtrin ol'the knr:e joint.
4s. *+T+fi4 +RU,+rl r[,,59- .f ?N.;khrlZ, {,IF,

r
1; "
4€1. Crossed T-shaped needling of Weizhong 'l'his wav of neecl-
ling is so tttrmed be,:rtuse it is per{ornrerl antund \Yeizhong arrrl ap-

pears like a'l'shape.
l+*ttsfrt*)
--+l I^4-FHII ft tft tr +- dh tR i'( i fr - +t )^*,i' it *L *:|j, fl'
4r]r weizhong i*ffi.naE,e#(w4-47)"
QuquandlJU{A 4ljHweiyang
-..!-"3 Method
The needle is inserted transversely fiom Weiyang to Ququan.
Another needle is inserted perpendicularly into Weizhong. The acu-
esthesiais sore and numb feeling rvhich will transmit the foot
(Fig.4 -47).
04flF---------_-__--ffi* @Weiyong Ququan

1 I
@4+ @Weizhong
g4-47 *+T+h!J tilfiFeH)

Fie. 4* 47 Crossed T-shaped neediing * i6 T nif,re)E . zJ. J Lffi B E ifrft.ffiuj. BE,ffi * {i. .
of Weizhong Clinical Application
It is mainly used to treat paralysis of lower limbs' sequela of
infantile paralysis, and numbness of the leg.
4e. ,rtFE 1 f+ 4^tx6EjE11pH{4-(,EArHBffi1' )4Affi& "

49. First Yang-penetrating needling This way of needling is so
'\threiyutg called because it can promote the flow of qi from the yang meridian
bladder meridian of Foot-Taiyang.
ffiffi Fuyang
E,t xuntun t+*'{€f ,EI

}i4faitittt,ifttrT
fr\4.&,t,$f'l FH , ffiax+hx" flH
,eEIffi*Fm.m.EK( El4 -48) "
Method
ts4-48 JilpBl ff
The needle is inserted beneath the skin from Pucan to Kunlun,
Fig. 4 - 4iI Frst Yang-penetrating need-
ling
Fuyang and Feiyang. The acu-esthesia is sore, nurnb and distending
'%
ffi-,ffiffi
E- tr-n
rrl l7 l
of tlre ftrot or knee ( I'ig.4 - 48).

i
I rlft,lf;&H ) i
|
bri ,lr&'it&w ,tsi'*_ .t:tJ% .t1,lff ig&411&''k,Y+44 -?4.ft.

Clinical Application I
Paralysis, epilepsy, pain of the waist and leg, sciatica, ab-

<lorninal 1xrin, tlropsy. <:ortstipalion. ,:rturesi.. r'ctention of urine.
I
dysmenorrl-rea, menopause, leuc,orrhagia, rnuitiple neuritis, etc.

I
50. Jll Ffr2tt 4*fr2til1t[nt.(,gttrHffifltr tt)t4.<,fr\E, I
50. Second Yang-penetrating needling This.way of needling is I
so namerl because it can pronrote the flow tif qi from the yang meridi-
Fost-Taiyang.
I
an bladder meridian of
i
I
It*tEfr;*j i
AALtriri&f I , Ft ti'ft IHFEbTWL-bFXJIZ lHl f+*tj , L*,frfi .+ i

{tp Weizhong
FF],Htr6,4+X,fll,*,eR,ffi4Fg*[ge.F.f .FK( W 4 "4e) " I

AFH Hevang
Ivlethod
The neeclle is insertecl froni Chengshan obliqueJ--v upward be- frfE chensjin
tween the trvo bellies of the calf to Cher:gjin, Hevang and Weizhong.
The acu-estl.resia is sore. nurib rnd ilistending I'eeling of the sole,
hip of rvaist ( Fig. 4 - 49 ) .
t ilfiFEffi }
* i'd' 4H ts, i{ i,n fE . + Ixl iF re S 4 . uJ.,HE.}i jB fr frt . 4 ft 'W-lF
t|ft.,H!fr{,r.EJl ta + . ,[g.HE ffr . fi6 r€ fi- E ffi lH f+ . fH, ff . lE ffi . R|6& W B4-4e jilpB2 fi
ff@fl'" Fig. 4-49 Second Yang-penetrating
needling
It is rnainly used ro treat paralysis" r'heunratism, rheumatoid
arthritis, cold and nurnbness of the leg, multiple neuritis, cramps
of the caif, pain of the rvai"qt and leg, difficulty in bending the
knee, anai prolapse, enutesis, retention clf urine and constipation,
etc.
51 . 3
JtIFH ft
.fZrFArE.l-iFrt%( E'J.FFbE*.) -4<,f'lF'
"
51. Third Yang-pen*trating needling This rvay of needling is so
named because it can promote the llow of qi from the yang meridian
Gall bladder meridian of l-oot shaoyang.
l**tFfii*l
MFnVh F" tfiFl , rfi T i'* ,t f;+ ,kil , ?;lsfl \ , jLtyl , tli J6 ?, [il +]1i
'ir,41' ffiM*F4,e1tm .Jlx .jltr( K a 50),,
lJHE,R.
Yanglingtluan Method
'Ihe needle is inserted beneath the skin lirrm Yanglirrgquan
FFJ} Yangjiao
through Yangjiao and Cuangnring to Yangfu. 'l'he acu-esthesia is
)[ ffi Cuangnring
/ sore, numb and distending feeling of the knee tu' tip of the {or.rt
[FSf Yanglu
(Fig.4-s0).
IrttH&H )
B4-50 ,ilpB 3 +l +i6,fftfE .4')LfffrfHE i6)ft. WXT ft.. Tfi{ W.I:{1 .[EnyL4-.
Fig. 4-S Third Yang-penetrating needing ffiF-fift,"

It is mainly used to treat paralysis, sequelae of infantile paraly-
sis, inflammati<x of the knee joint, pain of the knec- <'ystitis and
?- EB rtliu urethritis.
ztiX raixi
tf$ oazhong 52. ;TEtt +*8lh*tT'tr,wi'4F"& "
zIR shuiquar
52. Hidrosis-stopping needling This way of needling is so
named because it is used to treat polyhidrosis.
F& ruriu
I**,ff t-*)
ti$raixi
Jt$# oaztrong
*zKFXf, ,4X-++.
+t , frJ-h++FlI t N4,H-&4-F-'faX"
zXR snuiquan fi-B,e/R*[slffi*15ffi.fif .)ffi ( K]4 -51) "
Method
The needle is inserted from Shuiquan and obliquely through
Dazhong and Taixi to Fuliu. The acu-esthesia is sore, numb and
B 4 -51 ;FEfi distending feeling of the sole orknee(Fig.a-51).
Fic. 4 -51 Hidrosis-stopping needling
I IITFEH I
EIA+IT -i FF. zK n+. WW ffi. E R -'ft ft.'W ffi ft.ffi R
E_^."
It is mainly used to treat polyhidrosis, ankidrosis, edema, re-
tention of urine, enuresis, nephritis, cystitis and urethritis.
53. t|7+l a^trFg{F+tktil&8ffii1+A "

53. Leg-strengthening needling This way of needling is so
named because it can strenghen walking.

l.':lil-i,'ir:-;;:
EVTqT
t'*,fff r*I rurcdial nralleolus
f l- tr fft fr il,'f-FHW .f*'d . i\ ?\, iL ffi e

rfi zjc -til tr t f-t i( . El
H,efR "zBJft&[ri.At.llK./iii (W 4 - s2) ,,
Method thc flrst
bong
The needle is inserled lrom Shuiquan transversely through Zha-
ohai, Rangu and Congsun to Taibai. 'l'he acu-esthesia is sore, numtr
and distending feeling of the heel, sole and toes (Fig. a -52) .
conBsun ffi6 Zhaohai
2\Jdt
IllfiFEF)
ttftBR*|5tr/# .ffiflF fi wxfr
Ciinical Application ^..
It is mainly used to treat pain of the ankle, tumescence of the
foot, and inflammation of the knee joint. ziH Shuiquan
/a\fJt Gongsun ffi& z.haohai
B 4 -52 Afi#
Fic. 4 - 52 Leg-strengthening need-
ling
ffi
F& ffirru
ffi}iH Z,fttttt
#h{S*fsTffifq * &fl{-T"[#T ;{; trdffiffiffil- lfdffi
Z*+l'LEEie4xffi+Etetttf t){-h-filittlr ( 4,'!' ) ,ff|Wtk *-

wr F,t u) t V,J +1,'*tJ lF, l -l4i A{J
- it *t5 4i, tt,F ?t *{ E *r f I ift ft ?'"'
-E t
-
,i i\R, &.ftY, h & +' Xffi ffik ff'JE, F.,' W,H++ W#lffi F xfi,' 4fu
hu !i,hfo-fftffi/AZ,
A*jstic needling means to use two or more needles to punr:ture
tilo {}r more acupoints gr tenderrress. This niet|od is developed tiy
the author and is more e{'fective than the needling of <xre single ac,u-
point in crlinic treatmeni. 'fhis is the result of rnany vears study and
sumnrarizstion. Since the per{ormance t:tt this kind of needling ap-
pears like artistic rvork, it is called artistic needling'
1 . E*Eil*rj A*il*trr'e AF: ffir" .fE dtt rq}+4SEflJ fir

+A/?
l-l fl.
1. Needling four sides of Baihui This wav c,f needling is charac-

terized by needling ihe four acrtpoinls ior;aterl on the upper, lowet,
right and lefi sides of Baihui known as Sisliencong.
tf*{€E r*I
Atr'Arfi frf ffi ,EEfr\roi+4$'Fr"rifrEtrfi!.I ( E 5 - 1 ).
Meihod
To neetlle heneath the skin from tsaihui to sishencong lacated
:
on tire Lrpper, loroer. right and left sides of Baihui ( Fig' 5 1 ) ' Bs-t tr*E)!*ij
Fie. 5-1 Neediine four sides of Baiirui
[ ilfiFFf ffi ]
t
ffi T' i6 Ii * f# . gK - qg H . frn R .'Iff - dT'' lial fu fif Xr €'
It is used to treat ireadache, insornnia, hypophrenia, demen-
tia, manic-depressive ps"vchosis, epileps,r' and anal prolapse'
2" Hd[tu**|J a*lji*Atr .+Bf ,-h -E-EH4r [q iF4B rd HA*!j

z,lvlulv!+tL*fi o .
E---E-ilFr ^"u# sfi+ + B

.#, ",:"+ i,ii
2. Four{lowered needling toward Baihui 'l'his way of rreedling
[qirFml is r:haractet'ized by inserting tht: needk: frorn thc lour acupoirrts
Srshcncong
knowrr as Sislten<:ong tei Baihui.
ft4 rlaihrri l+FFlEfrtFl

Dtfr*Lt:,dt,lfrft I -'iffiru?4r{frf"tE +Wfri}(W s .-21"
Method
'fhe four needles ale inserled from the four Sishencong points
lor:ated I cun apart from Baihui to Baihui ( Fig.5 -2).
K 52E7-gtoeFU tllfif eH I
Fie.5-2 Four-flowered needling to- ffi T i6 t? * ffr . f< R, fs _t lrfi E . tfi
fl * . m . dr . ilE, frx,flT+ "
ward Baihui Clinical Application
It is used to treat headache, insornnia, hypophremia, demen-
tia, manic-depressive psychosis, epilepsy and anal prolapse.
3. i&x#&rtrEfi|J 4rAffiiE x.t&tlrwx{;|fril,D)T +f,NE

Effi-+lZ+ltr-friJi_ffit4+E "
3. Tongtian Luoque tail-chasing needling This way of need-
ling is so named as the needles are inserted into Tongtian and Luo-
que, and the tail of inserled needle is closely followed by subse-
quent needle.
TT*IFfiiX)
iFlt E*il, rt* 1 - 1 . 5 -1, E g r.E *r: XrA Hf ifr E *lJ r"r E x i(, fr.+t
chenjlar]g=-E
d rongtian
1 - 1.5 -1,&UmfiKffiBhtr(Kl s -3)
"
Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist uses 1.5 cun filiform
needles. First, inserl the needle from Tongtian beneath the skin to
Chengguang which is located anteriorly to Tongtian to a depth of 1 - 1.5
cun; then insert the needle from Luoque beneath the skin to Tongtian
rvhich is located anteriorly to Tongian. The depth is 1- 1.5 cun, till
the acu-esthesia of soreness, distending and pain is obtained (Fig.5 -3).
B5-3 )EXES*[€Efill I ilf,FtrH )

Fig. 5 -3 Tongtian Luosue tail-chasing +16*)ffi . He+ . Fffi . lFrF ZFfriJ "
needling Clinical Application
The method is used to treat headache, vertigo, nasal problems
and stiff neck.
--T*J-rl
4. E=+tfr{ &}*fl11{frihfr"wfl't :.+';(,'ii, u:l Afi?#if,'ttc; )t trti
1+r "
4. Three needles for intelligence This way ri{'neerlling is so nasretl
as three points on the lorehead are selected lo irnprove intelligenr;e.
It*rFfiixl
Ft'F+frlj,, )LE 4 X.fE tr A, E jtL+ )lZ

ifi ffi AnEffi * ffi
tfrH' ;W+l WH.lr)LAh l t', hXSA'h 1. s - 2 " ^& i$rE hffi t
*+| ,trfr+iqha-,ffi --.fi 9rt8 jL€tJ'lt+i8if f f rX4" -K
"
+1" t*fr+1, & trI Lit,Hritfa jt't* ,i!+r ffifi+ht+F +l'€', nI+ /\ r)
ryw.wfrtx}: +, fr+f ffi utk+t # #4. fiH H J€ tfr', x Ifr +f ffi fr1 ffi
*FBfrtr ,Etrfi\ffi" 4+-1trfrW+f 30 ht+,lHllffi 10 hffi'fi+t 1 E* Baihui
tR, 4nFnFH H'l'iH ftt'fffi -r-tn+W Z( K] s - 4 ),

Method
There're two inserting directions in this needling method: one is
to insert the needle horizontally towards Baihui on the verlex of the
head, the other is to needle horizontally downwards along the fore-
head skin. The latter is used more in children while the former rrrore
in young people, adults and old people. The inserling depth is 1
cun for children, and 1. 5 -2 cun for adults. Shenting is the first
point to be needled, and Benshen on both sides are the second and
third points. Quick-inserting method, needle-flying method or quick
rotation-inserting method can be used for retarded children, and the
reducing or reinforcing techniques by rotation are applied after the
needle is inserted. For adults, slorv rotation-inserling method is
mainly used, and after the needle is inserted, the reducing or rein-
forcing techniques by rotation are applied in combination with light
inserting and lifting. Be sure that the acu-esthesia should distribute
over the forehead. The needles are retained for 30 minutes after the
acu-esthesia is obtained, and manipulated once every 10 minutes.
The reinforcing or reducing method is applied according to the ex-
cess or deficiency of yin and yang ( Fig.5 - ).
B5-4 g=finlj
(ilfiFeH ) Fig. 5 -4 Three needles for intelligence
+i6JL€A rtI*T,fifrEH T i.4' )L*drtfrAff,.2+W

ffix+"
This method can be used to treat children's feeble-mindedness,
t:rrcr:plralic lrypoplasia, hype*inetit, syndrrrrne of' chilelhond atrrj se-
nile rlernentiar, clc.
l#;EI
zJ' JL tzt| I J i./;,5,g1llj 4iil-.
Cautiorr in r:hiL-h'en with patent lont.anel .
5. E#=ffifril 4rr*qx ]_E.rU*tqi( --..fi,E =-ffiW:lLhtJzf{fi

4&4 "
5. Xing Chai triangular needling 'fhis way of needling is so
named as the three points of Shangxing and both Quchai used make
a triangle.
lt*rFfit*)
rE4:, F I. 5'lgl r t E+l, 96 frt Eit Fr AmBit*Fi,,*EfrlJ
0. s - 1.2 t ,U4+tr1"h18" +g.lEH++-E\X,WEfrffi
^,#.+1'
Method
T'he patient sits uprightly. Tlie acupuncturist uses 1. 5 cun or I
cun fiiiform needles. First insert the needle into Shanpiing towards
the foreheatl beneatir the skin to a deptli of 0.5 -1.2 cun, till tlie
uq'u-eslhesia is ol-rlainetJ. The same methodis applied to Qut'hai on
both sides. 'fhe three needles fbnn a triangle. Retain the needle for
15 -3{J minutes ( }'ig.5 - 5).
I rtfrF&H I
B 5 -5 E#-ffiffii +i6*f*t . Ha€.ffi)Iil,efi , FlH. rErftfiF,ffi "
Fig. 5 5 Xing Chai triangular neerjling Clinlcal Application
This method can be used to treat headache,'vertigo, epilepsy,
nasai problems, eye problems and scre throat, etc.
6. Efr& Frntr:rr)*{,Si*E*ljFfrEp, trE /*&Xffi EZ"

S. Five fen posterior to the anterior hairline needling This rvay
ol'rreedling is so narned as the acupoinis five fen posterior to the an-
terior hairline are punctured.
tf*,ff trrx I
tE lA, qx 1 . s {- €fl, jL H LE tr fit }F.E it T fl, ft ri Fl Ff *F
ft
|fft Slrenting
llli li r-"p.1,u' jrill, Mciclr,'rru
'
7rith lit rishcn { *ll(Hii loutu4i
*4 lirurvci
{brrn needl<'ls. I.'irst, irrsr;r't. t}re rteeiJlr: into Sht:nting r>n lhe tridline ,4---\ /".-*
towarcls the {irrelread benealh tlre skin to a deptlr of 0. B - 1.2 crurr, glla>
tillthe acu-esthesia is obt-ained. 'Ihen Meichong, Quchai, 'lirulirrqi, (---)
L
lJenshen ancl 'lbuivei from the nreriial to'the lateral are ncedled with a>
tire same nrethod till tlie ar.;u-esthesia is obtained. Retain the needles
for30 minules (l-ig.5 -6). \n
I ffiffieH l K5-6 Hi&pmrrln|J
+ifi*t*i .F.trt .ffirb.fiAt$'f4tf , Frg. 5 6 Five fen posterior to the
Clinical Application anterior hairline needling
'Ihis method can be used te treat headache, nasal problems,
epilepsy' and weak constitution.
tr e.T fr ffi+}i
=FtfirJ *v\sxwfr Iq tA IAffi fr
7. ffirl X E{
friftfrilrnil?& "
7. Zanzhu three-direction needling This way of needling is so
named as Zanzhu is needlecl towards three directions of left, right
and inferior parls at the same time.
tffi,lf fril
(1) tfftfi{'9x 1.5 -tEfi,,H+E+trEtr*$Effi ,hffift
it Fl tr ( *.fr ) il't tuW-Jt i4 i6 FtJ, E E w +t Bt ft 46 g { x tt H
{+,trfi 0. 5 - | -f ,i+<hE ,W+f ls -3a h++, +i6tr&€
tH.-LffiTS+,ft(K5-7a)"
(2) IAFH*IJ,ffi i t'€+i, Fl HF qE E T} t'"JW E-+l
0.s * 0.s -i ,U)4+<hE-,trtrHNJ/- ,W+IE+4-t^,)t+l ,ffi+t
ls - 30 h+4 ,i6 Htri+( K s -7b)
"
(3 ) tf#FtJ' E( 1 teti,
HE @,tr) ffrft Fl EpHlf"t ft
z\,ff+t 0. 3 - 0. s t,D)1+ <h H,HEtr4'fgt6)iJt*Uffi H
z,&+t ls - 30 h++ ,i6*)ffi. H ffa+( El 5 - 7c) .
Methods
(i ) Handle-intersecting 5 cun filiform needles are
needling: 1 .
selectecl. Lift anci pinch the eyebrow skin, insert the neerlle from
Zanzhu towards Yuyao on the left ( or right) . Needles on the left and
right side are retained in an intersected form. The depth is 0. 5 - 1
cun, till the acu-esthesia is obtained. Retain the needles for 15 -30
minutes. 'l'his nrethorJ is used spet'ially to treat pain in thr,: supra-or-
bital bone and ptosis, r':tc;. (Iig. -5 -7a) .
&.lJ* Yrryao
(2) liye-targeting neerllirrg: I r:urr llli{irrm rteetllcs are select-
ifie--qt"
I r {<s> sI. ll'he needle is itrserted clowtiwarrls, i. e. torvarcls the direc:tiotr of'
Jingming beneath the skin to a dr:1rtlr o{0.5 -0.8 t,un, till the ucu-
esthesia is obtained. 'l'he two needles orr lrr,rth sides are parallel and
retained for l5 -30 minutes. 'fhis nrethod is nrainly used to treal eye
)r,\ / itrt-
---t_) \ / t-;-
problerns ( Fig.
( 3)
5 1b) .
Point-engaging needling: I cun fili{orm needles are select-

ed. The needle is inserted {rom Zanzbu on the left ( or right) to-
wards Yintang to a depth of 0.3 -0.5 cun, till the acu-esthesia is
?€
HH
.ra,',.] l",ss
l
obtained. Both sharp points of the neetlles look like being engageri
'\ with each other. Retain the needles for 15 -30 minutes. The meth-
9ttO>
-
(--) od is used to treat headache and blun'ecl vision, etc. ( Fig. 5 -
<> L
7")-
\t
)v I
l=->-_
tMfiEHI
b
+ia*,H .E&€l,H. Ft tr{ BF-+ "
The method is used to treat headache, pain in the supra-orbital
bone, blurred vision and eye problems, etc.
te)E)
+friJEM4L#.*,E]' 4R ffi rlfi ft #-tnffit li ffi m z
"
Note
There're quite a few variations of this method, which should be
selected according to clinical manifestations.
B5 7 ffif5=t-oFil 8. = fr,+aH arttr =f{fi.EBfffi F, rxyfitrffiml rfu 4+ E "

Fig. 5-7 Zanzhu three-direction needling 8. Triple needling of nose This method is to use three needles to
puncture in the direction of the nose to treat nasal disease"
ti*,ff fi r* )
F-fi!.l , Frr'ii[ Eth Htrtq rfi] ilfi HF WT tiJlft E-ffi
tri0.5-1-l(Ks-8).
*|J,i^1JHW ^
Method
One needle is inserted beneath the skin from YintanS, another
two are from Yingxiang on both sides to Jingming on each side along
the nasolabial groove. The depth is0.5-1 cun (Fig.5-8).
(rlfiFtrH )
IIl + lft 'tr & Ff Wm. fiIb6 41,,J -4, tfi trrll*-rtil,,
f{l.'ii.
It is used to treat various nasal diseases, biliary ast:ariasis alrd !a/ Yintarrg
//4\\
constipation.
+)lrb |
/l
l//'/^
| t-
Yingxiang iQG
e. -tTr€fitj AfX * ir€.TJ(rxtXH h rtsfrtlZtllF" F,
"
9. Shangxiaguan needling This way of needling is so named as
Shangguan and Xiaguan are needled perpendir:ularly.
tl*{f f,;* ) K5_B -IIHH

lEs,qx 1. 5 -fP.{;l,frH*ljtjei(, 1t+t 0. s - I -f ,4+< Fie. 5 -8 Triple needlins of nose
hH." F$ryTxt,Hf|J 1 - 1. 2 -1,I+<trw+t ts -3a /i++,
&El trffi €ftF|J#,*.H.til+l^*x- ( K s - e ) .
Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist uses 1. 5 cun filiform
First, is
--\
/;ha.
4'tt€r>
6+a$l
needles. Shanggudn needled perpendicularly to a depth of lf)Q Shangguan
0.5 - 1 cun till the acu-esthesia is obtained. Then, Xiaguan is located T)€ Xiaguan
and needled peryendicularly to a depth of 1 -1.2 cun. Retain the need-
les for 15 - 30 minutes after the acu-esthesia is retained. Electro-acu-
puncture or warmed needling method can also be applied (Fig.s -9). r/l
/\
\ /F--
t'
[ilfiFEEI Ks-e -tTXfilJ
+i6.TJ€4f,U .6)H .4H. H HR€f,+
" Fig. 5-9 Shangxiaguan Needling
The method can be used to treated motor impairment of the
jaw, toothache, deafness and deviation of the mouth and eye, etc.
10. EE*'J 4EEft*tltH+X" 6tr" ffiitr+E.

10. Xiangxing needling This way of method is so named because
of composed acupointes"Xiangxing".
tffi.rf tr*)
trS, E( 1 . 5 i €ft, ft Hi8ai(i*Ftria r"r BF Hfrfr fi
trFilO.s -1.2-t,iEEAFB[4A+fr Frtrfi|J a.s -r.2
-f " &D)4#r=th E ,W+l 30 h+4 ,W +tWl4 El tr-fA++++f*
(Ks-10)"
Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist uses 1. 5 cun fili-
form needles. The needle is inserted into Yingxiang towards Jing-
.ffiffiffi
I
iZ'",filii
lill
it'*
illl
rnilg along the nasolabial groove lo a clr:pth of 0' 5 I ' 2 <-'un' irno-
ther necdle is inserterl into Shangxing towards forehead or Xinhui
lo
,
a depth ()f 0.5 I - 2 ('un, till tlu: acu-esthesiir is ol-rtainerl.
lletairr
rlur-
the neerJle ferr 30 tnitrutes. Rotating tec:hniclues rnay bt: ap;rlierl
irrg the rr:tention of the neetlles (t'ig' 5 - 10)'
IilfitrtrH I
+h&N,ZKW&,tu,.
Clinical APPlication
,lhe merhotJ is used to treat nasal obstructiur antl hyposrnia-
B5-10 6Enll
Fig. 5 - 10 Xiangxinc needling
IE'*)
116ffit , t EXtg I'I f"rffi6nfisfrt)ZVFX),:|N"
Note
In clinic, Shangxing can also be inserled towards the forehead
and the needles are in the form of zl'.'
11 . i0tr:t&/\+tri ;6rt* F*Fr06fi L{I&i(&rI''\?

MfriJLffii'4+&.
11 . Two Yingxiang point doubte-splay needling This
wav of
needling is so named as Yingxiang and Shangyingriang are in a

splay
shape respectivelY.
Il*,{f trt*l
Es, Eq 1. 5 -r€fi
fr,^)fr&r(NfrE B tr'6,+l +f"t g6 BE
,
i
fr raffi F- fifiU, jtfl | -t E E, E ry i0 & 7\, e' ra FF EAI fr Yt
tr ffi fril,jt +t 0 . s -f Efr , IV lX J:T W t t\?, +l ffi & t) F *F EA
)*qa4 rid$. BK+AiiifHtttlt,W+l 30 t|ffi( E s - 1 1 ) "
-\
4}lte'> ti[6 Method
shang-r- ingxiang
rnE The patient sits uprightly- The acupuncturist uses 1' 5 cun
fili-
Yingxiang to Jing-
form needles. First, the needle is inserred from Yingxiang
ming beneath the skin along the nasolabial groove to a depth around
to
1. 0 cun; then, another needle is inserted froln Shangyingxiang
Jingrning beneath the skin to a clepth around 0' 5

cun; thus there're
two splay shapes- Stop manipulation till there's sore and distending
B5-11 u6-nxrl\+nu for 30
Fig. 5 -11 Two Yingxianc point double- feeling in the nose and tears in the eye' Retain the needles
splay needling minutes (Fig.5 -11).
t ilfiFeH I
+Y6F*F&I, F,H, tAt\&-R.^. 'B-g-ft.+H.ffi "
tllilttllX
'l'he method is used to treat nasal problems such as nasal ob-
struction, nasal bleecling, nasal polyp, rhinitis and sinusitis, etc'
12. Ftfi.rt+-Hfill ?F't3Vl|)tx{,r\?Ftirut-,*,,W& "

12. Character eight-one point needling for nasal problems
This way of needling is so named as the needles are in the form of
Chinese character "eight" ( similar to inverted 'oV") and a point.
' tf*,ff rr* )

,-\
,h'..
grst€
.-dtu
*U suliao
tr&, 41 1 . 5 -f
E+t,ft^)U.&iilWF HffilE,+l )iFr #FF jI[6 Yingxiang
BAfr FtW P.ffifriJ, )t +f | -t Etr, I\ HWW.flK+ A ffi iH :lt H! H ffi
hls." Effi0.5 -{^€ft ,HfriJRWi(,)t+10.3 .l ,u)M.flk}JE ,
w+|30 +l++(Kl s - 12) "
- Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist use 1. 5 cun fili-
F5*12 FF/\+-ffifilJ
form needles first. The needles are inserted from Yingxiang along
Fie. 5 * 12 Character eight-one point
the nasolabial groove beneath the skin, with the tip pointing to Jing- needling for nasal problems
ming, the depth is around I cun. It's advisable to obtain the acu-es-
thesia of sore and distending feeling in the nose and the feeling of
lacrimation. Then use one 0.5 cun filiform needle, which is inserted
perpendicularly into Suliao to a depth of 0. 3 cun, till the acu-esthe-
sia of soreness and distension is obtained. Retain the needles for 30
minutes ( Fig.5 - 12) .
t rlfiF&H )
tYaF.fr.r*pftTvn"
The method is used to treat nasal problems and uncomfortable
breath.
13. flfi=f+*lj Arx EFljTtrftfifi *FHtEfrF .flfi eit=+i(,fi

]frl+Eo
- 13. Triple needling of Nao This way of needling is so named as
three points of Naohu and Naokong on the occiput are punctured.
t'*'lf f,t* )
W+l NilnE.*tr E T *tJ L, H - +llfr F rA E E Fd iE + F Fr
fA:s r . s t' *.tr +l F,l fr xxlf]|J Jxl. fl!, } E nE, 6 {fllj nfr a X, wE
;
1.5 t'. *mtF'W.fAffr* ,'4+<tr')'816. *t'#++, ufiBf4fifr
ruffi"ffi
I" ir.iff)"rE.,gl+l' 30 tl+'F, tirlFfi s - l0 tl"+'47 thf.t I n ( K 5 :
13),
Method
'l'he needle is inseded downwarr.ls along the sr:alp. 'l'he first
needle is rotated into Naohu in the direction of the median posterior
hairline and then Naokong on left and right sides are needled in the
direction of Fengchi on each side respec:tively, the depth is 1. 5
cun. Slow rotation-inserling method is selected, more rotation, less
lifting and thrusting after the acu-esthesia is obtained and radiates to
the posterior side of the head. The needles are retained for 30 mi-
Et5 - 13 r&=fi nutes, and rotated once every 5 - l0 minutes ( Fig.5 - 13).
Fig. 5-13 Triple needling of Nao
ITfiFfiE I
+ 16 fi H + #ffi . g h l*,T . E t)r th 6E [€ r+, + if tr ]Fl . flfr 1S
ffiW+'tr,
The method can be used to treat Parkinson's disease, feeble-
mindedness. dyskinesia, ataxia and cerebral paralysis etc.
14. lRsfiU 4fitj**€*tJ#+X*f&trffiAbkfrffr--ffifr t*

"
14. Needling of neck sinus This method is used to puncture the
neck and cervical arlerial sinus.
tt*.ff f ;*)
4xre FH F . 5, A 7r,-eX & ffi XfrU i*
W H 4.W . zK fiU
=
fN ,lKE 0. 1 - 0. 5 -l î0
,U)+1TH ffifr,hq.( Kl s - t+; "
Method
To needle Renying, Shuitu and Qishe located on the stomach
meridian shallowly with ranked needling technique respectively.
Each acupoint is needled 0. 1 - 0. 5 cun till acu-esthesia is felt
(Fig.5 -t4).
[il6REEI
Ets 14 inFfilJ Clinical Application

Fig. 5-14 Needling of neck sinus It is used to treat hyperlension, goiter, cardiovascular and en-
docrine diseases.
15. Group needling of the neck Usually 12 needles are used to
'"ff ff#.'/:&
,ry ts#"4*,
tl^lfflfx
needle the neck.
ll*ffif,r* )
Y;r'!'kt i.{f,w*L'ftMti-fi rI lh,@lhflil*+t,*h r2 t*.,
fr* 0.5 - 1.2 -f ,U|&\)'tlE( Ig s - 15) ,
Method
'lhe posterior hairline Lretween two mastoid processes are divi-
ded into I I degrees and each degree is needled with one needle.
Altcrgether 12 needles are inserted 0.5 - 1.2 cun deep till acu-bsthe-
sia is felt ( Fig. 5 - 15 ) .
t IfiFEH I
ffi TifrtrHffi.l{ffi .fr ER. qg g . ffi x. Hffi . !fr ffi &striE
,ft,*)ffifr H*+"
It is used to treat hypertension, insomnia, hypophrenia, de-
mentia, hysteria, cerebral diseases and sequelae, headache, and B5-15 eAAfilJ
ocular diseases. Fig. 5 -15 Group needling of the neck
16. H =l\fr{tt ArEFH*p,€JtBBBbt % l:W= +t{nff*rj

ffii4+E "
16. Needling technique on the three points of the back This
way of needling is so named as three points of the Bladder Meridian
of Foot Taiyang on the back are selected.
t'+,ff rr*I
fffi Hh{n,wn*Ht%,ffi * lrul4., t ftf?, Fl ll . fifr
'ft-=i(, ffi 1 t \.,t+Fo-nu
)Sx,t-lr.nn,n.n
'lEfA# 0.5 - 0.8 t ,44-1EW+l ts -30 tl$ ( Kl s - 16) . :6ma\r'r1

Method
The patient lies on his stomach, the three points of Dazhu,
Fengmen and Feishu on the first lateral line of the,Bladder Meridian
\.-ll{l
l\
are located. The acupuncturist uses I
or 1. 5 cun filiform needles. l
The needle is inserted obliquely at an 45" angle formed by the need-
le and the back towards the spine slowly with rotating method, the B5-16 H=nfiil^
Fig. 5 * 16 Needling technigue on the
clepth is 0.5 -0.8 cun. Retain the needles for 15 -30 minutes after
three points of the back
the acu-esthesia is obtained (Fig. 5 * 16).
lrtfiftEffi )
$iftrypffi .ry,E#,,H,H+"
ruffiffi
tl^lftltx l
,1
Clinical ApPlication
.['he et{:.
rnethod is userl to treat aslhma, c:ough anc] backac,]re'
l
17 . Wtt fil -/#

lifttwlu)|"!,* lLw rLL4& 8, "
17. Four-flowered needling 'lhis way o1' neerlling is so named
because it looks like four {lowers.
t f*,{€t-t* )
/dnffi ft ( Bff ra e\ T f ) {il }JE 6t ( u& rfi n i tr ) F- 4s" ffi Ft'6
flft'ft
Ceshu
EEd,J Method
Danshu
The needle is inserled obliquely ( slightly downward to the in-
ternal) from Geshu and Danshu with an angle of 45o to the spine
E5-17 *17)'
wftfriJ with a tiepth of 0.5 -0.8 cun till acu-esthesia is felt (Fig' 5
Fie. 5-17 Four-flowered needling
t u6FeH )
ilaffifrffiB.tr8l)qvkffi"
It is mainly used to treat asthenia consumptive disease' emacia-
tion. thoracic distress, cough and asthma'
$. nft.frl rF-fr|*MIt\T*128ffi1+E "

18. Five-flowered needling This way of needling appears like
fir,e flowers. That is why it is so named'
lffi,ff f,t*l
+s'ffifi#
A
*'*'Ufi\$*$ trt Method
,1,,L.6i( ffir"r
HfHl":l ,4+<htr.( Kls

nTtr) ruiffift'(
- 18) "
ffi1"1 Fl-Ltr) E
The needle is inserted obliquely from Xinshu ( slightly down-
Bs-ra Efrm
I ward to the inrernal) and Geshu ( slightly downward to the internal)
with an angle of 45o into the spine column with a.depth of 0' 5 -
0.8 cun. Another needle is inserted obliqueiy upward into Lingtai
with the same depth till acu-esthesia is felt (Fig' 5 -18)"
Fig. 5 -18 Five-flowered needling
IrlfiFEH )
H Tifti!fi L*-o&, -'L' tu€ffi fi fln lnl iF te)ffi '

Itisusedtotreatpulmonarytuberculosis,cardiovas-culardis-
.wmffir
ti*lft"l/*
ease and intercostal rreuralgia.
f,\& "
19. Jiaotai needling 'I'his way of needling is so named as this
method can obtain comfortable feeling by treating disharmony be-
tween the Heart and Kidney with its Heart-Kidney communicating
action. (Jiaotai, means communicating and comfortable.)
tffi.{€f r*)
,fF HVn, FH 1 . s -'tH+t, fr fl,L.ft E s0" ffi Fr 6tS F H *+ filj
t
0.5 -0.8 ,I+ElhE,Fffi 2 -tH.* f.frr]'Ff'Ii( ,)t+l t.2 -
1.5 rl ,44-tfaffiXfrtrl11ffi+t?l.i52l* ,H+t 30 tl++ ( K s -
1g)
"
Method
The patient lies on his back. The acupuncturist uses 1.5 cun
filiform needles. First Xinshu is needled obliquely at an angle of 50"
towards the spine to a depth of 0.5 -0.8 cun, till the acu-esthesia
B5-1e R*n|J
Fig. 5-19 Jiaotai needling
is obtained. Then Shenshu is needled perpendicularly with a 2 cun
filiform needle to a depth of 1.2 - 1.5 cun. Reinforcing and redu-
cing techniques by rotation can be applied to the two points after the
acu-esthesia is obtained. Retain the needles for 30 minutes
(Fig.s-1e).
I rhffiEH )
*iff ,[''56t B'l fr HR, iEffi .
The method can be used to treat insomnia and spermatorrhea
due to disharmony between the Heart and Kidney.
20. /\g#*il AfrilfED1*llt .K. +,TWE6tu^^fri&7_"

20. Needling of Baliao This way of needling is done on the eight
Liao points.
tF{€f,;*)
u)is'ffi+ftfut.lf .+.Tfr4^TfrfriJZ,ifrE I -2.s -'1 ,
ul+<htr(Ks-20),
Method
B5-20 l\PaJ
Fig. 5 -20 Needling of Baliao
Oblique needling with an angle of 75" is done on the eight Liao
acupoints with 1 - 2. 5 cun in depth till acu-esthesia is feit
",ffi
ffi
ffiffi
ou*N w*ffi
( t'ig. 5 --20).
[ilfifteH )
ITJtlh)i hlfrlt'{ilE ,Jlf t# .,rliE{ ,--'fF4;trltu T fri'}4[i{':!i "
It is used to treat gynecological diseases, lumbago, hemia, dif-
ficulty in urination and defecation, flaccidity of tlre lower limbs"
21 . EEffifil Afrllr*frtjrEBftgl3, fii,tn7L#.Jf ffi-fsi.,fit AZ.

21. Sacral needling This way of needling is done on the sacral
region and it looks like a peacock opening wings"
lt*tFfit*)
liEv\WX( H*lj rX tt /\WfriJ)
friJ/_ ,#trx t\WtF {n|J 1 t 4!
Zt\X, E t\Wi<*11fri12,1+<hE ( K s - 21 ) .
eW A
Method
To needle the eight liao acupoints first ( the technique is the
same as that of the needling of Baliao) and then to needle the eight
regions I cun beside and parallel to the eight Liao acupoints till acu-
esthesia is felt ( Fig. 5 -2I).
Et5 21 EftFtfilJ
Fie. 5 -21 Sacral needling t mfe.tr)
ffi Thtr H k l'il R *.fA 6 frm, frJ
/)l IM X f€J ffiffi ttl WR
ffi+,
It is used to treat male and female urinary and reproductive dis-
eases, endocrine disorders, and prostatic diseases-
22. frffit 7*
A^{XEI F.ffi,ftirtrZ.
22. Seven-needling techniques for asthma This way of need-
ling is so named because it can stop asthma"
tffi,f€f r*l
Efr ffi*+t *ffiftî$ff iifttrf.+*lj, ffi
Fr t4
Yaoshu -+tffi't*4*fr4
f4-Lf+FlJ , inrfti*Jt-b +l " +f 3 - s h, ft'BE*[m,ffi .EK Kl (
5 22)"
Method
@5-22 EI#fiA^
Fie. 5 " 22 Seven-needling techniques The first needle is inserled into Yaoshu and then punctured ob-
for asthma liquely upward beneath the skin. The second needle is inserted into
the spinous processes obliquely upward. Altogether seven needles
"'tfrffiW#
in such a way into 3 - 5 fen. 'Ihe acu-esthesia is sore,
are inserted
numb and distending feeling in local area (Fig. 5 *22).
[ ilfiFEH I
tlfr biE ft . qq,€ 4 ffi d{ t(i,nft flg rffi
"
It is used to treat bronchitiso bronchial asthma, rheumatic lrrm-
bago.
23. E= +t 4i*Hrytr€ft*$=i(fii.ZTtri4+& "

23. Needling on the three points of the sacral region This way
of needling is so named as three points of the sacral region are se-
lected and needled.
lffirFfiitl
M4ft.4n4{{lJ Fl'n8ffi {n, frm 1. s t H,+I H K re R ff ft
0.s - 1 {-,Fqx+FH,,m 3 t€fifr{ 1.5 -2.t,&U)4+<h
E.,Wrt 1s - 30 h++(w s -23) ,
Method
The patient lies on his stomach or lies on his side with knees
bending to his chest. First, Changqiang is needled with a 1. 5 cun
filiform needles to a depth of 0.5 -l cun; then Huiyang is needled
with a 3 cun filiform needles to a depth of 1. 5 - 2 cun, till the
acu-esthesia is obtained. Retain the needles for 15 - 30 minutes
(Fig. 5 -23). Bs-zs E=fl
Fig. 5-23 Needling on the three points
ueFeE ) of the sacral region
I
*i6ffR.
This method is used to treat anal problems.
24. ffi Ai*EftBflffi*Fffi =+ X:nffii4+tr "

=ft*ll^
24. Needling technique on the three points of the hip This
way of needling is so named as three points of the hip are selected
and needled.
tt*,{f f,r*)
'ftrFF{n,,14,H A ff h n\ frW 3 - 5 .l € +1, *.
*F H! BB Jetr,
5 - 8 -l*fi ,+fffi.ia4x e0" ffi,+l rf Db4r 70" ffi *tJ , YxE D)
2 - 6 -t 6 +,W i< & DIE rt H H _e,g JR z.i+ . E W nl 4r Hfril .,
.$,ffi;n-
!
f I i*, it +f {tf | - 3 s,':!;,,, D) {6.frk1+\r&'h Ig. &nI
fj+ f i\ i i&
u'ffiFf 3 - 5 :ll-, =frlsnfhl€fil#ra (w s * 24),,
Method ^
'Ihe patient sits uprightly. 'l'he acupuncturist should select 3 *
{ 5 cun filiform needles or 5 - 8 cun filiform neerlles according to the
P*il)
thickness of the paterrt's hip muscle. Zlibian is inserted at an angle
of 90' while Huantiao is inserled at an angle of 70". The depth va-
\ ries from 2 to 6 cun, and it's better to obtain the electric-shock feel-
ing radiating to the sole in the two points. Juliao can be inserted
B5-24 ffi=flfi|JlR perpendicularly or obliquely and the depth varies from I to 3 cun till
Fie. 5 -24 Needling technique on the the acu-esthesia of soreness or distention is obtained' Warmed need-
three points of the hip ling of 3 * 5 moxa cones or electroacupuncture stimulation may be
applied to the points ( Fig. 5 _ 24) "
t ilfifiEH )
*ieT,9iE B, + H T )4, Wffi Em, U &-*.-a i4 %.ffi , 4'
ffi J€i5 Hffiy.LH4A* ffi + "
)Lffiffi E ifr,ft .
The method can be applied to atrophy and pain of the lower
Iimbs, hemiplegia, pain in the waist and hip, sciatica, infantile pa-
ralysis and soft tissue problems around hip joints, etc.
25. +e.Hfr&frl Afrl,l* r]&Ri +,L'' Wi;t))fr+laffffii1+ 4 "

25. Five-flowered needling of Jiquan This way of needling is
per{ormed around Jiquan with five needles inserted around, appear-
ing like five flowers.
tffi'{ftr)El
,FErts -LTEtr& 1 t&tE,F, ,A
E T . [A t, E A,f"JEl
^th.F.i(fiTH_LH*IJ
ErJuF Ftfrrli_, flBg m. ffi 4fre E, fi ]
H(Ks -2s).
Method
Jiquan is needled perpendicularly from the lower to the upper
and four other needles are inserted on the sides 1 cun apart from
Jiquan ( characterized by needling slightly downward, forward, to-
B5-25 +pR5ftfr|J ward the right and left) . The acu-esthesia is sore, numb or appears
Fig. 5 25 Five-flowered needling of like electrical shock ( Fig. 5 -25) .
Jiquan
t ilfiFeH )
HTYfitriffiHF[.tET:EffiT%,
wwffi'ffi
It is used to treat shoulder pain, and {lacr;idity of the upper
limbs.
26. *1,['* +Rf-tg<ffi ,bl!:ffi ,WF.Z"

26. Heart-soothing needling This way of needling is so named B\.-.-
h.--
because it is effective to regulate qi and to soothe the heart. 4r=-
\----- -,,
l+*18fri*l
E{,e FH W H %.fuI t+E,Effi ,lFffi ,rtr xX, lftfli lEl H}ft 8 \
)
fifriJE E,t Ffi 'g % EL4+W, U4+<h H ( W s - 26 ) "
Method I
To needle Kufang, Wuyi and Yingchuang located on the sto- I
mach meridian of Foot-fangming on both sides along the skin over
B 5 -26 t',U\^
the intercostals space through to the kidney meridian of Foot-shaoyin Fig. 5 -26 Heart-soothing needling
or conception vessel till acu-esthesia is felt ( Fig. 5 -26).
[ ilfifEE I
,H Ti6f ,L''EF.,L')H,m i4,ffivr,. ry r&6frJ +rft
"
It is used to treat palpitation, pain of the heart, thoracic dis-
tress, asthrna, cough and dyspnea.
27 . fr.wJtg<* A^fi n8S[ /\X,Hfr,MrH<Zth,W&Z "

27. Needling for soothing the chest and regulating qi This way
of needling is effective to soothe the chest and to regulate qi. That is
why it is so named.
tffi'{f tr)*l
W E,)- 4?-WJ*X/\ X, BiJ r* + . iF m . E t€ . iF +f , & iJ
Ffr 'g
nX, ifr ffJ IEI Hift EE friJE.+ ry,, U;t+<*r E ( W s - 27 ) .

Method
To needle Yuzhong, Shencang, Lingxu and Shenfeng on the kidney
meridian of Foot-shaoyin on both sides along the skin over the intercostals
space to the middle line till acu-esthesia is felt (Fig. 5-n).
tn6FeE )
Ef@ iil,fi@,ffi .,1''[+. rffi q fi a: rE . !f FltT''flJ + B 5 -27 fr8885^
"
Clinical Application Fie. 5 - 27 Needling for soothing the
chest and regulating gi
It is used to treat chest distress, chest pain, palpitation, asth-
mffiffi
: +-ai;W:!-:;:::' ;-:':!r'i r-l
r::;=S.51:.:i'r'r:,.:.:j :.': f -. : ..
a':'::ri:iaallit-:::i::r: r,.::i -' . : .
:::*_;;:l::!::1*::J: j.,.::..-.-),:.
;:r:=l:::i:*!:.;. :.::rr:ili-:r:
::r!:;.i=.i!:i.1 i. : L :r::.-,
rna, cough, tlysphagia and dyspnea.
28. ig yL 4'^ tll nl iE '+L*ffii'4+ t4 "

't
28. Needling lor the promotion of lactation 'fhis way of need-
ling can promole lactation.

\
ITRTEfi]E)
ffirF Danzhong
}l,*L{Ri(l'"ltg 30'ffif"f ?L"l',trtttf"lfrtj 0. 5 - 0. 8 t' ,F+)^
flH.f' f,t *L fr fi fut 7. t s " ft1\ft H.fr fril, l)tq+' u'h E ( El s - 28 ) .
nugen *Lfli Method
The needle is inserted obliquely upward into Rugen with an
angle of30" 0. 5 - 0. 8 cun to the direction of Ruzhong. Another
needle is inserted horizontalty into Danzhong to the direction of
Ruzhong with an angle of 15" beneath the skin till acu-esthesia is
B5-28 imgL^ felt (Fig. 5 -28).
Fie. 5 -28 Needling for the promotion
of lactation IilfiFEH I
h-+L")' ,*Lm.?Lit4iB "
It is used to treat hypogalactia, mastitis and retention of milk'
29. Needling for inducing lactation This way of needling is so
named because it can promote lactation.
tf*,ff t-rt I
4x+L+^-L-T6 I tF!*Lt-ffiPLT,E 30'fi rAfltrFtJ
/ o.s - 1 -1,Utr+<htr.(Kl s -2e).
lY[ J*,,n",,* Method
t-slT5ff.' Rushang and Ruxia located 1 cun above or below Ruzhong
' /Ff- .,t respectively are needled obliquely with an angle of

cun to the direction of Ruzhong till acu-esthesia is
30', 0.5 - 1
felt ( Fig. 5 -
2e) .
I \
tilfiFeH I
B5-2e 1E%^
h*LD.*Lit6iE -:+L:ffi+"
Fig. 5-29 Needline for inducing lacta-
tion It is used to treat lack of milk, retention of milk and mastitis.
30. =ffifi{ A*|JrXDI*|jt.F -Tmffii4+E.

30. Needling of triple Wan This way of needling nreans to needle
the upper, middle and lower parl o[ the stomach
tffi.ff f,rt)
I+xL!ft,+f+fjf"tTe 70" ,,,f'jHH*1J,TffiH*tJ,Wt - 1.s -f ,
u|+<hw(ws 30)
" J,* Shangwan
Method Zhongwan
Shangwan is needled obliquely downward with an angle of 70o, Xiawarr
Zhongwan and Xiawan are needled perpendicularly 1 - 1. 5 cun till

acu-esthesia is {'elt ( Fig. 5 - 30 ) .
t*
I IIfiREH I ts5-30 =ffifrlJ
th&ffi Hfi" Fig. 5-30 Needling of triple Wan
It is used to treat various gastric diseases.
31. +ffiffi4EfirJ 4--t*U+ffihF,L',tT. Etr&fr\-ft, El

fliluJt&ltffii4+E "
31. Plum-needling of Zhongwan This needling takes Zhongwan
as tl-re centre and inserts four needles around it and it looks like
plum-shaped. /
If*,{ci-;* )
\ I-'-
&+ffiir ,+D)tWh F,L. , Tt T ,fE & I -l&!F [q,F,H
*[, ifr 1 - t.2 -f ,u]tr+r1htr (Kl s - 31 ) .
Method
Zhongtvan is needled and four other needles are inserted on the
)
upper, lower, left and right sides 1 cun away from it in square, 1 -
1.2 cun in depth till acu-esthesia is felt (Fig. 5 -31).
.)\
IilfiFEH)
ia&ffi Hfr.
It is used to treat various gastric diseases.
\\
32. A fr#.fri|/R ArX tr4x H ffi SFaitNJi-',fr\E
"
32. Five-flower needling technique for lhe stomach This way \{
of needling is so named as five points of the gastric region are select-
tr s -sr +ffiffiffinu
ed and needled. Fig. 5 -31 Plum-needling of Zhongwan
tf*,{f f,t*l
,frpff{li-,4x l. s fi I -lF..+r,tEElrtJ'1,}b" )&.+t 0.3 -0. s
"F
'! ,l\4+bih,* , t4 4X l: .8 fr [g X , BIJ ,L IH . f# Ifl +xf,fl EIF( ,
s tRffi ,m+l20 - 30 hw(w s -32)

"
Method
The patient lies on his back. Tlte acupuncturist selects l" 5 or
1 cun filiform needles. First, Zhongwan is needled perpendicularly
to a depth of 0.3 -0.5 cun till the acu-esthesia is obtained- 'fhen,
fours points superior, inferior and lateral to Zhongwan, i' e. Shang-
wan, Jianli and Yindu are selected and needled with spot pricking to
a depth of 0. I -0.2 cun. Swirling method for 180"-360'is applied
after inseTtion for 3 *5 times. Retain the needles {or20 -30 minutes
( Fig.
_5 -32) .
t mFeH I
+i68ffi. H+4%.ffi"
E5-32 E578n!lx This method is used to treat stomachache and gastric neurosis'
Fig. 5 - 32 Five-flower needling tech-
nique for the stomach 33. tF=fr
*tJ A*!JrEX|.IA -LW.E=RYrWfri44& "
33. Needling of the u'pper abdominal triangle This way of need-
ling formsa triangle on the eibdomen. That is 'rvhy it is so named.
tf*,{f f i*l
A+ffifH IATE fr+r&J , n ,lqy-&Mtlw.*.fi tF r"r Fr -L
10"
fr E4s"ffif.+*!J,ifrE 1 - 1. 5'},U?+<hE( K s - 33 ) "

Method
\ Zhongwan is needled slightly oblique downward with an angle
of 70o. Fuai on both sides is needled obliquely from the extemal to

the internal upward with an angle of 45" , I - 1. 5 cun in depth till
Zhongwan Flft, 1r acu-esthesia is felt ( Fig. 5 -33).
[IlfiFEH )
,r*s i6Hffi. HT+filiF.m"
It is used to treat gastric disease, gastroptosis and upper ab-
dominal pain.
B5-33 -ttr=frfi|J
Fig. 5 - 33 Needling of the upper ab-
dominal triangle
s4. +F=fr *rl AXIEAffi trtrffiT7-.*lj,4iFprf +ffi*[*|J
'-ffi
ffi;-;
mlix ltl
Z,ltllfrtl+F, "
34. Needling of the middle abdominal triangle 'lhis way ol need-
ling is done on left, right antl lower sides of the navel. That is why
it is so named.
$*{f f r* )
wffi * xE7t fH rfir ffi E rc" ffi fr\Z, fr W<r& i( {H Fr T
)1 E 70" f#frilz,u)4+<'h E ( K s * :+ ;
"
"
Method
'lianshu beside the navel on both sides is needled obliquely to
the navel with an angle of 70". Qihai is needled obliquely and
slightly downward with an angle of 70" till acu-esthesia is felt ( Fig.

s __34). B5-34 +E=ftfilj
Fie. 5 - G Needling of the middle ab-
dominal triangle
I llEFEH )
'6MWffi.W{EffiffiJF..+"
It is used to treat abdominal pain, diarrheao dysentery, etc.
35. Tffi=frfi{ 4fr|jrx*lJaTffi*f=ft E=ffiM,Wffii4F& "

35. Needling of the lower abdominal triangle This way of need- Umbilicus ffi
ling forms a triangle on the lower abdomen. That is why it is so
named. C )€zc
uaryuan
GuilaiJB*
tf*'ff tr;*)
EqJ€76.tf*,fHHTE 7a"friJi--,Wt -2 -f ( K s -3s).
Method
Guanyuan and Guilai are needled obliquely downward with an
angle of '70" , I *2 cun in depth ( Fig. 5 - 35 ) .
--
t ilfiFEF I Uuanytlan;,<7f,
i6i6tffi . pHE. B 4TiH,ffi 4. mrc. RmeEIiEft + "

It is used to treat nocturnal emission, impotence, dysmenorrhea,
leucorrhagia, prolapse of the uteras frequent and urgent urination or
enuresis.
K 5 -35 Ttr=frfilj
36. H*Eufiil A*!JEUffih *,L"AH-LT -r-E&fril-+f ,
Fig. 5 - 35 Needling of the lower ab-
wffii4F&o dominal triangle
36. Square needling of the navel This needling is done around
ruffiffi
the navel with four needles inserletl on lhe four sides of the navel.
'fhat is why it is so named.
Qiz-hongffitIt It*rFfii*l
qxbY'f.Xt+ .trti& I t4Ip!l,F.,tr'lljffi 1 -2't ,v)4+Li
hv(w 5 36) ,,
Method
Four needles are inserted 1 cun beside the four sides of
\ Qizhong respectively in square and 1 - 2 cun in depth, till acu-es-
thesia is felt (Fig. 5 -36).
)\.,
(ilfiFEH I
lfrffiW-ffi -&ffiHflhfn "
(
It is used to treat abdominal pain and various gastroenteric dis-
F eases.
37. ffiJEl=/tfitj +l|+lExffiIfl x+8. ffi t.zJcA= Xltril+& .

B5-36 fl*ruDfilj
Fig. 5-36 Sguare needlins of the na- 37. Triple-acupoint needling around the umbilicus This way of
vel needling is so named as three acupionts of Tianshu, Yinjiao and
tK/tl Shuifen which are located around the umbilicus are selected.
Shrrifer
tFmf;*)
,ftirHl.{r,t =x€I)JH*|.l'/*tfrtfifr+f0. 8 - 1. 2 -t ,u}wEK4+<
EnH ,W+f $ -3a hW,4trIffiffif,l4::&z -5 ff ( Kls - 37) "
xffi Method
Iianshu
All above three acu-points are in-
The patient lies on his back.
serted perpendicularly and slowly to a depth of 0.8 -1.2 cun, till
the acu-esthesia of soreness or distending is obtained. Retain the
needles for 15 -30 minutes. 3 -5 moxa cones of warmed needle can
\=_i also be applied ( Fig. 5 -31).
tilfiFtrH )
+Y68itr,Wffi.
The method is mainly used to treat bi syndrome and abdominal
pain.
tr5-37 ffiE=n
Fig. 5 - 37 Triple-acupoint needling telEI
around the Umbilicus
tl*lftlt*
lFl( l4l s *31),

Note
The rreedling can be also aprplied to Shuifen, Yinjiao and
Huangshu. 'fhe method and clinical application are similar
(Fig. 5 -37).
38. ?TzkXt W+WH117K67KZ4Jttri|+&o

38. Water-moving technique This way of needling is so named
as it can move Waler and dispel Water.
IH,fTf *I
'fqrHl.'fn ,i.WX)L,F&.2&€-X,+t 0. s - 1.5
,fiHmFK f
E$L€4XA " trWKhi<El o.s - I rl,+tBE*FifiEK( K 5 -38) .
Method
The patient lies on his back. First, Guanyuan, ZhongSi and
Shuidao are selected and needled for 0.5 - 1.5 cun, and the acu-es-
B 5 -38 {:z-}<fr
thesia of twitching and distending should radiate to the pubic sym-
Fie. 5 -38 Water-moVing technique
physis. Then Shuifen is needled for 0.5 - 1 cun, and the acu-esthe-
sia is topical heavy or distending feeling( Fig. 5 - 38 ) .
t mFeH)
t76'5'lllzKfiF,
The method is mainly used to treat renal edema.
3s. nn= ++fri) +l*+t&ffi*BfiTffiii =A , W1ffiftffii4+E
ili/
"
39. lntestinal triple needling This way of needling is so named,as
three points from two acupoint names located lateral and inferior to
\,i
\.i
the umbilicus are selected to treat intestinal problems. 1 Xfir rianshu i-
+J'r-\+
(ffi,{ff rtl i' I ri
\'r
0. 8
Method
,frtrFF{n,4{
- r.2 -f
xM- xnm x&qfrtY)tft,Hfiu EI E ffi*Ffilj
,&UM.frK1+<htr,W+f 30 h++ ( El s - 3e ) , \ Vo,]
x".y7'
'',,t
The patient lies on his hack. Tianshu and Cuanyuan are select-
ed and inserted slowly. The needle is perpendicularly inserted or in-
sefted towards the umbilicus to a depth of 0.8 - I.2 cun, till the
B 5 3s E7n=++N)
acu-esthesia of soreness and distending is obtained. Retain the Fie. 5 -39 lntestinal triple needling
needles for 30 minutes. (Fig. 5 -39) .
.wffiffi,
1-*=+:t:.1::::r i.r.::-r: : . ': 11
-..,1='l,ir::i.':. .....
.i.:,j:,i:t .-: "
[ llfiffieH )
EIftIW-!ffi .frvtfr.,ftl#' .tfrtil "
The method is mainly used to treat abdominal pain, enteritis,
dysentery and constipation.
40. FJI\S1lt iFfX H +l*tJW.#1sB,J xM,tFW., lt E . zKiH/\+

7r,F. 5i1Fl z\+M tttr4+ * "
40. lnverted eight needling This way of needling is so named as
eight points ol'Tianshu, Wailing, Daju, Shuidao located on the ab-

donren are needled and formed a shape of inverted eight ( Chinese
character, inverted eight is similar to "V") .
lffirFfiiFl
,ftp Fl.'fn, i& mE IrH BE H t
tTffi XM,tl. F . tr . zK i6 z\ X, ffi
r.s -'f H*, & u) 4s " ffi )t +1, fr1 frJ lftl E,)- Ffr 'g 4fi Ft *. + ry, rc
rlt)WEK h IF., &d,t W.WBK, EX A [E *F ffi dl ffi + ( Kl s - 40 ) .

Method
l The patient lies on his back. The eight points of Tianshu,
Wailing, Daju and Shuidao located on the Stomach meridian of Foot
I 5 cun filiform
,t'w. M'fiarshu yangming are selected and inserted obliquely with 1.
\ needles at an angle of 45" respectively, to the direction of median
p oalu
€ shuidao Kidney meridian of Foot Shaoyin or midline of the Ren meridian.
\
Thus the needles form four inverted eight, and there're totally 8
\
needles. The acu-esthesia is soreness and distending, or possible
I
heavy and falling feeling, or pubic twitching, etc. (Fig. 5 -40).
B5-40 HJ/\fl^
Fig. 5-40 lnverted eight needling lnefeH )
+ YA frE hl .flh R.}ttil' R +FHAffi iE "
The method is mainly used to treat retention of urine, intestinal
problems and urogenital diseases.
41. 1n27/R *EEAiFl4tFffi,fr\E

"
41. Menstruation regulating technique This way of needling is
so named as it can regulate menstruation"
li*,ff trr*)
.{rp
Hl'.{i, ry 1 . s rl 4 2 -t "+. +1, E t m T /} nil *|J R fr ie . +
tl*ltfl*
+h., t)#K & i\, 1*. f' * V' t {6.EK t* rfLlk 4I,fl,} H T il ttHr l Fn t*, k E
#htt,w+t 30 h++( K 5 -41 ),,
Method
The patient lies on her back. The acupuncturist selects 1. 5 cun
or 2 cun filiform needles. Qihai, Zhongli and Cuilai are needled re-
spectively from the superior to the inferior. It's advisable to obtain
the acu-esthesia of soreness and distending that will radiate to the
pubic region or the genitals. Retain the needles for 30 minutes
(Fig. 5 *41).
B 5 -41 iB€^
I r]fifi&H ) Fie. 5- 41 Menstruation regllating tech-
*i6,B % T tffi , ft Fo fi re. ffi , &.t? Afr. * fi.')', *. t1 F, * nique
&l:fr."
The method can be used to treat inegular menstruation, inclu-
ding irregular periods, heary or decreased menses which may be
dark or light.
42. +t&.=Rfrl AF|jrtu+ffi.h f ,t"4]t".T= ffiffiJwffi,
42. Needling of Zhongji triangle This way of needling is done

above or below ZhongSi point. Thus triangle is formed either below
\
or above Zhongtri. That is why it is so named. \" ffi umbiticts
/.' f;ft qixue
t'*'{f f,)E) Zhongli F&.

Henggu
+'&tl+th.l:= ffiNlffi +t&T = ffifillffi ff , -I = ffifi|J4x tr I

i&.5,it, E 7 O" ffi*rj ; T = A.*|J n + +e . & B, E 7 0" ffiF[, lfr H
&\tt-2-l(Ks-42)"
Method 'Qixue€X-
This method is divided into upper triangle needling and lower Sdft
Zhongji
f
Hengguffifl-
triangle needling. The former means to needle ZhongSi and Qixue
with an angle of 70o, the latter means to needle ZhongSi and Henggu
with an angle of 70o. The depth in both cases is I * 2 cun
(Fis. 5 -42).
IilfiRE,H I 85-42 +t&=frfirj

Fie. 5-42 of Zhongiitriangle
i6i6ffi . pH E . E %.T1H -ffi * -Pfrrc,RfrfrAEli6m+
Needling
"
It is used to treat nocturnal emission, impotence, dysmenorrhea
leucorrhagia, prolapse of uterus, frequent and urgent urination or
MWW
tlmltfllx
enuresis etc.
43. €la1frrJ +fr\{X&Xfr# Ffi +,fnl,WtfrlF- E

"
43. Pubic needling Pubic needling is done in the pubic" That is
why it is so named.
IffiTEfiJEI
ryffi8.ffi'Fl,ft,tsHfrlj,lftH 1 - 1. s'i( K s - 43) "
Method
To needle Q,rg,r, Henggu and Qichong perpendicularly I * l. 5
cun(Fig.5-43).
5F Qlctioig &fl Queu t ilftffieH I

i6pEE+iu ,ffi*.mru.iBm+"
It is used to treat impotence, premature ejaculation, leucorrha-
gia, uterine prolapse and enuresis, etc.
E 5 -43 €l'6lF[
Fig. 5-43 Pubic needling
44. *frtfr +*NJ&H*$,WffiitF,E "
M. Pertneal needling Perineal needling means that the needling
is done at the perineum.
tffi.{f i-r*l
u+Ffrxh f ,L"t.T -E,E& I t4li&,fi ,*ft\Hfllz,
n o. s - 1 f ,UM-ffiflK4+<rrE( Kl s -++;,
Method
One needle is inserted into Huiyin and four needles are inserted
I cun beside its four sides 0. 5 - 1 cun in depth, till acu-esthesia of
soreness, numbness and distending is felt ( Fig. 5 -44) "
I rlf,FEH I
i6H)6,2J. FZFftiJ. i6ffi , B 461H. ffi Efl FW.
It is used to treat hemorrhoid, dysuria, nocturnal emission, ir-
regular menstruation mania and syncope.
B 5 -44 tfiljt
Fie. 5-M Perineal needling 45. Heart opening technique This way of needling is so named
as this method can remove stagnation in the heart and relieve angina
pectoris.
rI
ruffiffi
,;,:;:,.'a;1-i+:3u
Iffi,ftf ;*)
4x r.s 'tF*,+l ,tlfriD l.^X
.:k?h-.i(HfriJ)t+1-i-?h.
Nsl
N 0.s -0.8 t',^X,ZFllt 0.8 - 1.2 -1 ,&l)4&r.:"hE,atA
wr*+-+_ffiffiel Fr _L{€+5}F}w H,N\H.4+" W+l 3a hw,1g r{
infflH,*tjtri*(K5-4s)" 4l
plg{
I Ximen
Neiguan
Method
L 5 cun filiform rreedles are selected and inserted in three points JkE P*ing
of Ximen, Neiguan and Daling perpendicularly. The needling depth
for Daling is 0.5 *0. 8 cun, and 0. 8 -1.2 c'un f<rr Neiguan and Ximen,
till the acu-esthesia is obtained. The effect will be better if there's sore
or numb feeling radiating to the tip of fingers or transmitting upwards
to the elbow and arm. Retain the needles for 30 minutes, and electro
acupuncture stimulatbn can be applied too ( Fig. 5 - 45) .
B5-45 ffrUrfr
Fig. 5 -45 Heart openins technique
I ilfifEH I
*ia,t'4rffi.,L'Bf x)R.
This way of needling is mainly used to treat angina pectoris and
pain in the cardiac region.
46. XE=A*ll 4i*ERflEHg$ffibt.--R,'FH!=+ aii i|J7-
ffii'4+E "
46. Triple He needling in the popliteal fossa This way of need-
Iing is so named as three He-Sea points of the Bladder, Sanjiao and
Kidney meridians in the popliteal fossa are selected and needled- b=[ Weizhong
Weiyang
Iffi'fff,)*l
R 1. s ttrft,tlfr\+4 tr.4 pH. [EA=tHfriJ/--,)trt
y\\
0" s - I -t ,&lr4F;<hB., elEiinffi €fl , W+t 20 - 30 ,I# ( K
5 -46)
"
Method
1. 5 cun filiform needles are selected and inserted into three E s -46 El=6ru
Fig. 5 -46 Triple He needling in the pop-
acupoints of Weizhong, Weiyang and Yingu perpendicularly to a
liteal fossa
depth of 0.5 -I
cun, till the acu-esthesia is obtained. Electro-acu-
puncture can be applied. Retain the needles for 20 - 30 minutes
(Fig.5-46).
I IIfiFEHI
+mrinEF, llgffi m,H, fiEsB^fri .
.ffi
ffiffi
This method can be used to treat muscular atroplry and bi syn-
drome of the lower limbs, soreness of the waist and knees, motor
impairment of the knees and legs.
+t . E= hfirl .+rx B ry H , *4'l1h ,:.4.V, =.f -FAX frilztfn

4+F' "
47. Triple He needling on the foot This way of needling is so
named as three l,ower He-Sea points of the Stomach, Large Intestine
and Small Intestine are selected and needled.
tffi,lf f r*l
,fFffi {n, F,,g
--- E, t
tr m . T tr ffi
=+ T E i(, Hfril & }J
I -1.s -1,ffBmEKEIEIf"f rg,bRrEHWffi.,W+f2a -30 hW
(ws*47)"
,E-.F, Zusanli Method
The patient stretches his leg. Three l,ower He-Sea points of Zu'
tEffi shangluxu
sanli, Shangjuxu and Xiajuxu are selected and needled perpendicu-
TEdZ Xiajuxu
larly to a depth of I - l. 5 cun. The acu-esthesia of soreness and
distending may radiate to the ankle or instep of the foot Retain the
needles for 20 - 30 minutes ( Fig. 5 - 47 ) .
[ ilfiREHI
+i6 H EKRffi, iN H'F . IEI:I -WEKffi[g. iH4LA R .}IIE'
B5-47 E=6AJ [FfiI -ffiiF.+"
Fie. 5 " 47 Triple He needling on the Clinical Application
foot
This method can be used to treat gastrointestinal problems such
as stomachache, vomiting, abdominal distending, borborygmus,
dyspepsia, diarrhea, constipation and dysenterY, etc.
48. = Fn HFigE*lJ 4r* H = ffi tr"t FfrwHrt Frft*[H{, El

,F €H Et*ft H! +l F-fri)zffii4+ A "
T -fi
48. Sanyin to Quan tail-chasing needling This wav of need-
ling is so named as when needles are inserted from Sanyinjiao to-
wards the direction of Yinlingquan, the tails of inserted needles are
closely followed by the subsequent needles.
t++,ff f t*I
m 3 -i€ft,li?leilH Tfr[t e 4s' ffira ffi hRf E *lJ
2 - 2 . s'1, F L) E H i' fX H ffi A fr tJ H je il . *
=-
ffl t XlJ f"r }ffi
^
'd, & U {#.frK E- lfldl# t't\,il ) ;t M., gi +l' 3a h ++, &-nj fiil rH EE fr H
tJ
i*
( [+] s -48),,
Method
3 t:un fili{brrn needles are selected. First, one needle is insert-
ed from Diji at the lorver parl to the direction of Yinlingquan at the
upper pafi at an angle of 45o to a depth of 2-2.5 cun; then the
same nrethod is applied to the needling from Lrgu to Diji and San- =[nt Sanyiniiao
yinjiao to Lougu, till the acu-esthesia of soreness, distending,

heaviness and numbness is obtained. Retain the needles for 30 mi-
nutes. . Electro-acupuncture stimulation can be applied ( Fig. 5 -
48). B 5 -48 =pEtaRigEfill
Fig. 5 - 4f! Sanyin to Ouan tail-chasing
[ ilfiFEH I needling
Eh W.ffifln R, n f-HF., IJ.'WWM
"
The method is mainly used to treat abdominal pain, intestinal
diseases, andrological and gynecological diseases, muscular atrophy
and coldness of the leg.
tE*)
+'t*+t1#.ffi"
Note
This method is prohibited in pregnant women.
fr4i$:iexi
4s. ,?* = ftfAfXfiFxEX*[ti4. E, ,ffi\%= Xwi4+& " t

49. Triple needling on the ankle This way of needling is so
named as three points of Taixi, Kunlun and Jiexi which are located
on the ankle are selected.
trtx
(i*,{€f,r*)
fiEjtlF. RAi\4[ff 1 -rl, +iBffiBKe,eER,WEffi
1. s
t%X+|0.s t,+tB,E*FffiEK&trt,gErt ,W+t 2a -30 hffi(W
5 -49)
"
Method
First, Taixi and Kunlun are inserted to a depth of I - 1. 5 cun
with the numb and distending feeling radiating to the heel; then
Jiexi is inserted to a depth of 0.5 cun with tropical numb and disten- B5-4e fR=+l^
ding feeling radiating to the toes. Retain the needles lor20 -30 mi- Fig. 5-49 Triple needling on the ankle
nures(Fig.5-49).
I MFEH I
+ ift FX *J1+r1 ()i W tfr .,8 T & .
This method is mainly used to treat sprairr and pain arounrl the
ankle and foot ptosis.
te'tl
*t*ryHf{ffi"
Note
This method is prohibited in pregnant women-
t Fil rkt+fd
I Appendix JScalp Acupuncture
1 . m ffi Ef # &frFt+ fi$ + rtsn * ff rfrfrnffi N *,' fi' g fl F Dr.)tt *!.l
z,w.E"
1. Queued needling on the anterior oblique line of vertex{em'
ple This way of needling is so named as neerlles inserted on the
anterior oblique line of vertex-tetnple form a queue'
tl*,f€f,;* I
frs,fn,Fx I tEI 1. 5 t'Efi ,+14.ft8 Efr?F4BXift*E rdr
Hfri*ffi, Qianshencong
Tfl, H EFi-i* )fr.+f I tEI L 2 -t, u trry.+f tr t.}*fl,l, H5

ft.ffi -+lWftAXlJ eBtrit zrt, +iB tll * Btr*
hE" frKffi
'41+1st ,&tlWtAW 200 IR.,++*+kW 2 - 3 +l++E ,W+t l0 - ls
tl++ ,HIFJ#;b fXtstAfi ffiA Eft{;l ,W+ttrt Ern1LY*'ilHF
t\atrffi+Itt(K5-so)"
Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist selects 1 cun or
1. 5 cun filiform needles. The first needle is inserted from Qian-
shencong towards the direction of Xuanli beneath the skin to a depth
B5-50 lntrHtfl&fiFft*u of 1 or 1.2 cun; the second needle is inserted from the place that
Fig. 5-50 Oueued needling on the an- the first needle tip reaches with the same method to a depth of I or
terior oblique line of vertex-temple 1.2 cun. The following needles are all inserted with above methods,
till the tip of the last needle reaches Xuanli. The acu-esthesia is the
[ot, distending and painful feeling of the head. The needles are Io-
tated 200 times per minute for consec:utive 2 - 3 minutes, and re-
tained for 10 - 15 minutes. Withdlaw the needles aftet 2 rotating
manipulations with above method. During the retention, the needles
-&Hffi
tl*lilllt
stand in an orderly line (Fig. 5 -50).
t ffiffieH I
,tift'l'Flnfr fu ,j6drnrttl .fiE&,{Rt* "
N+ +*,x .+', _L t / s l6xl {t/{tlT flnfi , rl,: 2/ 5 ?ft xf ,fn{ -L xf fr ,
T 2 / s lfi'l' M'llb m fitua Eh'l* Xig' ifi i{€,flN A fl*68 4L+ .

The method is mainly used to treat stroke, encephalopathy,
motor impairment and paralysis. The upper l/5 part of the line is
indicated in the trealment of lower extremity diseases on the opposite
side, middle 2/5 tor upper extremity diseases on the opposite side,
lower 2/5 for central facial paralysis, motor aphasia, salivation, and
cerebral arteriosclerosis, etc.
teE)
ffi'#w h frrJ,} FHt{"t, *lJ ztrra E r "
Note
This method is used according to the principles of treating dis-
eases affecting the left with the right and treating diseases affecting
the right with the left. The line can also be equally divided into 5
portions which can be selected and needled according to different
diseases with above methods.
2 . rF ffi tr f$ e,HF ++ fiiJ + fA n * fi- rE*n tr #+ *,, fI- E fl F 9r. tt *[ BtiTH Qianshencong
E-+
z"rtt"E"
2. Queued needling on the posterior oblique line of vertex-
temple This way of needling is so named as needles inserted on
the posterior oblique line of vertex-temple form a queue.
1ffi.{f f,r*)
H)i tilB FfitJA r -14 =+t+*E

r.2 t,ffi H*+tHtfiri4lT
+t,mE#}}ti$ft I rl4 1.2 .1" UffiW4;ltrt*,HEftE
*+t +t +frlj e & Ei(tlt, ftB Dl*Bm*&frK,Hf E ri+tsi,
" B 5 -51 MffiEfi]4fiFfiru
EA-wffi++ 2oo tk,++&ww 2 -3 tl++,w+t 10 - 1s tlw ,ffi
Fig. 5 -51 Oueued needling on the pos-
lE F,F **FfA+€ ffi Atr € ft,,4 }* g +t W Ernlaa-ft AFrytJE
terior oblique line of vertex-temple
JfFlfftt(Kl5-sl)"
Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist selects 1 cun or
,4 "*we
ffi #,#
l. 5 cun filiforn needles. J'he first needle is irrserted from Baihui to-
wards the rlirection of Qubin beneath the skin to a depth of I or 1.2
cun; the secontl needle is insertetl frnm the place that the first need-
le tip reaches with the same method to a depth of 1 or 1.2 cun. 'fhe
following needles are all inserted with above methods, till the tip ol'
the last needle reaches Qubin. The acu-esthesia is the hot, disten-
ding and painful feeling of the head. 'I'he needles are rotated 200
times per minute for consecutive2 -3 m.inutes, and retainecl {br l0 -
15 minutes. Withdraw the needles after 2 rotating manipulations
with above method. During the retention, the needles stand in an
orderly line (Fig. 5 *51).
I MFEH I
+?6+Ft!frffi.BfrTfrJ# "
N + +e, L 1 / s lhxt {trtj F Xn ts ffi p+ {+, rT 2/ s i6 x'1 filJ -L ffi
HffiHf+ ,T 2/s i6xf&l*HHffBn+,
The method is mainly used to treat stroke, encephalopathy,
and impaired senses.
The upper l/5 in the treatment of
part of the line is indicated
lower extremity sensory disorders on the opposite side, middle 2/5
for upper extremity sensory disorders on the opposite side, lower2/5
for sensory disorders on the head and face on the opposite side.
IE'*I
FI"trfifEtf,.+&H!{"tful "
Note
See "Queued needling on anterior oblique line of vertex-tem-
ple".
3. If,ETffiffi*rj Af*F*ftraHX, H-,F,FlTff =fl,I

lnffi:lftt'\.& "
3. Arrow-shaped needling below the parietal bone This way of
needling is so named as three needles inserted from one point of vo-
luntary movement area downwards form a shape of arrow.
85-52 lfriBTar*fifi|J It*,ff f it)

Fie. 5 - 52 Arrow-shaped needling be-
low the parietal bone
rnP#frFrw - **,+L=4Rfi ,-+l r"rTrftEH*[ I - r.2 -r ,
nwfi FrFfS fritr&#*40'f$F1ifrEfilj " E+rEh++{A++d
.H-ffi',nfffi:
20a tk, fiftr,*t{'lx+l11{kffi ,++t&tft+t 2 - 3 +lw ,ffi+f s - to tl
wffiEtt-.€{-l( Kl 5 -sz;.
Method
'l'he patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist selects l. 5 cun
fililbrm needles. The needle tips are inserted obliquely into the scalp
along the acupoint area. 'I'hree needles are inserted along three lines
under the parietal protuberance: one needle is inserted downwards
beneath the skin to a depth of 1 -1 .2 cun, the other two needles are
inserted at an angle of 40o obliquely torvards the anterior and poste-
rior respectively beneath the skin. Each needle is rotated 200 times
per minute, and the acu-esthesia is the hot feeling of the opposite
part. The needles are rotated for consecutive2 -3 minutes and with-
drawn after 5 - 10 minutes' retention ( Fig. 5 - 52) .
IrtfiFruH )
+16*H{ft,
This method is mainly used to treat apraxia.
tE;*)
+lE= +t X E, rffi ftl6F Hf d,trI F, ffi +lW +l *,-fl Fp trT,
Note
In this method, three needles are used simultaneously. In clin-
ical treatment, it's also applicable to use two needles or one needle.
ffi* 1&, Lateral Line I of forehead
4.ffi# I &+t1friJ 48tr+ffifJ-F[*fiAn* | &ffii?+*. lIl9RLateral Line III of forehead

4. Parallel needling of the lateral line I of forehead This way
of needling is so named as the lateral lines I of forehead in scalp
puncture are needled parallel.
.r\
--\ 1ld> r*ts*\
tffi.{f fir*l -<a,
iE${n,F 1. 5 -tEI 2 -f E+t, ft+tfriJtr tr +ffrilfr , * tm
T, ffi ft+'fi " +l +lEX Xf,+4rfr|j TFT trbIifr B . 2 - t . s -l 1
E,'-e4} ffifA* 200 tt-t\ J:, fI- E )F EK r{, fi8 *F A E fr H " f+ 4

th+t2 -3 +++,w+15 - 10 hw,F+aft 1 -2 +w" ffi*r s -
t0 hw,H=tR+a+t 1 -2 ]?'}ffiEft+t( K 5 -s3)
"
Method
Et5 53 gn* r &ryfiNJ
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist selects 1. 5 cun or
Fig. 5-53 Parallel needling of the late-
2 cun filiform needles. The left line is needled first and then the ral line I of forehead
right line from the superior to the inferior. Two needles are parallel.
-,, d ;*l-if ,iP. ''

'# ,,ll' '[ t t.
i:j rqli ",, !"{
The needle tips are inserted obliquely along the acupoint line be-
neath the skin to a depth of 1.2 --1.5 cun' Rotate the needles at a
frequency over 200 times per minute" When the acu-esthesia of pain
or distending is felt, there's hot feeling in the chest. Rotate the
needles for consecutive 2 - 3 minutes and retain the needles for 5 -
l0 nrinutes. Then rotate the needles for I -2 minutes before another
5 - l0 minutes' retention. Withdraw the needles after I - 2 minutes
rotating manipulation of the third time ( Fig. 5 - 53 ) .
t rltftrH I
4 m, ffi .,L' tF .'[E'l+ .,L. lffi .,L. IF-'F & ffi ,L'
ffi+" ^Vr,<.ffi.-,L'
Asthma, prolonged cough, shortness of breath' palpitation,
cardiac pain, tachycardia and coronary heart disease.
IEE]
4i* x ff -L RY{TF|,|, iff f t ft ffi iE "
Note
This method is also named as parallel needling of the upper jiao
and used to treat upper jiao diseases.
5. ffi# ll &,+'ftfit 4*E+{-#fril*+f'ffiry-n&ffi't€tr"

5. Parallel needling of the lateral line ll of forehead This wav
ffi* i ,t Lateral Line I of forehead of needling is so named as the lateral lines I[ of forehead in scalp
ffi* ll *. Lateral Line II of forehead puncture are needled parallel.
IIs'^Latercl Line IIIof forehead
tf*.{f t-*)
4*S +t+41, fJ-4ii*X tr6+4r*lj TETE ,ilnffi* I *,k111*l*'1-r
9rt<P
-\ flfirj#( El s -s4).
Method
The patienl sits uprightly. The acupuncturist selects 1.5 cun or
2 cun filiform needles. The left line is needled first and then the
After the needle tips are inserted obliquely along the acupoint. line
beneath the skin, the needles are manipulated to stimulate the lines
rvith the same method in parallel needling of the lateral line I of
Fig. 5-54 Parallelneedling of the late-
forehead(Fig.5-54).
ral line II and III of forehead
'ffi,,.
L
I llfitr&H I
tih,+', ft tfr iit, fi fi{'flE H )fr + "
'Ihis method is mainly used to treat middle jiao diseases such as
liver, gallbladder and stomach problems, etc'
IeIEI
4fE X ffi + ft * {r*!.l, uj.lh'F Hlfr irF'
"
Note
This method is also named as parallel needling of the middle
jiao and used to treat middle jiao diseases.
6. ffi # lil *,+11*l +EE*4T +1fr[*+l6i*m&fri1F,& "

6. Parallel needling of the lateral line lll of forehead This wav
of needling is so named as the lateral lines III of forehead in scalp
puncture are needled Parallel.
I#TEfi;EI
+t +11, ff Ai*X X Ni-INJT PT x Dr, i^B t' 2 - r' 5 -l E' in

ffi* | *,#r4-+l*11{;lfrilft( Kl s - 54) .,
Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist selects 1.5 cun or
After the needle tips are inserted obliquely along the acupoilt line
beneath the skin to a depth of 1.2 - 1.5 cun, the needles are ma-
nipulated to stimulate the lines with the same method in parallel
needling of the lateral line I of forehead ( Fig. 5 - 54)'
t rifiFEF I
tiaTRffiiE, JiHE wR4,r/Ha4"ffiitr ' lnrifiEjnlr*g s
Clinical ApPlication
This method is mainly used to treat lower jiao diseases, espe-
cially genital and intestinal tract problems, such as dysfunctional u-
terine bleeding, prolapse of the uterus, impotence, frequent uritla-
tion and urgent urination, etc'
telEI
-ffi
=W.Ftr'
t:::!t . -. .':' :.:., ..
::.:ji:!:i:.1.
r. r : !-ii:::.i
-,:il':it, r":.::::,.i:-'.f '
:tsi::i::,:!t:::- ,. :
;tira;.r.:.: il:::,
,F lX y #JiT R.ry''i1 *tJ, 7fr lr T ft lrxi iLt,

Note
'l'his rnethod is also named as parallel needling of the krwer jiao
and used to treat lower jiao diseases"
7. tft Lt&,+"ftfit 4l*tlJ 'F6ft*|J-r)kf rffiL*ri.ttii?,2"

7. Parallel needling of the superolateral line of occiput 'l'his
way of needling is so named the superiorlateral lines of occiput in
scalp acupuncture are needled parallel.
tl*,ff 1-r* I
Ee.fn ,Wz -tfr,l.s t€fJ' ,../frltrfi\tr*tltrlfi\, H iini
FXS:**, Sr-rperolateral line of occipr.rl T , ffifi+ 1-rfriJ ,ft+iAir Xf;+4T*{ T ET E 7s+Wt*+€d tU
* *. 2a0 tR, ftB,HnK ffi , HR x a *t! xKl*, ++ *we+ 2 - 3 /i ++, m +l
lflJ]F lnferol ateral i ine of occipr-rl
s - 10 htF;fi+h+t r -2 /rl++,ffi+t 5 - 10. h++,ffi=tLlh+t

1 -2 +++,trw#+f ( Kl5 -ss)
"
Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acupuncturist selects 1.5 cun or
After the needle tips are inserted obliquely along the acupoint line
beneath the skin, the needles are rotated 200 times per minute.
When the acu-esthesia of pain or distending is felt, there's hot and
distending feeling in the eye areas. Rotate the needles for consecu-
B5-55 tfr'LByk+|ifriJ
Fig. 5 55 Parallel needlins of the su- Iive2- 3 minutes and retain the needles for 5 - 10 minutes. Then
perolateral line of occiput rotate the needles for I -2'minutes before another 5 - 10 minutes'
retention. Withdraw the needles after 1 -2 minutes rotating manipu-
lation of the third time ( Fig. 5 - 55 ) .
[ ilfiFtrH I
tYftEtr'l*tr qE. H A [*e,]I,14H4 -flfrft.triEft. Fr4'H
HZ,F .Etr.frILfth "
This method is mainly used to treat corlical blindness, cata-
ract, retinitis, sequelae of encephalitis, Meniere's syndrome and
myasthenia gravis.
8. +iT#&,+ttfrl 4rEE+1 r+tfriJ*+l+hT*&tnl+A "

L Parallel needling of the inferolateral line of occiput This
r'vay of needling is so named the inferiorlateral lines of occiput in
.'s '!!r:til'tt:!,f
!;:in
il i-; ;;;!i!+!
ii1 iij a.#
i-i.- rli ii
z-lrl'"'
scalp ar:upun(rture are neetlled parallel .

Ft y-*t\ Supclolate ral litrc ol'oecipLrt
*'..ryfF*|t Irrtcrolateral lirre of occiptrt
H*.ff tr* ) \r \ ,--==:
*'f
rt..1b_|i.,J+X I. S -lr{ 2 re*,+l'iL,l{ltrltlrl)7ihtlttfilrj, rh l-
jiii F , rtsFlY 1: ,+r'*W';(t\-li+47 rltlT NT tti ,1*ht4 ta+t i\ frj tld Qiangl lat)
I
J'Y
zoo lK,fl.lt&J-*,[5)ffi frYrHt 4i iqf^ff,, t.\*Y'tFl 2 - 3 h'* ,f4+l lJil.l't Naohu
H
s - t}tlF, H-{A€t 1 -2 h"+ ,W+f 5 - l0 ,l'r+ ,ff,""'tA.lhlt t - >t-F ' l_i.fl Yuzhcn
I
2 ]-?'trlF BIjÊfi( lEl 5 - 56) .

Method
The patient sits uprightly. The acuputrt'tttrisl selects I .5 c:un or
2 cun fili{brm needles. 'lhe left line is needlecl first and then the
right line fiom the superior to the inferior. l'wo rreedles are parallel.
After the needle tips are insertecl obliquely along the acupoint line 85_56 ffiT*1,Nry.fuNJ
beneath the skin, the needles are rotated 200 times per minute. Fig. 5 -56 Paratlel needling of the infer-
When the acu-esthesia of pain or distending in the head is felt, olateral line of occiput
there's hot feeling. Rotate the needles for consecutle 2 - 3 minutes
and retain the needles for 5 - 10 minutes. Then rotate the needles
for 1 -2 minutes before another 5 - 10 minutes'reterrtion. Withdraw
the needles after 1 2 minutes rotating manipulation of the third time
(Fig.5-s6).
ImFeH)
* Y6 4. fr tr T A fift m. fA M F\ - t J' Ettr..H rf s{ +t if X.iH . Ht F
fl
trti,*ffi+"
Clinical npirticdtion
This method is mainly used to tleat posteroinferior cerebellar
artery thrombosis, ataxia resulted from cerebellar diseases, vertigo
and occipital headache.
ffi7\H *+i+tt$rj tX
{ih.iApTffiflq fl $PH$t Al- r';HHn[* I n{ri Tlichiru Iniub:[;
++ffi+|'-frll* ,fr#- tbt;]"'+i'tF" &

4,+t" fit|x'ZIFtrtt*rft#t
+1fril16'i?Jii* ffi,H.ffi, 441$H B'l lv'EuffirFH! {t* Ht ftRt
frlJrt"
Special needling tec:hrtiques refer to the needling techniques
different from somatic needling or filiform needling techniques.
Those introduced below are the representative ones.
1 .
=ffif+*iltf E-fF+tK 6c'", ftffiEWtIM,+f HE
=&.+l
n,+l'*Wfi1il\+l R( EI o - I ) " tlrB,*F[
=&tt,4iffi =m.€
7\'fnEl/*t tu.E ,ij'..$i4€ffi.1& UWl?|F'ffiBti-E ,lFf,r'" fr\,A
lX" " RHWBfrI+'rt, iftf,{?HE+ ,'i*mlh,ffi B! tFm " Bo-r =&fl
1. Needling with triple-edged needle The triple etlged needle is Fig. 6-1 Triple-edged needle
characterized by a length of 6 cm, round shape of the handle, trian-
gle shape of the body and tr{pie-edged sharp tip ( Fig. 6 - I ). This
method is usetl for point puncturing or shallow puncturing to let
blood to prevent disease or to treat disease, also known as collateral
puncturing. It is effective to tranquilize the mind, eliminate heat,
dissipate tumescence and stop pain.
K 6 -2 f;filJE
tt*,{f t-r*l Fig. 6 -2 Point-puncturing
Hrt€ ru"
( 1 ),R fi|J if, ft *|J Efr &?fr *rJ R,fn*F,,iF m. v& fR F T fl fill
*lJ.{u,%H}xtY&tr ,E+'+8.fr. 'E}& + FaqXU*p{n4^{i,
=-#*
tr++++t,xfl&i({ifllt*rj^ 0. 1 -0.2 tifr, mHpr+f,lEs ,E
?:ffi trX+L lEl ffi , Ifr- #, ttu,t i+, f* tr ffi iH 6 tF t* 4 4F S & tr +f +L
(K6-2)"
2) trtrili* rlLrAExtffiAtrg$JEl Fji$ll,fifilJ ff:t-ffitrtrX,
(
'
tpffiffi,ggl5{ituj'flzFlf,, trifrlJ 10 - 20 +tUJ-,frffiNtf4*E
6vfrl'f,,1,,fr*tl ( K 6 - 3 ) "
( 3 ) th*|.l +* : rlLi* E LJ - ffi*YEW FT fr&'4 +tE"g' , HU) B6 -3 fln|Jx
Fig. 6 -3 Sparse needling
ifitr+-b#ffiVt*t*frrt( K 6-4) " &rcNiEH*LlH#,:W+I
':q
ffi:
L_ _ __
;t
i*lrlft iat
{A rirriirJAi\ fi N.Hl{. ,L|TNN.!W.a,2 - 0. 3 l5il,t ,y*t; rri #d A r{ F ,

+)Lffi MT fr &t+ %Ltfl4X, D) IN]r.| * )t tl. "
Ulll&'hlftl,&,'5. ** , lrrff J/,1 )r< {t , Lllt A, Ei -( Ji iflJ {i rJ,{L )ifr ,*.
4f&l-'$Aflts,irtj ; t:F :lXWt)ftE i1;;Jl h, /r, tft#t1ilft*Êii{lib,krj,,
lrl)ffi44i4411nY'r,tJ.'iL,{,i i* ' lrrii!,l'fllrr.r , ft!i,fl ut,\il+ 7t . r{.q
,ri?l\lI4i
wl+!ffi, rF ft fiF rl
,l€ ,llj.
, n[ g::t11i1t1ji:i]tr i& ,+i tt ift ; rjii f ,qfi
rJ
'h,]lt l J'ffit^.if llxll4fftrfrfz\f4i'. jrl.ifi

K 6 -4 gKn!J)*
u I1E jlllf *$ B fi A E ry,FH l,i litil ii ]*, 4t t ii fi it tI ?f 6,] i( 4lJ li
Fig. 6 -4 Prickine needling
m'i't tr fr,A,J,bift ,
( 4 ) i5 m E, H tI, iH #, E + +t+ +E fi' ;E &.fril W'fn T ffi , l* iuid
ffi ffi p.tr # +L, fr + ++ -,&. +l xl w w frl i!{' lnffi, flft , n B *l'l #
fii(tr 0.s - 1 trr(l^ ,f&ffi#,+l',itJ{'in if,,t-!ttrn"'t\F., I+jIr{+-tt
tr, LliH#fFr*&tL+i7L( t4 6 - s ) .
Methods
-There are four ways to perform this tecirrrique.
( 1) Point-puncturing; the selected acupoint is kneaded to dir-ve
blood to accumulate at the region to be needled. After routine steri-
lization, the selected region or acupoint is held by the thumb, index
B6-5 Em)E
and middle fingers of the left hand. The right hand holds the needle
Fie. 6 -5 Bloodletting
and inserts 0. 1-0.2 cun into the muscle and then withdraws. The
needled part is slightly pressed to let out a little blood and then is
sterilized with a sterilizetl cotton ball or srnab ( F;g. 6 _ 2) '
(2 ) Sparse needling: This method is used for point puncturing
around the location of the disease. According to the size of the loca-
tion of the disease, 10 - 20 needles may be used to puncture along
the outer margin of the location of the disease to the center, appear-
ing like a circle (Fig. 6-3).
(3) Pricking needling: Triple-edged needle is used to prick
and break the whitish fibers beneath the skin to tleat some diseases
(Fig. 6 - 4). After routine sterilization, the needle is inserted
transversely into the skin over the acupoint 0. 2 - 0.3 cun into the
acupoint selected and then is deepened to prick and cut all the
whitish fibers.
Take the tendemess as acupoint: In treating scapulohumeral
periarthritis, tenderness or sensitive points around the shoulder joint
can be priqked; in treating hypethyroidism, pricking can be done
on the protruding part of the thyroid gland.
Select acupoints according to the distribution of spinal nen'es:
For example, for the treatment of disorder of cervical verlerbrae'
cervical lymphadenectasis, sore throat and hyperthyroidism, acu-
points or the ne(rk can be selected; for the treatment of chrrinic
prostatitis and anal hemothroids, Baliao points can be selected.
Select acupoints according to the visceral diseases: For exam-
ple, the positive reacting points near back Shu points or back Shu
points themselves can be selectecl to prick.
(4) Bloodletting: After routine sterilization, the thumb of the
left hand presses on the lower side of the selected point, the upper
of which is fastened by a rubber tube, the right hand holds the tri-
ple-edged needle to puncture the vein 0. 5 - 1 fen in depth for letting
a little blood. When the bleeding stops, the needled acupoint is
pressed by a sterilized cotton ball (Fig. 6 -5).
I ilfrFEH )
= ffi +t friJ'&16 ffi T, -4. iE, ft ifr . * iE . m itr . )ffi itr € ffi iT "
( ),fi,frlj*, *ffiTtffiEl/eBttXffi i1' ,ff +H . 1'-#
1
gl*ffi *{ H'l^ FE . EFH,ffi4't,l:E+

"
( 2 ) trfr|Jl* *ffiUiH lhffifr"Ell(fi+, B til tfi fr"?* m iE4
'ffi t& tuI (F. H, ffi T,ESSm_m,. Xf ,E +.
(3 ) utsfilji*, ri,ytfilJ*ffi (Flw "
(4 ) i5mfE ffiD)NA ff F E, ^4.'l+
W+fr"ffi . *€.'E# E tr ft+
w'ffi.
Neediing by triple-edged needle is applicable to the treatment
of emergent syndromes, heat syndromes, sthenic syndromes, stag-
nant syndromes and pain syndromes.
(1) Application of the point-puncturing: Acupoints on the tip
of lingers and toes ( such as Shixuan and twelve Jing-Well) . or Tai
yang, Yintang, Zanzhuand Shangxing on the head.
(2) Application of sparse needling: Eliminate blood stagna-
tion, and edema to activate blood to remove blood stasis and to
dredge meridians to deal with local blood stasis and tumescent pain,
etc.
(3) Application of pricking needling: See method of pricking-
needling.
(4) Application of bloodletting: Sunstroke, acute strain of the
waist and acute lymphangitis, etc.
+t * Ei,* fu , p F FtJ ,f4,f&

* - E *F,fn, U Ffr h F.ffi flr - ffi trE .
tr ffi E ffi f J- r F fr tr
t.l #, trI tI .F
iI{ EE nN 4t& trt frV,, lE ' E
it tlLW f^F-
A1
i-f
'#:l[h1.,,
&.f*& I tr't +I F, tl
\N, +f tfr ;fr 6F. ln ffi Ex tfr W ffi' *L
rV 4, 4' +*
tX" r*ffiEtf,[t, -fqffr+Rlff.fi\,|F-t$h ls - te )gX,*4fittf.f
B6 -6 fie+l
Fig. -O Seven-stared needle
tF{ i&#.:fX{tft$4, T i&iilHi#Tffifl|ffi.+l ( Kl 6 - 6 )
" &ffi9t tlt
W H &'r .6 Ia|, il frtJf,r'h MtL+l ( ri 9.+l ) .'Y, &+l ?t Y. + f ),'9
6
W+f ( -Y t\I.$l) # "

2. Cutaneous needling The needle used to do cutaneous need-
ling, shallow needling with several needles fixated together, is
often cnmposedof several short stainless needles and used to percuss
certain area on the surface of the body to prevent and treat diseases"
'l'he percussion of the skin with such a method is effective to regulate
the functions of meridians and viscera to promote the rehabilitation
B6-7 m.* fiiRffi+tffiflrt - of the body.

Fig. 6 - 7 Holding postures of the The needling device for cutaneous needling is like a hammer in
hard-handled and soft-handed cutane- shape. The handle is either hard or soft. The soft one is elastic and
ous needle is made of the ox horn with a length of 15 - 19 cm. The other end is
fixated with. a receptacle of needles like a seedpod of the lotus with
short needles of stainless steel fixated on ( Fig. 6 - 6 ) . The com-
monly used are plum-needle (composed of five small needles) , se-
ven-stared needle( composed of seven needles) and arhat-needle

( composed of 18 needles).
I**,ff t'r*l
( 1 ) ++fj-fr '
rE fff ffi#.tfrwffiEffi ft f+ft f tt ffi A Zi E
(K6-7)"
K6 -8pffi+t*HsfrllHgBfi (2 ) Fir frlJ rixf l& FF filJ *F {n, tfr.ffi + ffi
E, Effi Hi4 iH €, +t
Fie. 6 - 8 Percussing the regions on Ztt,:W#l^*H FF +TEEffi -L, * i*{l+ft , FF.frI- "
the head (3) *|JHgEH
BfrfrIJffi , rtT 2,F )',, Affi T+Efi ,ryt5. JL €, I)) &.*ffi EH
ffinii/64!"
te*llf i6 T+fl'f4t&, UB-H.H.H.B. El&+EJi n +
JeA!,
*F'fii! trIffiffi.
( 4) FF XlJ *[ {i' O€ {E' % PF NJ, EF vh E z4.WtE41 W *, )t 11 Ftt
,tr*FFp*|,|, BpEftA,ESFrp*lJ( K 0 -8.Kl 6 -e.Kl 6 - 10.KI 6 -

B6-e pffifi*,ta.fi|lHfil|Hffifi ll)"
Fig. 6 - 9 Percussing the regions on Methods
the side of the head, neck and trunk ( l) Holding: F'or hard-handled needle and soft-handled need-
r# fl'ltflfiilE
le" the holding postures are slightly different ( fig. 6 - 7) .
(2) Percussion: After routine sterilization, the needle aims at

the sterilized acupoint and percusses with the strength of the wrist '?: .
perpendicularly and repeatedly on the skin with immediate reboun- tt)\(
ding.
(3) Intensity of stimulation
Mild stimulation: Applicable to old and weak patients, preg-
nant women and children as well as the regions with thin muscles on
the head and face.
Strong stimulation: Applicable to patients with strong constitu-
tion as well as the regions with thick muscles on the shoulders,
back, waist, buttocks and four limbs.
Moderate stimulation: Applicable to anywhere except !!re re-
gions with thin muscles such as the head and face.
(4) Percussing regions: @Percussion along the c4rculating
route of the meridians. @Percussion of the acupoint related to the
disease to be treated. @l.ocal percussion to treat local disease ( Fig.
6-8, Fig. 6-9, Fig. 6-10, Fig. 6-11). B6-10 RffiffHSruHSfi
10 Percussing the regions
Fie. 6 - on
[ fift*eHI the back
HHTIaff*'ffi .trER.HfE. FI F,E R,W+. H ffi .ffi
'Effi.-ANED}h.Nf.NRffi+" 'H.
Clinical Application ,a- ill -->
:*L lll
It is commonly used to treat headache, insomnia, facial paraly- ---J
h!--- i#i{
sis, ocular diseases, nasal diseases, vertigo, gastric diseases, ab- t,
a','< 17tl\
l----.1++F
dominal pain, flaccid and obstructive pain, tardiness of hair as well \'-'" llll '
as male and female diseases.

N
3. g fi tt*d,* E FJ ft'FIJ *tI f6rE fi- ]*, E U ++ft{ E! ui' 4 fl R
fiJ Jf EE Tfift Xgf {ntr Fr 4tr T, :fi ffi &K s{ 14 }sffi H0 - ffi
( 1) Mxil4( A)firu) ,F|HK?\ 1 tr)K ,+ttfrVlv)*)dil4g
6M,+t H5fiffiEt-H*,(Kl 6 - t2a) "
(2) W,+TN( Kl+14) ,*9K0.2 -0.3cm,ft+684V,+t
q5fiffig*Hfi(86-t2b)"
3. lntradermal needling Intradermal needling, also known as
E6-11 pffiflflBtrsfiuHsfi
o'embedment of the needles", is performed by embedding special Fig. 6 - 11 Percussing the regions on
small needles beneath or into the skin over certain point for a longer the chest and abdomen
period of time. There are two types of intradermal needles, granular
type and nail type.
mffiffi
#lFt, ltilfrl lx
( I ) Granular type: 'l'his type is I

in length, granular like a
cm
wheat seed or circle in handle and linear in shape ( the body and the
@
a. Mtt4
Y
a
-t-
b
handle) (Fig.6-12a).
(2) Nail type: This type is 0.2-0.3 cm in length, circular in
handle and perpendicular in shape ( the body and the handle) ( Fig.
a. Granular type 6-t2b).
b. ffifl4
b. Nail type
lffitFfiitl
B6-12 RhfiaJE ( ) M)ffro fr-tJ+l'.t| ' H*4,8ffi?H& ,Utr+fi].zs:#1t
1
12
Fie. 6 - lntradermal needling
i
tr X'fi T E ffi , +fr ffi Jl {+ ti Xll #'fn R ffi.l+ }+ El fr , E 4 ffi tl..'
ffi+*4+.+tt6, i*ETKfi*|J H p^,*
H?{wF-T +fte
0. s - 1 trr(( K 6 - 13), ttfrtj g?frtq.,-W.44W1841ffJfr
ftJE++frtt.R, +tfri_Ê ,ffilErfffiVr+tH fiff +6T B'l
F-ffi.#Wi.lFl , Ê *,trFffi-*#EfifH lt B!ffi
ffiflfi-2h4ffi&,
&HHIE+lt , iXFHi EJ UIXtF4'l HWfr.liE frJ ,TL\Wtsth
#Wnfurn*#fl&dJ*,**..
(2 ) ffi+T HE FJ ft' fX, tr H iH 6, til 4' ffi.T d.l,++ fl fH *'f+ ft"
ffi ,'&+t )4xf /&fr € X tffi]l#.friJ X, * E tJ 4r tr4 ffi fr fS fifi tr
E " tfttF, & trI u'& 4t ffi fk#ffi ftffi *T H! zJ' f tt ffi fr l:tfh lE,
'f€ffi r'f ,l+ Sffi 4' iS 6t- H +* fitJ t {n t" m " ift }* H ffi T ffi *[ . 4
*rx{n(K6-ls,Kl 6-16).
B6-13 R6#rgft*
Fig. 6-13 Embedding method of intra-
EK+ttgW,klH{lgl-flt | -2 n ,*# 6 -7 E,*ftxt.4.
dermal needle ffi nt'lnl THffiiJ 2 Fl, +Bf IEH &6,PJ ffi/*+ "
Methods
(1) Granular t)?e: After routine sterilization of the skin, the
thumb and the index finger of the left hand press the upper and low-
er sides of the point with a little strengh to stretch and fixate the
skin. The needle is inserted by a tweezers held in the right hand
from the skin into derma. The body of the needle is embedded
0.5 - 1 cm beneath the skin ( Fig. 6 * 13 ). The direction of need-
E6-14 EnmdH,* ling appears in a cross with the running route of the meridian' When
Fie. 6-14 Otpoint-mounting method the needle is inserted into the acupoint selected, a piece of adhesive
plaster is sealed on the skin beneath the exposed body and handle of
the needle. Then another piece of adhesive plastero larger than the
previous one, is sealed on the needle, fixating the needle inside the
muscle and preventing the needle from moving and losing when the
patient moves.
(2) Nail type: After the sterilization of the skin, the needle is
inserted by a tweezer or needle forceps for holding the needle into
the point selected and sealed with a square piece of adhesive tape'
"m'ffiffi
t# #lft"l*uE
Besides, the handle of the needle can be stuck to a square piece of

adhesive tape in advance. When treatment is needed, the needle
and the adhesive tape stuck on can be inserted directly on the point.
This type of needling is usually used to needle the acupoints on the
face and ear ( Fig. 6 - 15, Fig. 6 - 16).
Intradernr,al needle can be embedded for I - 2 days or even 6 - 7
days. In hot summer, the embedment should not be kept over two days. K6_15 ETARffiffNIJE
Care must be taken to examine the embedment to avoid infection. Fig. 6 - 15 Puncturing at the otopoint
with the plum-blossom needle
lllfitreH)
4 rt H ffi T H *r'l€,ft tn ffi 'w #fi , D) &. * )13 %.H X. tF Vl W
lffi'Y+9 ffi, inHtrnE ,l+%F\g ,= xts.4m,'fH*)ffi .HfiJlE+.
HR Efi H{A} . 4 Fffi . H rH,BE1. 'm. re'F,ffi .+ilIlm . E %4 }H -m % .
j6E+"
This method is often used to treat chronic obstinate diseases or
frequently occurring algesic diseases, such as hypertension, neuras-
thenia, "prosopalgia, migraine, facial spasm, fickering eyelid,
asthma, stomachache, colic of gallbladder, arthralgia, sprain,
contusion, irregular menstruation, dy.-"norrhea ancl enuresis, etc.
telEI
hffi E Fl ft"tF, 6 FIH4 |fufr tf+Nhff.( K 0 - 14 . Kl 6 - 1 6 ), E6-16 EnndffE
Note Fig. 6 - 16 After the embedding of in-
Besides the intradermal needle, other medicinal seeds can be tradermal needle on the otopoint
sealed on the ear ( Fig. 6 - 14, Fig. 6 - 16 ) .
4. Eff*ilE *tl * Tft{+fr* W.ffiB\H.+lK'4+*, RllrH fr fil

A*ffiFJ,HM:lNlD)aa-,frtffii+&( K 0 - 17 ) " Kh" JL+|" +
filK4J-fil€ +t X.Wwi*', 4ff '{+R ffi E s rl, ft KA E 3 R,M
FI T Ê.A # ff # ++,*, H! f +i tr E
"
4. Needling with awn needle The awn needle is a long filiform
needle which looks like a awn (Fig. 6 * l7). The iength ranges
from 5 cun to 3 chi, arvn needle evolved from the long needle and
the filiform needle in the "Nine Needles", and into awn needling
method characterized by deep insertion of the needle.
tt*{f f,;* )
B6-17 Efftrfl+4
Fie. 6-17 Holding posture of the awn
(I) H*tjilt +l t*, tr +E'ft SJ- +6, tr+ H 4H I* E fI ft Affi , needle
+t liffi fr 0. 5 cm,1* it *lJ E T, F. :14 ++ {H $ + il tr i8, ++ fi ffi
.ffiffi:.#
+ilrit ,H.klhs.*/4/t( [3 6 - 18).,
(2) + litJilI+l'tx k+r].E E F& , t; &ffr,ffi1fjifn{t
, +f,Rffi ,
.'!=
tr Y.tEltI.*, 'H+i8 *[
H T , +tKf+tHff +iJrte-i|fifr , 4t+pfr+f +
- ;E { W Ifr , fi ffitfr e\
.=
9tJ 4L +E.Wg W, Y't E1' *|XI* l r. fuT, i5 f U
o t,&*t*T'&( I{J 0 - le . [_{ 6 -20 .g 6 - 22) "

+E( (3 ) f+tiUf* '&lF-)t'r*Y,4+*tJfX (14 6 -zt7
+s0 {F
u:
:, "
xv 6 Methods
,l rfT o
"l
(l) Perpendicular insertion of the needle: 'Ihe left hand holds
the handle and the right hand holds the tip of the needle with a ste-
rilized cotton ball with the exposure of 0. 5 cm of the tip, then in-
serts it quickly into the skin. Then the right hand with a cotton ball
retreats while theleft hand holding the handle inserls forward to a
required depth (Fig. 6 - 18).
86_18 EFlJXfbE (2) Honzontal insertion of the needle: The left hand pinches
Fie. 6 -'18 Perpendicular insertion of
the skin, the right hand holds the tip of the needle with a cotton ball
the needle
to keep the needle in a horizontal position to inserl it quickly into
the skin. Then the hand with the cotton ball retreats and the hand
holding the handle of the needle inserls forward. The left hand pin-
ches the skin with the movement of the needle tip and keeps it be-
neath the skin. When the needle is inserted into certain depth and
K6-1e +nljHti* kept inside the skin, it is manipulated by lifting, thrusting or rota-
Fic. 6 - 19 Horizontal insertion of ting techniques (Fig. 6 -I9, Fig. 6 -20, Fig. 6 -22).
the needle (3 ) Oblique needling: The technique is the same as that of the
horizontal needling ( Fig. 6 -21) .
I rlfiFtrH ]
i6 trmEiftE.&fE .6ftft. H AkffiffililR+rH tr.Ft+ "
E6-20 +nljl,AftFlffi)E To treat sequela of apoplexy, paraplegia, spinal diseases, gas-
Fie. 6-20 Rotatine and lifting-thrust- troenteric diseases, urinary and reproductive diseases, etc.
ing method for horizontal needling
5. ;Hftit ffi+tr? *F+t*tJffi&+t tr J:X Etft, F.'MT.fi"jn
vE, {EH* h )Bfr.+t H lt Et+n . {fr ]t^ zffi fi uffiiga.fl*,
1:€ffiIr ,lft+t ffi4.H Ul.!&,ffi#+ , F.ffi+t t*ffi^l*Wx'$'tF
H,F]6ffRffifr1*ffif*.
5. Warmed needling Warmed needle means to fixate a moxa
lighted on the tail of the inserled needle so as to warm the needle
K 6 21 #lfiljtf;f€Fmx and conduct the warm sensation into the body from the body of the
Fie. 6-21 Rotating and lifting-thrust- needle. This will help warm the meridian to promote qi flow and to
ing method for oblique needling activate blood so as to bring both the needling and moxibustion into
full play to treat disease.
l+rlrFfr iFll
'1,f.+l
litll+''|, )l-Ftfi.I l' -):irl"+l'i5+E zffi ,wz,+lw #)fi*
V't{fKtr,Yr \.!lil/4.t'.+l+t'r l:.5.1tÎV , &l+fltWJ_€g*Fft I -
2 IE/r. Y\V't \'6 . f* L:,'5 it l- ii#,'ff H'l*'H, H€'X*8, h | \L
( Kl0 -23.[4] 6-24.w16-zs), 4Rffifi'l'#FFtr ,q&h,*iHrlfi
,frL'E+W.^3 -7 :l:t, iln1:'fi.\-*rt&^,1 - 3 ftHllr{ ,T++1hfi'Q
*p)fr#,,+l(Fl|6 -ze1 "
fuf +Prfr.H,fl HllrtRf I ?'i&'f4.HdA ,f\.uAh?h'tffit;f+t R&.4+,
B 6 -22 Efftrntl
Method Fie. 6 - 22 Penetrated needling with
When acu-esthesia is obtained, after certain strengthening and the awn needle
rerlucing techniques, the needle is retained in a proper depth. Then
sorne moxa wool is attac;hed to the handle and pinched into datestone
shape or a piece of ilo*a roll of 1 -2 cm (fig. 6 -23 , Fig. 6 -'2A, Fig.
6-25) is attachqd to the handle. The moxa is lighted from the lower
till it bums out. This is called one cone. Usually 3 -7 moxa cones are
bumt continuously for one time in the clinic treatment. If moxibustion
device is used, 1 - 3 moxa cones can be used. When the handle of
needle becomes cool, the needle is withdrawn ( Fig. 6 26) .
Silver filiform needle is the best to per{orm warmed needling
because of its rapid conductivity of heat, but the moxa cone fixated
on it should be small lest skin be bumed.
trttFEH ) B 6 -23 lt0t

AY*AiB€4im .iffiff+T[.ffiiE tAtA ,t*,N)6'F+tFffi ,H Fig. 6 -23 Moxa leaf
This method is used to promote flow of qi and blood, disperse
cold, dredge meridian and eliminate wind to treat obstructed syn-
drome. It is usually used to treat cold deficient syndromes such as
flaccidity, obstructed syndrome, stomachache, diarrhea, retention
of urine, nocturnal emission and enuresis.
B 6 -24 ]i.w,
6. )<+t\?t*Fffi k'Htr+t^fl E*|J X.fn A, h Fie. 6-24 Moxa wool
I)) * fr f.{{t fr iff , f* tr Xj* ]t W +t W- fr , ],. m B Fll ?* ffi . ^
L{' ^ft*ljrtH':J 1J ffi'
Fi H n''i fi:'J *ffi+lfriJfrl*"
,j<+lti i* FE +t ffi xrE,ff ffi , Bp ffi #!G ffi " iE ff ,t fJ-
F=i.
( rg 6 - 21 ) frilwffiir , iH^B!in ,,\,f4 [H ,wF-%<, ,fl i5 EE flff rr] 6'A ,
{:F.'*t&B.5.-ffi 1 r. JIt rl, k+fri IX.A&* hi,A,ffiLt-"K4 &, *
H {IFflE, +.EILGJ.,d,, .ffi 'F )B IlH, ffi + fi H, 1I. PH 4 F6, HBfi E Pffi , iH
iFJt.)H , thj]X]t t+ , tH,,FtE,H+ lFffi "
6. Heated needling Heated needling means to heat the needle red
first and then to inserl it immediately into the acupoint to cure and
'r"ffiffiw
prevent diseases.
of acupuncture antl moxi-
Fleated rreedling exerts dual efl'ects
bustion, i. e. wanning and heating effec;ts. 'Ihis method is used to
stimulate acupoints (Fig. 6 -27), rein{brce yangqi, stimulate me-
ridional qi, and regulate visceral functions, for the puryose of dred-
ging meridians and promoting the llow of qi and blood. Besides
heated needling can eliminate cold and dampness, clissipate stagna-
tion, remove toxic materials, and the decayed muscle to eliminate
pus, promote tissue regeneration and wound healirrg, strengtherr the
kidney and yang, warm the middle and soothe. the stomachache, Iift
yang to prevent prolapse, ventilate the lung to stop asthma, subside
swelling to stop pain, stop numbness to ease itching and expel wind
B 6 25 Ufrfltfir0tie to stop convulsion, etc.
Fie. 6 -25 Warming the handle
by the moxa wool
tffi,ff f,rtl
tX F! ffi Fl ffi + t)1 m h +ffi . x\,'H. . fr\, jE lt + + "
ffi , EIJ^+t'ii ^ - E il, %.rA -rt'ft )fr 'tl ffi H, + +i lT tffi ,F,,
E 4R ffi ffi 1H,'tft
" UmfJffi" ,&+ffiH!fifEryFi€iI6" ?trXX ,nXX4" futrlH
i
.[{ ; .rt\, Bp € DI /lt ry 4E Ffi 4\iiln & tr S fn it, ffi E ffi )fnE * iS
41+,5iet'H,EF'Rffif.|, y'F Bp in f& ft'fa'fF zfiEtJtarT Ffiffi tur'ffi
friJ tnid B! lft i( ; tr, BF & ft, 4 * i8 i& it s,

w w z )!.
^tfi
LLffiR*ffi,€fi,H#ffiffififfi#(K 6 -28.Kl 6 -2e)
"
^+
Method
Heated needling is simply characterized by feeling, nailing,
E 6 -26 3tft+l+Er[t]e heating, puncturing and withdrawing. Feeling means to feel the me-
Fig. 6 -26 Warmins the hanle ridian routes to look for tenderness according to the pathologic condi-
by the moxa roll tions and the principle of "taking tenderness as acupoint"; in feei-
ing, the principle to be followed is "rather to lose the acupoint than
the meridian"; nailing means to nail a mark on the point with gen-
tian violet; heating means to
to heat the needle to the temperature re-
quired that is, the needle is
is burnt to white and bright, completely
red, or slightlyred; puncturing means to insert the needle quickly
and accurately into the acupoint marked; and withdrawing means to
pull the needle out of the acupoint. The needle should be inserted
quickly and withdrawn quickly, because prolonged retaining of the
needle will damage tendons and bones, causing additional pain in
patients (Fig. 6-28, Fig. 6-29).
[ ilfift&H I
+gffi ifiFifr ,ffi E. Fr6. BE. mSH € fl+ .* E WX-H&
MWffi
NftKBi. g& OID
It is nrainly user-l to treat obslructive disease, carbuncle, furun- ffiffi
ffiE'
cle, hemorhoid, scrofula, thecal cyst, elephantiasis and
matosis.
some der-
WH
Ell
HII
7. 7t {n};tg*r* Xlni+:g{r* !Lffi7r{;t tr
-tX,'F_frffiHt3
+ Efr Eil
Elt
ryrt lI
kfr X th
).ttrtt XX In, U Fh lfr hffi k1 - ffi fr tX " E' E :E +f friJ
^&tr 9.tri ff'r # {l]l i, * 6 h P)1 tuI fr tgrc ffi l*.if frrJ E Zt *}tt xt
,
EI
l11l
X {n xr -E frilw.ff ffi a uLte,# a ffi*, FwH* a xh.fra, L)l F H
6,1
a. b.
ftx'.." =*k+r
Triple-headed heated needle
7. Acupoint injection Acupoint injection means to inject certain ffi.k+f
medicinal liquid of TCM drugs or rvestem drugs into certain acu' Thick heated needle
ffi^*
points to prevent and treat disease. It is based on the treatment of Thin heated needle
diseases by needling the acupoints and combined with drugs, organi-
B6 -27 xflfiR
cally bringing together the stimulation of the acupoints by both acu- Fie. 6*27 Heated needle
puncture and drugs so as to exert synthetical efficacy and increase
the curative effect.
lffirFfi'ftI
Artq EHrffiIfrt& H'lltff *$fifl*, 4.HIn##E BptrI
{Fffi , *fltEl'{FH 1 Af+ -2 Hfl .s €+itff+F, #il n nE r+*B
{nEl ,fFH t0 Ht+ ,20 *r+l+Ff*$, fl*El ieH s - 7 €*i6i*Ff
+t *r\&+tm H Ff K ft *,
ffi fF s{ tr *FH*r,iH €, ffi fiffi )t+t
7*'l*iEfrlj Xfv,* E'E{E T& ff EI -L T tr {ffi DJ * " tr+ <", F El
ffi,#fitr-drtr'' , Ff r'1.,1+&+n€/ t{ntr ( Kl 6 - 30) "
Method
Different size and type of syringe and needle can be used after
routine sterilization. The generally used spinges are of lml, 2ml,
5ml, or even 10ml or 20ml for regions with thick muscles. The
needles can be selected No. 5 - 7 of common injecting needles or El6 -28 Hfl
long needles for blockage. After routine sterilization of the local re- Fig. 6-28 Heating the needle
gion, the needle is inserted into the acupoint by analgesic inserting

technique. Then the needle is lowly pushed forward or lifted and
./ ,. \-
thrust for obtaining acu-esthesia. The needle is retreated a little. If
no blood is drawn in the syringe, the drug is injected into the acu- *D/
/ /
. \F ftfi
\\
Acupoint
point (Fig. 6-30).
K 6 -29 E+}SKFffiE
IIfiFtrH I
Fie. 6-29 Bifurcating the acupoint
Arti6ffiyEEl- iZ , fl"ft+f ffi4l*i6
^F!i6MiEt*FAEl
mffi'ffi
'i] ,\ur#rtdi. f5f:rt.iiUiS ,lt',!y^,14irL.,tiir| 't:il; ' jiifij ' jfftR 'ltFJ
1i1, r,fr fiL . titj l*'.4il #;pr D:#,,
This method has an extensive ildicatign inr:lutlitrg all tlre in{i-
cations of acupuncture and moxibustion. lt is ttsed to treat asthrna,
gastric diseases, diarrhea, jysentery, flaccirlity, obstructive dis-
ease, stones, nocturnal emission, enuresis, uterine prolapse, apop-
lexy, hypophrenia and urticaria, etc.
8. n{nHil ;'6;* +lt^ftE t-vfrftit el'*{s'fi,tX tll*+*

&tFlj Nx L)J 1+ i+ Bft nh tE tA, jr h H P,F p-t ;6,* ffi 4l l
ffi , E\ W''^WVIH
N.
ffimtBFUiari4.'ffiVtfr',t* ,t!ftTr(i-ngiliFlt( K' 6 - 3l ) "
8. lnCiSiOn Of aCUpOint Tlris method is performed on certain acu-
points or regions according to the procedure of surgical operation.
when the skin is incised and a little fat tissue is cut off, local
c
stimulation is induced to treat disease, also known as cutting ofi fat
A. +INJ{RE. from acupoint (Fig. 6*31).
a. Depth of needling
b. ffitrfi
b. Drawing trlood IRTEfiiTI
c.d. Egtz6& -dr€f$,tEA *' 4l . iH &W.N. tr *[ffi
fr&!T*iL+*n.
c.d. Injecting medicinal liquid
w&+ " *if Hf , #IJ i6 g{{i H*r,?H #, tr& u ffi ffi tr, u}E + N -
F6-30 ne*Ffx ri=#ffilK&f.hnfti( W* ,E+f++^ n')AT-rUJll E fik, UJ a
Fig. 6 -30 Acupoint injection
Ifl ffiI, fr|- W tt+X E, U lF-ffi*$ tr & m . fiK . m El f"l JA Fl +l ffi , E

.f€+ffi l*fr HfilJffi tE W.ffi ffiffilgE, 1R+8fi jH'E ffitn ffiE
,
,f+F94 qB ffi E ffi fi vp, t)J n trI t€a
" - *,
E ffilH & s) tF @'
+L,7 H ^
tr{rry,, €Ag{YA 1 - 2 X,ffingtji62.14 fgl Pffi 7 - 10
Method
Prepare lancet, forceps, suture needle, suture, sterilized
giPalml dressing and anesthatic. The selected region is sterilized and per-
H2Patm2
formed with regional anesthesia. The thumb and index finger of the
53Pdm3
+4Patm4 left hand fork to press around the acupoint, the right hand holds the
lancet to incise the skin. The incised wound is 0.3 -1cm in length
'$.t vatml
and is separated by forceps to expose the fat tissue. Then a little fat
B6pdm6
ti.r,r" uborrt the size of a soybean or broad bean is cut off. The for-
ceps is thrust in the wound or inside around the wound for rntibile
K6-31 massage to induce sore, distendirrg or numb sensation in the local
Fie. 6 -31
^&3J;AE
lncision of acupoint
region or spreading to the area around. The intensity of stimulation
and acu-esthesia are decided by the nature of the disease and the
constitution of the patient. After operation, the wound is sutured
anrl covered by sterilized geuze. 7 days later, the suture can be re-
moved. F,ach time 1 - 2 acupoints can be incised. There is an in-
terval of 7 - 10 days between two incisions. And the following inci-
sion may be performed on the previous acupoints or newly selected
ones.
tilf,ffieH I
ffi .+q4F96 .zl'Jl)ffi tR+ "

It is mainly used to treat chronic bronchitis, asthma, gastroen-
teric diseases, indigestion, headache, neurasthenia and infantile
malnutrition, etc.
e. /t{fr te*}* N&rtr&Ybftffi:W +flh*,IE^XIn^, f,U,H+

Eh -ryxt i(nB! ++4 frlj H tF H utft ft Rffi *1 fr 'E
"
+'& Ffr ffi +E M Ery @ffi ii5 € ffi ffi . il4 fr . i+ ff +$ . fF + -t&ry,
fi( K 6 - 32) .++fl*S.0 - 1 +ffifr1+Mtry,-1. 5%o - lEo xAWg*
gf B.+^4/l.ffFl4f .
9. Acupoint catgut embedment This method aims at continuous-
ly stimulating acupoint by embedding catgut into the acupoint to B 6 -32 Ig&#
treat disease. The instruments required are disinfectant materials, Fie. 6 - 32 Embedding needle
syringe, tweezers, embedding needle (Fig. 6 -32) , needle-holder,
number 0 - 1 catgut, 0.57o- l%o procaine hydrochloride, surgical
scissors and dressing, etc.
(ffi,{f i-,*)
Hffi]f.'tx6 =ff "
( 1 ) +Fulg*;g*,Hi4,iH €Effi , &1Eq- Ek | - 2 tr)KK B
tH ='e Vt 4 frtu *,, l\_ Eft W ffi * friJ +t fi € H! Efr ffi ,,tr l* f I ;iS, E_+
ffi . m : ffi 4fi K EIHE i:E ft *F'fn E ffi , A + f+ €i, frlJ 4|j Ffi ffi W
E ; 5 H ilftHE,ilJ€t-l E, yJ:W +Wr*,rg+Htr x {n W PT tH
,XEX,EII trFs ,+l+LtLffiffil5#s)6
"
e,nlffi e €i$*f+t +t *tFtrtr,2s E 2 -t K*1 E+l W *+l
+tF+|ffi,,W0 E+Mrry,t - 1.5 E)KiI +t*^ls,\X{i,ffi
(Ffi't*Ht-,
H++fr{ ffiWry,*IY&at ,tr*FEffiiH€,E, D) 0.5% - 170
&*,tl')P$(u -L, mfififf] rlil,Bfitf<++" tr++++l ,+1+l+Efi ,+f
jl:ffi n Fl T L)I, rs" - 40"'E ri: *u A, g ft * fr tr ilf 5t rxt ffi , 6
+Bp)Km€ ffi FI JT, tr +I+*)fr+f E hFh*,* fr AfS A T,
fi it +t 0. s Ig x, F&,6 +u fi' jg r+i, I+J {H f& fi,?} rF rc fr +r +L h
#ffi9)XFffi#{ft+Fd{ tr ( Kl 6 - 33 ) " ^tl,
(2)
=.fu+f
&*,*, ftsFH i<ti, t - 2 IEXf-LBt,ffi'fn{ , m)L
n1KtE;ttUft,*,ffifzni.E," AffiiH# ffi ,'&+lrleftffi 0. 57o - 77a
thmg€ FWttP.FrffiF+( Kl 6 - 34) ,Hf+6t#'** L|ffi+nk*,
tr'tfr.n*trtk* , )^*[/lt]Effi,fifr|J,^., +ittlnTtr {.tN-F tE4,
4 WW ffi*,*, t\l^ NW., &&W& H*F, Ifr.BVr *,fi +

F,!fi E ffi
rg ETggtR:A(Kl6-34)" W#?)fr3 -5 Er " €ntrIffi1-
3 .tii({n,-fit -30 gvEgfit tR"
20
(3) tlJJ+tE*;&, l*Efr.F" 7\.fn i ffi 0. 5vo *h mg€ B _F
,ffE?r{ffiE+ ,ffin+NJJlEffi o. s - 1 El( ,frWtu8+fi{RrliJ'(

fn iK 4f , 4.fr.tfrffiH d fiJl E t^ ft et H.fi & EWt) ++, 4*,H. t - z
E 6 -33 tg4.++tY&fr,
Fig. 6-33 Embedding method for em- hffi ;f*ffiH0. 5 - 1 tr)KKH! +ntu*,4 - 5 &rgT fll|EfrJ " +ll
bedding needle nrLffiLLrRtE+ ,ffiiiH€?}6 ,s -7 E Effi*rL*"
Methods
There are three commonly used methods.
(1) Punctured embedment of catgut: After sterilization, I -2
cm sterilized catgut is put on the anterior part of the lumbar puncture
needle with the tweezero and the style in the posterior. The thumb
and index finger of the left hand stretch or pinch skin over the se-
lected region and the right hand inserts the needle into the required
depth. When acu-esthesia appears, the syringe is pushed while the
catgut is embedded into the tissue or the muscles. A piece of steri-
Iized gauze is put over the needled region.
No. 9 syringe may be used as the tube for No.28 filiform needle
of2 cun without tip used as needle to embed 1 - 1. 5 cm of No. 0
catgut into the acupoint. The method is the same as that mentioned
above.
In using special embedding catgut, 0. 57o - l7o procaine
hydrochloride is used as anesthetic after regional sterilization. 1 cm
catgut is to the opening of the embedding needle' Both
attached
ends are held by forceps. The left hand holds the needle and the
right hand holds the forceps. The needle is punctured into the skin
B 6 _s4 =ftffrE&E
obliquely at the angle of 15"-40" with the gap of the needle turned
Fig. 6-34 Triangle embedment
downward. When the gap of the needle goes into the skin, the right
hand loosens the forceps and the left hand continues to insert the
reWffiffi,
# {,P
needle to completely embed the catgut into the skin. The needle is
thrust 0.5 cm more and then withdrawn. Alier the withdrawal, the
needled region is pressed by a cotton ball or a piece of gauze for a
rvhile, and then is coverecl by a piece of gauze to prcltect the wouncl

( Fig. 6 -33).
( 2) Triangle embedment: A mark is made by gentian violet I -
2 cm beside the acupoint on both sides. After sterilization of the

skin, 0. 57o*17o procaine hydrochloride is used for intradermal an-
esthesia ( Fig. 6 - 34) .The needle with catgut is inserted into the
acupoint selected. Both ends of the catgut out of the skin .are cut off.
The suture needle with catgut is held by a clamp to insert from one
side of the anesthesia point and come out from the other side ( Fig.
6 - 34). The skin between two sides is kneaded up and the catgut at
both sides is cut at the skin. The skin is pressed to relax' Dressing is
put on for 3 - 5 days. Each time 1 - 3 acupoints can be selected. The
embedment is generally done once every 20 -30 days'
(3) Incised embedment: 0.57o procaine hydrochloride is used
for infiltration anesthesia on the selected acupoint, a{ter steriliza-
tion, the skin is incised 0. 5 - 1 cm. Forceps is put deep into the
acupoint from superficial fascia to muscular layer to seek sensitive
point and massage for several seconds with an interval of 1-2 min.
Then 4 -5 of 0.5 -l cm are embedded into the iay-
pieces of catgut
er. The incision is sutured by silk thread and covered by a piece of
sterilizecl gaoze. The stitches can be taken out after 5 -7 days'
tilftFeH )
4rX+4HT**FrI'lE1*ffi ifi , iH 4 ffi - H,H . ffi E. i6R.
ffi ++ 4.ffiF B4 fiE,H . Eitr - ffi ilB,# ffiilXffi. ft-tr iE tr -+q %'ft+ "
The method is mainly used to treat chronic diseases such as
asthma, stomachache, diarrheao enuresiso facial paralysis, pain of
the waist and leg, flaccidity, epilepsy, sequelae of poliomyelitis and
neurosis, etc.
I*'*I
g;ry,?frnnh tLfr + i\ {n, DJ H H'n$ fl ffi *F x tr
iffi *F'fn ffi
H'ffi" {B4xi(4ffifu1,€ri}E*,1-3 tR,EI 14pF 2 -4IAIAtr

lw"
Note
Embedment therapy should be done on acupoints on the regions
*ffi tr%ffiiJ *, 'J- ,* trl A1

g4 tiu,pf - l.'r
LS '{tS'"4"r+
a.::::;1ii:..:r r :: _
a:::.t:;.i.:l=:. ::1
with thick muscles such as back, waist and abdomen. 'lhe selection
of acupoints should be sirnple antl concise. 'fhe embedment is done
g on 1 -3 acupoints each time and once
{f1;irfr nact tat rrcruc
ever-y 2 -4 weeks.
tF.tlt +$# Mcdian ncrvc
l(irlrlf tihar lcrve
rc. xlnfr+Llt +w fttE.tr, frft_v,t frt't't\*13,fr7, \4 #-Mt *,* t\
d[ f,!7-{ t, t.]
Quchi irrcisiorr
2\ A, tFT W1 IV t\ #t # +L, lE ++ & frrJ'W il't tF HJ u #t ft yk tfr Vt
'fr't*
"
10. Acupoint ligation Acupoint ligation means to embed catgut in
B6-35 ffiignt/nz\HK the selected acupoint with ligation of different form to produce con-
Fie. 6-35 lllustration of Ouchi incision tinuous stimulation to treat disease. The procedure is similar to liga-
tion.
('*,{f f ;* )
1j^',6'i.)Jn +.EWtFffi ,ffi &WlH€ ffi #, . ilil fr . i+*f *S . +^,* * /J
Hegu incision
,H,l+fifH .m"€fH',x+ re#,+fltu e,, gg n,##?) fr &
=ffi
W*tl+"
&tFffi/ifi-*)t't7 "
( ) iH€firffiffi ,&+^HiL,P+&lH#,frffiFeff. E*[
1
ffi 0. 5 %o - t Eo fAW*E F trjtl-itril{ffi #,

B6-36 66nAnmHE ( 2 ) +)J u, E Xl:)L+,f rt* +X tr 4b, ffi + n +XW E ffi.t\W*tJ
Fig. 6r36 lllustration of Hecu incision
ffiqffi.+tr,DJTK3 -5 €X( El6 -3s.Kl^ 6 -36) "
( 3 ) X'fn Fr &8, ,Kfi. tr ffi tr f.+1ffi 4lj fiJtE, fi rU ff H,#.
fa E fi
tfr 4 lF& tr W.dJ, IF.P +.W.EK^+n , fr|J H tE gE U ffi. E A?,ffit F
hE.
G) +ry,' ffi++fifB* tfffi+fihry,Wt-+%E-=ffi+t ,fut)J
tr jtA, TWEfi flJLE e xf fr +t t!+
E ffi , f* E El i$ * F
,ffitl
$J *
,u +|TLFU , ?al*,EILE -ffi ffitr, h E
VJ tr + S
"
B 6 -37 +^frtE+l'
(s) 4+L,tt*+L+M*,,N ,>W&#tE^t)J EtWM. , F **,*
g$&Etr iH € @+L #+Lill +t*'RE tf; H E, ffiffiffi. - Wffi.\t
Fig. 6-37 Semi-circular ligation "
*#Ei fH ^'
F, ffiEK ,Wffi.ffivfr#X-ffiW&?-tuaIt5t/t, XJIffi*F
i\&#+LVrt, tRffi#+LgS&&i6;F 48 HtZi E , E XH

6ntu1ry"+L*,+*,Vfr, H'H gT#+LfrtrtisT, e* q,Mf"
I6BK Huantiao
*L,HT-&X,fn( K 6 *37). €)K +M+s +Mt*,.+L,,ffiTfii
DEi(, Urf.VEi(h F,L', ffi ry,+nf"r ryK ffi R ( A H *F, ffi d6 ft H
-
,F,HT 2 -f FL) i-H,fr *ffi&+ifn1T Wxfrf"r ( K 6 - 38 ) . @
tfr 8 +M?"+L,ffiTtffi .flgpHX+X( Kl 6 = 3e ) " @K +Wvx
s +r"+L,ffiTriifrhx( Kl6 -+o) @4v4tL,ffiT=ffifl11,)^
K 6 -38 K+M+B+frtE+t, "
Fig. 6 38 K-shaped B formed ligation nffifr7tFli?edHfe^4-E#+L( Kl 6 -41).
ifi;F4.j16ffifrfift.ffit6rft,-flft ts -20 EtAff 1r(,l
tk,E.Ehl +ffffi-,, it {r} Ae upoint
Methods
'l'he instruments requirecl are disinfectant materials, syringe,
pointed lancet, needle-holder, hemostatic forceps, triangle needle,
tweezers, r:atgut, scissors, gauze and dressing etc.
The operation includes five st.eps. B 6 -3s ffi8+fr1ffi+tr
1) Sterilization and anesthesia: Follow the routine requirement
( Fig. 6 -39 Transversely 8-shaped liga-
tion
of operation to ensure strict sterilization and aseptic operation.
A.5ak-l7o of procaine hydrochloride is used for infiltration anes-
thesia.
(2) Incision: the lancet is used to incise 3 -5 mm on the skin
over the marked acupoint along striae ( Fig. 6 - 35 , Fig. 6 - 36) .
( 3 ) Massage in the acupoint: The hemostatic forceps is ob-
liquely put into the muscular layer of the incised acupoint to massage
to induce sore and distending sensation. The stimulation is moni-
tr6DK Huantiao
tored to the tolerance of the patient.
( 4) Threading: A needle-holder is used to hold a big triangle
needle attached with the catgut. The needle is inserled from the in-
cised opening to the deep muscular layer and comes out from the
other side. The needle is then re-inserted into the point where it has B6-40 K?YtT\B?YtEtlt
come out, penetrating the superficial fascia or fascia layer and Fic. 6 - 40 K-shaped and double 8-
coming out from the original incised opening. formed ligation
(5) Ligation: The catgut is embedded deep into the incision
followed by local massage and ligation after sterilization. The inten-
sity of ligation is monitored according to the conditions of the pa-
tient. The ligation for the patient with short duration of illness and
strong constitution can be slightly intense. While the ligation for the
patients with longer duration of illness, weak constitution and shift
of tendon should be slightly loose. For the acupoints located on ten-
don, the catgut is only threaded but not ligated.
The forms of ligation vary according to the ligation region and
the treatment requirement. The usual ligation forms are: @Semi-cir-
cular ligation for general acupoints (Fig. 6 -37). @K-shaped and
8-formed ligation used for Huantiao, around which one side is drawn
toward Tiaoyue acupoint ( located on the buttock and two cun direct-
iy below the highest point of the iliac crest) and the other side is
drawn toward Xialiao acupoint ( Fig. 6 - 38 ). @Transversely 8-
shaped ligation: Used for Dazhui and Yaoyangguan etc ( Fig. 6 -
39). @K-shaped and double 8-formed ligation: Used for Huantiao
(Fig. 6 * 40 ). @Circle-shaped ligation used for deltiod muscle.
'r.::5ri':5..i:i: :.r:.ti :- .t
!.: iri::tr:li:i:-::. :i. .-:-,-
i:::-:si-::-rr - ':r: l: l
:, t_i:=!':,r:,r, :i:.". rt :
:::.:nrrl l
'Ihe catgut is inserlerl into Naoshu, turnecl over Jianyu and ligated
(Fig. 6 -4t).
'l'his treatment is used to treat sequela ol'poliomyelitis. Usually
this treatment is given once every 15-ZA days and 7 times make up
one course of treatment.
lnfiFeE )
*ffiftftI? 4, )Lffiffi Ei6)ft . g.<HWrffi . H ffi + flk
=ffi
ffih+tLy+ffiifi"
It is mainly used to treat chronic diseases such as poliomyeli-
tis, bronchial asthma and gastrodieodenal ulcer, etc.
11 . n{ntFff r*
ArxE# E# ffi+ffi H.+*wr3,ffi #,fA*ift
B6-41 frYtWtl.' x,x-ffiffi^lFl,B#.ffi,lH,i1i+ffi,u E F!+* *6ftF'.ffi
Fie. 6 - 41 Circle-shaped ligation wfrtx ,y-flrffixffir*.,Rtrx,
11 . Acupoint finger-pressure therapy This therapy uses the fin-
gers to press on certain acupoints to treat certain diseases according
to the patients, pathologic conditions and acupoints concerned. It's
also called point fingering or acupoint pressing.
lHerFfii*l
ffiH6ttrxafrffi "
( 1 ) &trf*, BIrHffl+F .mffielf ffiB'1ffiffi4*,'W&fiffi.#
4+*- ryX&UNA L? Rffi . - fir* iI,, frl ffi lE lrfri.t tr t T

zi.F# ,+EffiWrtEX)tTffiW." &iEHf ++5 ffiETir{ni
64,E)ltATfuE ,fr#ffiE" &EH{lq€tX 1rnin, t),H,#l*
ffi#T)fi.h E( K o - 42a) " 4**i6ffi f &ffiffii6, in*ffi .T)ffi .
xq)H+,
(2 ),fi FllE, E.E If ffiX=F'eI*+H'ffi pl] +Tnft t F! *
ffi + ffi
ffiffi+tl*" ,fi, Fp ffiffiJeT" ffi)r ,zltFg-#.L5 ,WA tF{*. € i5
f+,,fi PIr hgWdB*F.,R pll Ht W ffiF-fff F>F €A
fr\ffi-dr
",R € H! *e €, D,iI, ffi E H.ffi Ffr *$.fn 6 l-E mi E
++ 00 ]A
1 FF jF pF
( K 0 - 42b) +tx4ffi+nK)HElJ€i5z\t4+ft
" "
( 3 ) xirli* FpHfElfE'el/riffi. +ffiffiry +n&,frfui\B!+i*"
'
ffi fF Hf 4 ffi r+ffi&ffi ry -L ( Fh tLtn (fi p.ffi ), /l\ t/ Hf H
frnEE +H,,
)r 4#* tp., EEfil4,+F +X fLF,tlffi ( K 0 - 42 c) " +lX & ffi T ffi

it *[{n d*€ rt, tn Ift vJ 7K i6 . r![ 6 . 4- ffi + " 4 * ffi T g *1, 4
i6trF.ilfl.ptrF+"
(4) E+&'t*, €Hffif*+Exftfi€trX{n6!+rt " trJ.HfE}.
-ffiffiffi
ri;=t& llt*. +': +F , 4fr1 . zr tF 5 uj'?F ,q'ffi ,'ff--L'f -)i t$"Eh
h xtffii&,tgrttffi h ,l&F,lr-xt rii.X.fnel ( fi] lt xt1lr\ x. [u lpi fr
firltHFAR.trtKft W,t+ ) ,4 jTJSl+F fiW+&tr.f(Fi,"HlrLv-atF
$.xtl/./,lffiWr ( K 6 - 42d) " ,Al*ffife*k&.tfi[?fr.rt,,m;\$Z'
'A ,&Nrt&+
"
(s)+*tF't*,t*ft ltHltqlt?af'4't?ffi W.#+fr #rail'ti<li',t?
fi M*WV'J-tr*ffi 'lF..V't+f*"W.ft ffi ffi ffi |F*-WeXVAfrft.t*r,)ttrt
+f* " H rrtW#EI A*lfr.HJ, N$n#'.'&tl++ h 100 K, 4*il'snt
lHlElTHK,*fft 1 - 2 hffi ,D)fr-ffi*lEfrft tH ( K 0 - 42e) "
6-'t*ffi+E+.ffitr+o
Methods
There are five commonly used methods.
(1) Pressing: The tip or belly of the thumb, and index finger
or middle finger is used to press on cefiain acupoints of the body to
treat certain diseases. Generally speaking, the pressing strength of
the thumb is of the index and middle fingers.
stronger than that
While the strengh of the finger tip is stronger than that of the finger
belly. In pressing the finger puts on the acupoint firmly without shift
to press lightly first and then heavily. The time for pressing is I mi-
nute for each acupoint when the patient feels comfortable ( Fig. 6 -
42a) . It can be used to treat various algesic diseases such as head-
ache, toothache and chest pain, etc. d
(2) Percussion: The proximal joint of the middle finger or the u. &Ei*
a. Pressing abdomen with thumb
tip of the finger is bent to percuss certain acupoints. In doing per- b. .F.Ep*;
cussion, the wrist joints makes efforts. The percussion should be b. Percussion with finger
c..fit]]*
made flexibly, elastically and rhythmically. In percussion, the per- c. Nailing of Shaoshang
cussing tremor should be transmitted deep into the bone. The fre- o. t+it1tz:
d. Pinehing md nailing
quency for percussion is 100 times a minute. The intensity of per-
..1*E*'
cussion is decided by the pathologic condition in question and the e. Kneading with thumb
regions to be percussed. This method is mainly used to treat disten-

K 6 -42 neE#x
ding pain for unsmoothness of articulation ( Fig. 6 - 42b) . Fie. 6-42 Acupoint nailing therapy
(3 Nailing: The nail of thumb or index or middle finger is
)
used to nail cedain acupoints. In operation, a little absorbent cotton
is put on the nail ( to prevent the damage of the skin by the nail) .
The nailing should be done lightly and slowly to avoid causing pain
( Fig. 6 - 42c). This method is mainly used to deal with the acu-
points located on a narrow region such as Shuigou, Yingxiang and

Shaoshang. This therapy is often used for emergent treatment or for
the treatment of nasal sinusitis and sore throat.
( 4) Pinching and nailing: Two fingers are used in symmetry to
pinch and to nail the ac;upoints. The thumb anrl index finger, the
thumb and midrlle Iinger, or the thumb, small anrl the {burth finger
press at the upper ancl lower or on the left and right of the ar;upoints
in correspondenc:e to ea<;h other (such as Neiguan and Waiguan, Yin-
lingquan and Yangling(luan, 'Iaixi and Kunlun) . Or the thumb may
nail the acupoint with the aid of the other four fingers on the other
side (Fig. 6-42d). 'lhe method is mainly used for emergent ireat-
ment or trcatmenl of emergent cases of coma anel convulsion, etc.
(5) Kneading and rubbing: The belly of the thumb or middle
finger is used to knead slowly and mildly around the acupoint select-
ed. This is kneading. Rubbing means to make rotatory movement
with the tip of the fingers. Sometimes the two are used together. 'I'he
frequency is 100 times a minute. The time for kneading can be rela-
I - 2 minutes till mild blood stasis appearing
tively longer, generally
in the skin (Fig. 6-42e). This method is mainly used to treat con-
vulsion and numb pain.
tmFeH)
4 lx El iH pa fiJl A )a + .'g dE ffl R wffi rt . Fj j5,i+ ra + M., lft
fr ffi.Y&lffin. lB t& tfl W +fi W l\iht ffi +n'ffi AA-' m * f i6 r? H ffr,
U
fift ,FLft *U 6VWh \? BtJft iE, r! FI D H 4 i8

" xf tffi iiE . iJL E + . +fl
4k+)ihtlH."
This method can be used to eliminate muscular cramps, rein-
force muscular contraction, regulate central nerve to promote blood
circulation and metabolism, reinforce body resistance and treat dis-
eases. So this method can be used to treat all the diseases included
in the indication of acupuncture. It is especially applicable to alge-
sic syndrome, muscular spasm and strain, etc.
dfi..p, g.i,%d"','r,
dm.q#'.#
$
EgEtHffi
sBr.t 97 E-7 -5325 -9 1 7 6-9
ilililililt1uffiil[ffi

Diagrams of Acupuncture Manipulations

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Diagrams of Acupuncture Manipulations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

++

.t,? Manipu lations

t&frfl frffiW{rlHRAEl * * 4>4-

*ffi 1i +t ffi EJr +'tX, HH 8 tr ?l' i5 * tn n ffi H-fr ft *{ + E h, *ffi H -

' T NJ" . " -=*ll " fi +€+ 20 *ffifr l* ffi WFWiiCt *, /i nT LL

HffiZfi+t*44 ffi" €AFffiff 6tfiU* ,itnT n ffiWffifi:*ffi+t

Diagrams of Acupuncture Manipulations, a first Chinese-English

book on the manipulations of needles, is divided into six chapters. Chap-

ter 1, Essentials of Acupuncfure, introduces the general knowledge of

holding the needle, obtaining acuesthesia and withdrawing the needle.

Chapter 2, Needling Techniques of the Filiform Needle, the core of this

book, introduces over 10 kinds of supplementary techniques used before

8 kinds of general strengthening and reducing techniques, about 23 kinds

of complex needling techniques and other needling techniques. Chapter

3, Needling Techniques in Neijing, mainly introduces Nine Needling

Techniques, Twelve Needling Techniques, Five Needling Techniques,

Three Needling techniques, Qi Directing, etc. Chapter 4, Penetrated

Needling, introcluces about 53 kinds of special penetrated needling tech-

niques. chapter 5, Artistic Needling, introduces 44 kinds of artistic ne

edling techniques effective in clinical use. chapter 6, Special Needling

Techniques, introduces I I kinds of special needling techniques.

This book is rich in content, demonstrating the importance and ne-

cessity of the needling techniques.

w& # t? wffi x+ + K, ^ffiH

rEffirsif D " +t+ffiixffi 4 rfr , *ffi.4+T z tqx" #+4& ^,&+

WJ1* R+ ffi4+ 2 rn 4h* #.tt X, U B-it * h X -#+ *+. ( fi 4- fi

tr tt#-+ X ,M&iJ+tr tr EH& Effiffibv,#+FfiW1+ffr&H€,

ffi'. H ftn+*H K++E2ttrr*) .( ++++f+tt f E).( tr#ffif t

+-" rfrtf ,trPJErJ+ffi ,ffi*HllISJnf K*fiffi+f^ fr+A)+ l0 A

ffi Wt ?f,r-tF-, &+W,f W* n Xt ufq *fr {* . fulLffic, Aft +X ('J' tr *

n-&Le>> .Kfr'tr/#ift l t4) .( +IF,,\F* *4ttr.)uVtt6+4) + 80

director of Acumox and Tuina College of Shanghai University of Tradi-

tional Chinese Medicine, a former director of Acupuncture Education

prehensive Therapy Association of Shanghai Society of Chinese Medicine

and Pharmacy and a deputy board chairman of Needling and Moxihustion

Technique Association of China Acupuncture Society.

Professor Liu is a professional specialist in various aspects in acu-

puncture therapy of Chinese medicine. After he graduated in 1965, he

contributing his efforts in book complication of his previous professional

expertise. By his rich experience in clinical treatment and education, his

ethical style in medical service and proficient needling techniques, he is

honored as a specialist of "Flying Needling Technique" and has been

worker of Shanghai College of Traditional Chinese Medicine and Long

Hua Hospital. He was awarded by "Liberation Daily", "Workers Daily"

and "Metallurgical Newspaper "in 1993. He organized and completed 4

research projects of "Determination Apparatus of Needling Techniques"

tional videotapes on " Needling Techniques of Filiform Needles " and

"Moxibustion Methods" were honored two prizes of outstanding Teach-

audio-video publicarion exhibition of national medical institutions of

niques", compiled with a unique style and in combination of science and

of the national institutions of chinese medicine, and was highly evalua-

ted and appreciated by international and domestic coileagues. He has

published over 40 pieces of theses on his achievements in medical service

and education, such as "on Acupuncture Education in universities',,

"Exploration of Naval rherapy", and has also published over 20 books,

such as "Natural rherapies in china", " special Needle Therapies in chi-

nese Ancient and current Dietetics", "collection of chinese Ancient and

current Medicated Meals", " Compendium of chinese Extraordinary

shanghai" and "Needling and Moxibustion Methods of Acupoints". In

addition, he also participated the compilation and edition of over ten

books, such as "New Edition of Acupuncture and Moxibustion Dictiona-

ry", &s a deputy editor-in-chief and editing member. Recently, he also

and Herbal Preparation" and "Experimental study on Methodology of

fr, '7- -;* E k4

ffi 1i +t ffi EJr +'tX, HH 8 tr ?l' i5 tn n ffi H-fr ft { + E h, ffi H -

' T NJ" . " -=ll " fi +€+ 20 ffifr l* ffi WFWiiCt *, /i nT LL

HffiZfi+t44 ffi" €AFffiff 6tfiU ,itnT n ffiWffifi:*ffi+t

ffi'. H ftn+H K++E2ttrr) .( ++++f+tt f E).( tr#ffif t

+-" rfrtf ,trPJErJ+ffi ,ffiHllISJnf Kfiffi+f^ fr+A)+ l0 A

ffi Wt ?f,r-tF-, &+W,f W* n Xt ufq fr { . fulLffic, Aft +X ('J' tr *

+f ft + B tt W +F- ffirEW #r EA v, E h,+'' + R' W +J 9* 4,fr

68, trx'x'j Ti# &W.h WWil\ #.* ffifr it p 6 H iE H " t ^

ffi_-# €+t lli

H=fr EtJ) 103

2. A,+#rflffi 4,+ll9/-ta., *48 ffi+t I B!tH.4 ffiK

2. eg#++'E iEjifrg&.4F El frrttl||tEt ,HffiT *ft.Vtffi

t&q$ .ff frlJ ffJffifr,,'fi+ftrtF6#. F H Ht&+lli ,frvw,ffiiffi.

4. {m#s{t i6HTBfr.mH.4nBfrfBff8[B![ff^( Kl I - 17).

6. fltj.ftS{n iEHTfrtJ.Hff,fifitl.4Fffiffirx( Kl I - le),